You can also use rotate(), which allows' - line 474: ' you to specify which axis you''d like to rotate around using a vector as the second argument.
' - line 476: ' scale()' - line 477: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p12x1' - line 478: ' scale() changes the size of whatever is' - line 479: ' drawn after it. Like the other methods described so far, it accepts arguments for x, y, and z values.' - line 480: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-heading4' - line 486: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p14x1' - line 487: ' Transformations can be performed in any order, but using translate, rotate, and then scale will be the most intuitive.' - line 488: ' Translation, followed by rotation, produces the effect of moving the shape and then rotating around that new location.' - line 489: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p15x1' - line 490: ' In the below example, try changing the order of translate() andYou can also use rotate(), which allows' - line 474: ' you to specify which axis you''d like to rotate around using a vector as the second argument.
' - line 476: ' scale()' - line 477: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p12x1' - line 478: ' scale() changes the size of whatever is' - line 479: ' drawn after it. Like the other methods described so far, it accepts arguments for x, y, and z values.' - line 480: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-heading4' - line 486: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p14x1' - line 487: ' Transformations can be performed in any order, but using translate, rotate, and then scale will be the most intuitive.' - line 488: ' Translation, followed by rotation, produces the effect of moving the shape and then rotating around that new location.' - line 489: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p15x1' - line 490: ' In the below example, try changing the order of translate() andYou can also use rotate(), which allows' - line 474: ' you to specify which axis you''d like to rotate around using a vector as the second argument.
' - line 476: ' scale()' - line 477: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p12x1' - line 478: ' scale() changes the size of whatever is' - line 479: ' drawn after it. Like the other methods described so far, it accepts arguments for x, y, and z values.' - line 480: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-heading4' - line 486: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p14x1' - line 487: ' Transformations can be performed in any order, but using translate, rotate, and then scale will be the most intuitive.' - line 488: ' Translation, followed by rotation, produces the effect of moving the shape and then rotating around that new location.' - line 489: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p15x1' - line 490: ' In the below example, try changing the order of translate() andYou can also use rotate(), which allows' - line 474: ' you to specify which axis you''d like to rotate around using a vector as the second argument.
' - line 476: ' scale()' - line 477: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p12x1' - line 478: ' scale() changes the size of whatever is' - line 479: ' drawn after it. Like the other methods described so far, it accepts arguments for x, y, and z values.' - line 480: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-heading4' - line 486: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p14x1' - line 487: ' Transformations can be performed in any order, but using translate, rotate, and then scale will be the most intuitive.' - line 488: ' Translation, followed by rotation, produces the effect of moving the shape and then rotating around that new location.' - line 489: ' getting-started-in-webgl-coords-and-transform-p15x1' - line 490: ' In the below example, try changing the order of translate() and-start__description__1 = Certain browsers limit access to the user's microphone. For example, Chrome only allows access from localhost and over https. For this reason, you may want to include an errorCallback—a function that is called in case the browser won't provide mic access. -start__params__successCallback = Function: (Optional) Name of a function to call on success. -start__params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) Name of a function to call if there was an error. For example, some browsers do not support getUserMedia. -stop__description__0 = Turn the AudioIn off. If the AudioIn is stopped, it cannot getLevel(). If re-starting, the user may be prompted for permission access. -connect__description__0 = Connect to an audio unit. If no parameter is provided, will connect to the main output (i.e. your speakers).
-connect__params__unit = Object: (Optional) An object that accepts audio input, such as an FFT -disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect the AudioIn from all audio units. For example, if connect() had been called, disconnect() will stop sending signal to your speakers.
-getLevel__description__0 = Read the Amplitude (volume level) of an AudioIn. The AudioIn class contains its own instance of the Amplitude class to help make it easy to get a microphone's volume level. Accepts an optional smoothing value (0.0 < 1.0). NOTE: AudioIn must .start() before using .getLevel().
-getLevel__returns = Number: Volume level (between 0.0 and 1.0) -getLevel__params__smoothing = Number: (Optional) Smoothing is 0.0 by default. Smooths values based on previous values. -amp__description__0 = Set amplitude (volume) of a mic input between 0 and 1.0.
-amp__params__vol = Number: between 0 and 1.0 -amp__params__time = Number: (Optional) ramp time (optional) -getSources__description__0 = Returns a list of available input sources. This is a wrapper for MediaDevices.enumerateDevices() - Web APIs | MDN and it returns a Promise. -getSources__returns = Promise: Returns a Promise that can be used in place of the callbacks, similar to the enumerateDevices() method -getSources__params__successCallback = Function: (Optional) This callback function handles the sources when they have been enumerated. The callback function receives the deviceList array as its only argument -getSources__params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) This optional callback receives the error message as its argument. -setSource__description__0 = Set the input source. Accepts a number representing a position in the array returned by getSources(). This is only available in browsers that support navigator.mediaDevices.enumerateDevices() -setSource__params__num = Number: position of input source in the array diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.AudioVoice.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.AudioVoice.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index dd6d5826a9..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.AudioVoice.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = Base class for monophonic synthesizers. Any extensions of this class should follow the API and implement the methods below in order to remain compatible with p5.PolySynth(); -connect__description__0 = Connect to p5 objects or Web Audio Nodes -connect__params__unit = Object -disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect from soundOut diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.BandPass.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.BandPass.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index 456ac14737..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.BandPass.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = Constructor:
new p5.BandPass() Filter. This is the same as creating a p5.Filter and then calling its method setType('bandpass'). See p5.Filter for methods.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Camera.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Camera.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 0044055c45..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Camera.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = This class describes a camera for use in p5's WebGL mode. It contains camera position, orientation, and projection information necessary for rendering a 3D scene.
-description__1 = New p5.Camera objects can be made through the createCamera() function and controlled through the methods described below. A camera created in this way will use a default position in the scene and a default perspective projection until these properties are changed through the various methods available. It is possible to create multiple cameras, in which case the current camera can be set through the setCamera() method.
-description__2 = Note: The methods below operate in two coordinate systems: the 'world' coordinate system describe positions in terms of their relationship to the origin along the X, Y and Z axes whereas the camera's 'local' coordinate system describes positions from the camera's point of view: left-right, up-down, and forward-backward. The move() method, for instance, moves the camera along its own axes, whereas the setPosition() method sets the camera's position in world-space.
-description__3 = The camera object propreties eyeX, eyeY, eyeZ, centerX, centerY, centerZ, upX, upY, upZ which describes camera position, orientation, and projection are also accessible via the camera object generated using createCamera()
-params__rendererGL = RendererGL: instance of WebGL renderer
-eyeX__description__0 = camera position value on x axis
-eyeY__description__0 = camera position value on y axis
-eyeZ__description__0 = camera position value on z axis
-centerX__description__0 = x coordinate representing center of the sketch
-centerY__description__0 = y coordinate representing center of the sketch
-centerZ__description__0 = z coordinate representing center of the sketch
-upX__description__0 = x component of direction 'up' from camera
-upY__description__0 = y component of direction 'up' from camera
-upZ__description__0 = z component of direction 'up' from camera
-perspective__description__0 = Sets a perspective projection. Accepts the same parameters as the global perspective(). More information on this function can be found there.
-ortho__description__0 = Sets an orthographic projection. Accepts the same parameters as the global ortho(). More information on this function can be found there.
-frustum__description__0 = Sets the camera's frustum. Accepts the same parameters as the global frustum(). More information on this function can be found there.
-pan__description__0 = Panning rotates the camera view to the left and right.
-pan__params__angle = Number: amount to rotate camera in current angleMode units. Greater than 0 values rotate counterclockwise (to the left).
-tilt__description__0 = Tilting rotates the camera view up and down.
-tilt__params__angle = Number: amount to rotate camera in current angleMode units. Greater than 0 values rotate counterclockwise (to the left).
-lookAt__description__0 = Reorients the camera to look at a position in world space.
-lookAt__params__x = Number: x position of a point in world space
-lookAt__params__y = Number: y position of a point in world space
-lookAt__params__z = Number: z position of a point in world space
-camera__description__0 = Sets the camera's position and orientation. Accepts the same parameters as the global camera(). More information on this function can be found there.
-move__description__0 = Move camera along its local axes while maintaining current camera orientation.
-move__params__x = Number: amount to move along camera's left-right axis
-move__params__y = Number: amount to move along camera's up-down axis
-move__params__z = Number: amount to move along camera's forward-backward axis
-setPosition__description__0 = Set camera position in world-space while maintaining current camera orientation.
-setPosition__params__x = Number: x position of a point in world space
-setPosition__params__y = Number: y position of a point in world space
-setPosition__params__z = Number: z position of a point in world space
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Color.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Color.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ff1e244cc..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Color.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Each color stores the color mode and level maxes that was applied at the time of its construction. These are used to interpret the input arguments (at construction and later for that instance of color) and to format the output e.g. when saturation() is requested.
-description__1 = Internally, we store an array representing the ideal RGBA values in floating point form, normalized from 0 to 1. From this we calculate the closest screen color (RGBA levels from 0 to 255) and expose this to the renderer.
-description__2 = We also cache normalized, floating point components of the color in various representations as they are calculated. This is done to prevent repeating a conversion that has already been performed.
-toString__description__0 = This function returns the color formatted as a string. This can be useful for debugging, or for using p5.js with other libraries.
-toString__returns = String: the formatted string
-toString__params__format = String: (Optional) How the color string will be formatted. Leaving this empty formats the string as rgba(r, g, b, a). '#rgb' '#rgba' '#rrggbb' and '#rrggbbaa' format as hexadecimal color codes. 'rgb' 'hsb' and 'hsl' return the color formatted in the specified color mode. 'rgba' 'hsba' and 'hsla' are the same as above but with alpha channels. 'rgb%' 'hsb%' 'hsl%' 'rgba%' 'hsba%' and 'hsla%' format as percentages.
-setRed__description__0 = The setRed function sets the red component of a color. The range depends on your color mode, in the default RGB mode it's between 0 and 255.
-setRed__params__red = Number: the new red value
-setGreen__description__0 = The setGreen function sets the green component of a color. The range depends on your color mode, in the default RGB mode it's between 0 and 255.
-setGreen__params__green = Number: the new green value
-setBlue__description__0 = The setBlue function sets the blue component of a color. The range depends on your color mode, in the default RGB mode it's between 0 and 255.
-setBlue__params__blue = Number: the new blue value
-setAlpha__description__0 = The setAlpha function sets the transparency (alpha) value of a color. The range depends on your color mode, in the default RGB mode it's between 0 and 255.
-setAlpha__params__alpha = Number: the new alpha value
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Compressor.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Compressor.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index a390a77703..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Compressor.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Compressor is an audio effect class that performs dynamics compression on an audio input source. This is a very commonly used technique in music and sound production. Compression creates an overall louder, richer, and fuller sound by lowering the volume of louds and raising that of softs. Compression can be used to avoid clipping (sound distortion due to peaks in volume) and is especially useful when many sounds are played at once. Compression can be used on indivudal sound sources in addition to the main output.
-description__1 = This class extends p5.Effect. Methods amp(), chain(), drywet(), connect(), and disconnect() are available.
-compressor__description__0 = The p5.Compressor is built with a Web Audio Dynamics Compressor Node
-process__description__0 = Performs the same function as .connect, but also accepts optional parameters to set compressor's audioParams
-process__params__src = Object: Sound source to be connected
-process__params__attack = Number: (Optional) The amount of time (in seconds) to reduce the gain by 10dB, default = .003, range 0 - 1
-process__params__knee = Number: (Optional) A decibel value representing the range above the threshold where the curve smoothly transitions to the "ratio" portion. default = 30, range 0 - 40
-process__params__ratio = Number: (Optional) The amount of dB change in input for a 1 dB change in output default = 12, range 1 - 20
-process__params__threshold = Number: (Optional) The decibel value above which the compression will start taking effect default = -24, range -100 - 0
-process__params__release = Number: (Optional) The amount of time (in seconds) to increase the gain by 10dB default = .25, range 0 - 1
-set__description__0 = Set the paramters of a compressor.
-set__params__attack = Number: The amount of time (in seconds) to reduce the gain by 10dB, default = .003, range 0 - 1
-set__params__knee = Number: A decibel value representing the range above the threshold where the curve smoothly transitions to the "ratio" portion. default = 30, range 0 - 40
-set__params__ratio = Number: The amount of dB change in input for a 1 dB change in output default = 12, range 1 - 20
-set__params__threshold = Number: The decibel value above which the compression will start taking effect default = -24, range -100 - 0
-set__params__release = Number: The amount of time (in seconds) to increase the gain by 10dB default = .25, range 0 - 1
-attack__description__0 = Get current attack or set value w/ time ramp
-attack__params__attack = Number: (Optional) Attack is the amount of time (in seconds) to reduce the gain by 10dB, default = .003, range 0 - 1
-attack__params__time = Number: (Optional) Assign time value to schedule the change in value
-knee__description__0 = Get current knee or set value w/ time ramp
-knee__params__knee = Number: (Optional) A decibel value representing the range above the threshold where the curve smoothly transitions to the "ratio" portion. default = 30, range 0 - 40
-knee__params__time = Number: (Optional) Assign time value to schedule the change in value
-ratio__description__0 = Get current ratio or set value w/ time ramp
-ratio__params__ratio = Number: (Optional) The amount of dB change in input for a 1 dB change in output default = 12, range 1 - 20
-ratio__params__time = Number: (Optional) Assign time value to schedule the change in value
-threshold__description__0 = Get current threshold or set value w/ time ramp
-threshold__params__threshold = Number: The decibel value above which the compression will start taking effect default = -24, range -100 - 0
-threshold__params__time = Number: (Optional) Assign time value to schedule the change in value
-release__description__0 = Get current release or set value w/ time ramp
-release__params__release = Number: The amount of time (in seconds) to increase the gain by 10dB default = .25, range 0 - 1
-release__params__time = Number: (Optional) Assign time value to schedule the change in value
-reduction__description__0 = Return the current reduction value
-reduction__returns = Number: Value of the amount of gain reduction that is applied to the signal
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Convolver.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Convolver.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c27d0df7b..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Convolver.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = p5.Convolver extends p5.Reverb. It can emulate the sound of real physical spaces through a process called convolution.
-description__1 = Convolution multiplies any audio input by an "impulse response" to simulate the dispersion of sound over time. The impulse response is generated from an audio file that you provide. One way to generate an impulse response is to pop a balloon in a reverberant space and record the echo. Convolution can also be used to experiment with sound.
-description__2 = Use the method createConvolution(path) to instantiate a p5.Convolver with a path to your impulse response audio file.
-params__path = String: path to a sound file
-params__callback = Function: (Optional) function to call when loading succeeds
-params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) function to call if loading fails. This function will receive an error or XMLHttpRequest object with information about what went wrong.
-convolverNode__description__0 = Internally, the p5.Convolver uses the a Web Audio Convolver Node.
-impulses__description__0 = If you load multiple impulse files using the .addImpulse method, they will be stored as Objects in this Array. Toggle between them with the toggleImpulse(id) method.
-process__description__0 = Connect a source to the convolver.
-process__params__src = Object: p5.sound / Web Audio object with a sound output.
-addImpulse__description__0 = Load and assign a new Impulse Response to the p5.Convolver. The impulse is added to the .impulses array. Previous impulses can be accessed with the .toggleImpulse(id) method.
-addImpulse__params__path = String: path to a sound file
-addImpulse__params__callback = Function: function (optional)
-addImpulse__params__errorCallback = Function: function (optional)
-resetImpulse__description__0 = Similar to .addImpulse, except that the .impulses Array is reset to save memory. A new .impulses array is created with this impulse as the only item.
-resetImpulse__params__path = String: path to a sound file
-resetImpulse__params__callback = Function: function (optional)
-resetImpulse__params__errorCallback = Function: function (optional)
-toggleImpulse__description__0 = If you have used .addImpulse() to add multiple impulses to a p5.Convolver, then you can use this method to toggle between the items in the .impulses Array. Accepts a parameter to identify which impulse you wish to use, identified either by its original filename (String) or by its position in the .impulses Array (Number).You can access the objects in the .impulses Array directly. Each Object has two attributes: an
.audioBuffer (type: Web Audio AudioBuffer) and a .name, a String that corresponds with the original filename.
-toggleImpulse__params__id = String|Number: Identify the impulse by its original filename (String), or by its position in the .impulses Array (Number).
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Delay.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Delay.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 477a0c7ee5..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Delay.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Delay is an echo effect. It processes an existing sound source, and outputs a delayed version of that sound. The p5.Delay can produce different effects depending on the delayTime, feedback, filter, and type. In the example below, a feedback of 0.5 (the default value) will produce a looping delay that decreases in volume by 50% each repeat. A filter will cut out the high frequencies so that the delay does not sound as piercing as the original source.
-description__1 = This class extends p5.Effect. Methods amp(), chain(), drywet(), connect(), and disconnect() are available.
-leftDelay__description__0 = The p5.Delay is built with two Web Audio Delay Nodes, one for each stereo channel.
-rightDelay__description__0 = The p5.Delay is built with two Web Audio Delay Nodes, one for each stereo channel.
-process__description__0 = Add delay to an audio signal according to a set of delay parameters.
-process__params__Signal = Object: An object that outputs audio
-process__params__delayTime = Number: (Optional) Time (in seconds) of the delay/echo. Some browsers limit delayTime to 1 second.
-process__params__feedback = Number: (Optional) sends the delay back through itself in a loop that decreases in volume each time.
-process__params__lowPass = Number: (Optional) Cutoff frequency. Only frequencies below the lowPass will be part of the delay.
-delayTime__description__0 = Set the delay (echo) time, in seconds. Usually this value will be a floating point number between 0.0 and 1.0.
-delayTime__params__delayTime = Number: Time (in seconds) of the delay
-feedback__description__0 = Feedback occurs when Delay sends its signal back through its input in a loop. The feedback amount determines how much signal to send each time through the loop. A feedback greater than 1.0 is not desirable because it will increase the overall output each time through the loop, creating an infinite feedback loop. The default value is 0.5
-feedback__returns = Number: Feedback value
-feedback__params__feedback = Number|Object: 0.0 to 1.0, or an object such as an Oscillator that can be used to modulate this param
-filter__description__0 = Set a lowpass filter frequency for the delay. A lowpass filter will cut off any frequencies higher than the filter frequency.
-filter__params__cutoffFreq = Number|Object: A lowpass filter will cut off any frequencies higher than the filter frequency.
-filter__params__res = Number|Object: Resonance of the filter frequency cutoff, or an object (i.e. a p5.Oscillator) that can be used to modulate this parameter. High numbers (i.e. 15) will produce a resonance, low numbers (i.e. .2) will produce a slope.
-setType__description__0 = Choose a preset type of delay. 'pingPong' bounces the signal from the left to the right channel to produce a stereo effect. Any other parameter will revert to the default delay setting.
-setType__params__type = String|Number: 'pingPong' (1) or 'default' (0)
-amp__description__0 = Set the output level of the delay effect.
-amp__params__volume = Number: amplitude between 0 and 1.0
-amp__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) create a fade that lasts rampTime
-amp__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen seconds from now
-connect__description__0 = Send output to a p5.sound or web audio object
-connect__params__unit = Object
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect all output.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Distortion.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Distortion.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index ad6c63fddc..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Distortion.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A Distortion effect created with a Waveshaper Node, with an approach adapted from Kevin Ennis
-description__1 = This class extends p5.Effect. Methods amp(), chain(), drywet(), connect(), and disconnect() are available.
-params__amount = Number: (Optional) Unbounded distortion amount. Normal values range from 0-1.
-params__oversample = String: (Optional) 'none', '2x', or '4x'.
-WaveShaperNode__description__0 = The p5.Distortion is built with a Web Audio WaveShaper Node.
-process__description__0 = Process a sound source, optionally specify amount and oversample values.
-process__params__amount = Number: (Optional) Unbounded distortion amount. Normal values range from 0-1.
-process__params__oversample = String: (Optional) 'none', '2x', or '4x'.
-set__description__0 = Set the amount and oversample of the waveshaper distortion.
-set__params__amount = Number: (Optional) Unbounded distortion amount. Normal values range from 0-1.
-set__params__oversample = String: (Optional) 'none', '2x', or '4x'.
-getAmount__description__0 = Return the distortion amount, typically between 0-1.
-getAmount__returns = Number: Unbounded distortion amount. Normal values range from 0-1.
-getOversample__description__0 = Return the oversampling.
-getOversample__returns = String: Oversample can either be 'none', '2x', or '4x'.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.EQ.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.EQ.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index ed26786124..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.EQ.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = p5.EQ is an audio effect that performs the function of a multiband audio equalizer. Equalization is used to adjust the balance of frequency compoenents of an audio signal. This process is commonly used in sound production and recording to change the waveform before it reaches a sound output device. EQ can also be used as an audio effect to create interesting distortions by filtering out parts of the spectrum. p5.EQ is built using a chain of Web Audio Biquad Filter Nodes and can be instantiated with 3 or 8 bands. Bands can be added or removed from the EQ by directly modifying p5.EQ.bands (the array that stores filters).
-description__1 = This class extends p5.Effect. Methods amp(), chain(), drywet(), connect(), and disconnect() are available.
-returns = Object: p5.EQ object
-params___eqsize = Number: (Optional) Constructor will accept 3 or 8, defaults to 3
-bands__description__0 = The p5.EQ is built with abstracted p5.Filter objects. To modify any bands, use methods of the p5.Filter API, especially gain and freq. Bands are stored in an array, with indices 0 - 3, or 0 - 7
-process__description__0 = Process an input by connecting it to the EQ
-process__params__src = Object: Audio source
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Effect.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Effect.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 6fe2788f9e..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Effect.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Effect is a base class for audio effects in p5. This module handles the nodes and methods that are common and useful for current and future effects.
-description__1 = This class is extended by p5.Distortion, p5.Compressor, p5.Delay, p5.Filter, p5.Reverb.
-params__ac = Object: (Optional) Reference to the audio context of the p5 object
-params__input = AudioNode: (Optional) Gain Node effect wrapper
-params__output = AudioNode: (Optional) Gain Node effect wrapper
-params___drywet = Object: (Optional) Tone.JS CrossFade node (defaults to value: 1)
-params__wet = AudioNode: (Optional) Effects that extend this class should connect to the wet signal to this gain node, so that dry and wet signals are mixed properly.
-amp__description__0 = Set the output volume of the filter.
-amp__params__vol = Number: (Optional) amplitude between 0 and 1.0
-amp__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) create a fade that lasts until rampTime
-amp__params__tFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen in tFromNow seconds
-chain__description__0 = Link effects together in a chain Example usage: filter.chain(reverb, delay, panner); May be used with an open-ended number of arguments
-chain__params__arguments = Object: (Optional) Chain together multiple sound objects
-drywet__description__0 = Adjust the dry/wet value.
-drywet__params__fade = Number: (Optional) The desired drywet value (0 - 1.0)
-connect__description__0 = Send output to a p5.js-sound, Web Audio Node, or use signal to control an AudioParam
-connect__params__unit = Object
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect all output.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Element.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Element.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 16ad1b5646..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Element.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Base class for all elements added to a sketch, including canvas, graphics buffers, and other HTML elements. It is not called directly, but p5.Element objects are created by calling createCanvas, createGraphics, createDiv, createImg, createInput, etc.
-params__elt = String: DOM node that is wrapped
-params__pInst = P5: (Optional) pointer to p5 instance
-elt__description__0 = Underlying HTML element. All normal HTML methods can be called on this.
-parent__description__0 = Attaches the element to the parent specified. A way of setting the container for the element. Accepts either a string ID, DOM node, or p5.Element. If no arguments given, parent node is returned. For more ways to position the canvas, see the positioning the canvas wiki page.
-parent__params__parent = String|p5.Element|Object: the ID, DOM node, or p5.Element of desired parent element
-id__description__0 = Sets the ID of the element. If no ID argument is passed in, it instead returns the current ID of the element. Note that only one element can have a particular id in a page. The .class() function can be used to identify multiple elements with the same class name.
-id__params__id = String: ID of the element
-class__description__0 = Adds given class to the element. If no class argument is passed in, it instead returns a string containing the current class(es) of the element.
-class__params__class = String: class to add
-mousePressed__description__0 = The .mousePressed() function is called once after every time a mouse button is pressed over the element. Some mobile browsers may also trigger this event on a touch screen, if the user performs a quick tap. This can be used to attach element specific event listeners.
-mousePressed__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when mouse is pressed over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-doubleClicked__description__0 = The .doubleClicked() function is called once after every time a mouse button is pressed twice over the element. This can be used to attach element and action specific event listeners.
-doubleClicked__returns = p5.Element:
-doubleClicked__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when mouse is double clicked over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-mouseWheel__description__0 = The mouseWheel() function is called once after every time a mouse wheel is scrolled over the element. This can be used to attach element specific event listeners.
-mouseWheel__description__1 = The function accepts a callback function as argument which will be executed when the wheel event is triggered on the element, the callback function is passed one argument event. The event.deltaY property returns negative values if the mouse wheel is rotated up or away from the user and positive in the other direction. The event.deltaX does the same as event.deltaY except it reads the horizontal wheel scroll of the mouse wheel.
-mouseWheel__description__2 = On OS X with "natural" scrolling enabled, the event.deltaY values are reversed.
-mouseWheel__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when mouse is scrolled over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-mouseReleased__description__0 = The mouseReleased() function is called once after every time a mouse button is released over the element. Some mobile browsers may also trigger this event on a touch screen, if the user performs a quick tap. This can be used to attach element specific event listeners.
-mouseReleased__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when mouse is released over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-mouseClicked__description__0 = The .mouseClicked() function is called once after a mouse button is pressed and released over the element. Some mobile browsers may also trigger this event on a touch screen, if the user performs a quick tap.This can be used to attach element specific event listeners.
-mouseClicked__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when mouse is clicked over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-mouseMoved__description__0 = The .mouseMoved() function is called once every time a mouse moves over the element. This can be used to attach an element specific event listener.
-mouseMoved__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when a mouse moves over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-mouseOver__description__0 = The .mouseOver() function is called once after every time a mouse moves onto the element. This can be used to attach an element specific event listener.
-mouseOver__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when a mouse moves onto the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-mouseOut__description__0 = The .mouseOut() function is called once after every time a mouse moves off the element. This can be used to attach an element specific event listener.
-mouseOut__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when a mouse moves off of an element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-touchStarted__description__0 = The .touchStarted() function is called once after every time a touch is registered. This can be used to attach element specific event listeners.
-touchStarted__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when a touch starts over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-touchMoved__description__0 = The .touchMoved() function is called once after every time a touch move is registered. This can be used to attach element specific event listeners.
-touchMoved__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when a touch moves over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-touchEnded__description__0 = The .touchEnded() function is called once after every time a touch is registered. This can be used to attach element specific event listeners.
-touchEnded__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when a touch ends over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-dragOver__description__0 = The .dragOver() function is called once after every time a file is dragged over the element. This can be used to attach an element specific event listener.
-dragOver__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when a file is dragged over the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-dragLeave__description__0 = The .dragLeave() function is called once after every time a dragged file leaves the element area. This can be used to attach an element specific event listener.
-dragLeave__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when a file is dragged off the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-addClass__description__0 = Adds specified class to the element.
-addClass__params__class = String: name of class to add
-removeClass__description__0 = Removes specified class from the element.
-removeClass__params__class = String: name of class to remove
-hasClass__description__0 = Checks if specified class already set to element
-hasClass__returns = Boolean: a boolean value if element has specified class
-hasClass__params__c = String: class name of class to check
-toggleClass__description__0 = Toggles element class
-toggleClass__params__c = String: class name to toggle
-child__description__0 = Attaches the element as a child to the parent specified. Accepts either a string ID, DOM node, or p5.Element. If no argument is specified, an array of children DOM nodes is returned.
-child__returns = Node[]: an array of child nodes
-child__params__child = String|p5.Element: (Optional) the ID, DOM node, or p5.Element to add to the current element
-center__description__0 = Centers a p5 Element either vertically, horizontally, or both, relative to its parent or according to the body if the Element has no parent. If no argument is passed the Element is aligned both vertically and horizontally.
-center__params__align = String: (Optional) passing 'vertical', 'horizontal' aligns element accordingly
-html__description__0 = If an argument is given, sets the inner HTML of the element, replacing any existing html. If true is included as a second argument, html is appended instead of replacing existing html. If no arguments are given, returns the inner HTML of the element.
-html__returns = String: the inner HTML of the element
-html__params__html = String: (Optional) the HTML to be placed inside the element
-html__params__append = Boolean: (Optional) whether to append HTML to existing
-position__description__0 = Sets the position of the element. If no position type argument is given, the position will be relative to (0, 0) of the window. Essentially, this sets position:absolute and left and top properties of style. If an optional third argument specifying position type is given, the x and y coordinates will be interpreted based on the positioning scheme. If no arguments given, the function returns the x and y position of the element. found documentation on how to be more specific with object type https://stackoverflow.com/questions/14714314/how-do-i-comment-object-literals-in-yuidoc
-position__returns = Object: object of form {"{"} x: 0, y: 0 {"}"} containing the position of the element in an object
-position__params__x = Number: (Optional) x-position relative to upper left of window (optional)
-position__params__y = Number: (Optional) y-position relative to upper left of window (optional)
-position__params__positionType = String: (Optional) it can be static, fixed, relative, sticky, initial or inherit (optional)
-style__description__0 = Sets the given style (css) property (1st arg) of the element with the given value (2nd arg). If a single argument is given, .style() returns the value of the given property; however, if the single argument is given in css syntax ('text-align:center'), .style() sets the css appropriately.
-style__returns = String: value of property
-style__params__property = String: property to be set
-style__params__value = String|p5.Color: value to assign to property
-attribute__description__0 = Adds a new attribute or changes the value of an existing attribute on the specified element. If no value is specified, returns the value of the given attribute, or null if attribute is not set.
-attribute__returns = String: value of attribute
-attribute__params__attr = String: attribute to set
-attribute__params__value = String: value to assign to attribute
-removeAttribute__description__0 = Removes an attribute on the specified element.
-removeAttribute__params__attr = String: attribute to remove
-value__description__0 = Either returns the value of the element if no arguments given, or sets the value of the element.
-value__returns = String|Number: value of the element
-value__params__value = String|Number
-show__description__0 = Shows the current element. Essentially, setting display:block for the style.
-hide__description__0 = Hides the current element. Essentially, setting display:none for the style.
-size__description__0 = Sets the width and height of the element. AUTO can be used to only adjust one dimension at a time. If no arguments are given, it returns the width and height of the element in an object. In case of elements which need to be loaded, such as images, it is recommended to call the function after the element has finished loading.
-size__returns = Object: the width and height of the element in an object
-size__params__w = Number|Constant: width of the element, either AUTO, or a number
-size__params__h = Number|Constant: (Optional) height of the element, either AUTO, or a number
-remove__description__0 = Removes the element, stops all media streams, and deregisters all listeners.
-drop__description__0 = Registers a callback that gets called every time a file that is dropped on the element has been loaded. p5 will load every dropped file into memory and pass it as a p5.File object to the callback. Multiple files dropped at the same time will result in multiple calls to the callback.
-drop__description__1 = You can optionally pass a second callback which will be registered to the raw drop event. The callback will thus be provided the original DragEvent. Dropping multiple files at the same time will trigger the second callback once per drop, whereas the first callback will trigger for each loaded file.
-drop__params__callback = Function: callback to receive loaded file, called for each file dropped.
-drop__params__fxn = Function: (Optional) callback triggered once when files are dropped with the drop event.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Envelope.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Envelope.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 41b0324830..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Envelope.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Envelopes are pre-defined amplitude distribution over time. Typically, envelopes are used to control the output volume of an object, a series of fades referred to as Attack, Decay, Sustain and Release ( ADSR ). Envelopes can also control other Web Audio Parameters—for example, a p5.Envelope can control an Oscillator's frequency like this: 
osc.freq(env).
-description__1 = Use setRange to change the attack/release level. Use setADSR to change attackTime, decayTime, sustainPercent and releaseTime.
-description__2 = Use the play method to play the entire envelope, the ramp method for a pingable trigger, or triggerAttack/ triggerRelease to trigger noteOn/noteOff.
-attackTime__description__0 = Time until envelope reaches attackLevel
-attackLevel__description__0 = Level once attack is complete.
-decayTime__description__0 = Time until envelope reaches decayLevel.
-decayLevel__description__0 = Level after decay. The envelope will sustain here until it is released.
-releaseTime__description__0 = Duration of the release portion of the envelope.
-releaseLevel__description__0 = Level at the end of the release.
-set__description__0 = Reset the envelope with a series of time/value pairs.
-set__params__attackTime = Number: Time (in seconds) before level reaches attackLevel
-set__params__attackLevel = Number: Typically an amplitude between 0.0 and 1.0
-set__params__decayTime = Number: Time
-set__params__decayLevel = Number: Amplitude (In a standard ADSR envelope, decayLevel = sustainLevel)
-set__params__releaseTime = Number: Release Time (in seconds)
-set__params__releaseLevel = Number: Amplitude
-setADSR__description__0 = Set values like a traditional ADSR envelope .
-setADSR__params__attackTime = Number: Time (in seconds before envelope reaches Attack Level
-setADSR__params__decayTime = Number: (Optional) Time (in seconds) before envelope reaches Decay/Sustain Level
-setADSR__params__susRatio = Number: (Optional) Ratio between attackLevel and releaseLevel, on a scale from 0 to 1, where 1.0 = attackLevel, 0.0 = releaseLevel. The susRatio determines the decayLevel and the level at which the sustain portion of the envelope will sustain. For example, if attackLevel is 0.4, releaseLevel is 0, and susAmt is 0.5, the decayLevel would be 0.2. If attackLevel is increased to 1.0 (using 
setRange), then decayLevel would increase proportionally, to become 0.5.
-setADSR__params__releaseTime = Number: (Optional) Time in seconds from now (defaults to 0)
-setRange__description__0 = Set max (attackLevel) and min (releaseLevel) of envelope.
-setRange__params__aLevel = Number: attack level (defaults to 1)
-setRange__params__rLevel = Number: release level (defaults to 0)
-setInput__description__0 = Assign a parameter to be controlled by this envelope. If a p5.Sound object is given, then the p5.Envelope will control its output gain. If multiple inputs are provided, the env will control all of them.
-setInput__params__inputs = Object: (Optional) A p5.sound object or Web Audio Param.
-setExp__description__0 = Set whether the envelope ramp is linear (default) or exponential. Exponential ramps can be useful because we perceive amplitude and frequency logarithmically.
-setExp__params__isExp = Boolean: true is exponential, false is linear
-play__description__0 = Play tells the envelope to start acting on a given input. If the input is a p5.sound object (i.e. AudioIn, Oscillator, SoundFile), then Envelope will control its output volume. Envelopes can also be used to control any Web Audio Audio Param.
-play__params__unit = Object: A p5.sound object or Web Audio Param.
-play__params__startTime = Number: (Optional) time from now (in seconds) at which to play
-play__params__sustainTime = Number: (Optional) time to sustain before releasing the envelope
-triggerAttack__description__0 = Trigger the Attack, and Decay portion of the Envelope. Similar to holding down a key on a piano, but it will hold the sustain level until you let go. Input can be any p5.sound object, or a Web Audio Param.
-triggerAttack__params__unit = Object: p5.sound Object or Web Audio Param
-triggerAttack__params__secondsFromNow = Number: time from now (in seconds)
-triggerRelease__description__0 = Trigger the Release of the Envelope. This is similar to releasing the key on a piano and letting the sound fade according to the release level and release time.
-triggerRelease__params__unit = Object: p5.sound Object or Web Audio Param
-triggerRelease__params__secondsFromNow = Number: time to trigger the release
-ramp__description__0 = Exponentially ramp to a value using the first two values from setADSR(attackTime, decayTime) as time constants for simple exponential ramps. If the value is higher than current value, it uses attackTime, while a decrease uses decayTime.
-ramp__params__unit = Object: p5.sound Object or Web Audio Param
-ramp__params__secondsFromNow = Number: When to trigger the ramp
-ramp__params__v = Number: Target value
-ramp__params__v2 = Number: (Optional) Second target value
-add__description__0 = Add a value to the p5.Oscillator's output amplitude, and return the oscillator. Calling this method again will override the initial add() with new values.
-add__returns = p5.Envelope: Envelope Returns this envelope with scaled output
-add__params__number = Number: Constant number to add
-mult__description__0 = Multiply the p5.Envelope's output amplitude by a fixed value. Calling this method again will override the initial mult() with new values.
-mult__returns = p5.Envelope: Envelope Returns this envelope with scaled output
-mult__params__number = Number: Constant number to multiply
-scale__description__0 = Scale this envelope's amplitude values to a given range, and return the envelope. Calling this method again will override the initial scale() with new values.
-scale__returns = p5.Envelope: Envelope Returns this envelope with scaled output
-scale__params__inMin = Number: input range minumum
-scale__params__inMax = Number: input range maximum
-scale__params__outMin = Number: input range minumum
-scale__params__outMax = Number: input range maximum
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.FFT.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.FFT.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 62f8486e2d..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.FFT.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is an analysis algorithm that isolates individual audio frequencies within a waveform.
-description__1 = Once instantiated, a p5.FFT object can return an array based on two types of analyses: • FFT.waveform() computes amplitude values along the time domain. The array indices correspond to samples across a brief moment in time. Each value represents amplitude of the waveform at that sample of time. • FFT.analyze() computes amplitude values along the frequency domain. The array indices correspond to frequencies (i.e. pitches), from the lowest to the highest that humans can hear. Each value represents amplitude at that slice of the frequency spectrum. Use with getEnergy() to measure amplitude at specific frequencies, or within a range of frequencies.
-description__2 = FFT analyzes a very short snapshot of sound called a sample buffer. It returns an array of amplitude measurements, referred to as bins. The array is 1024 bins long by default. You can change the bin array length, but it must be a power of 2 between 16 and 1024 in order for the FFT algorithm to function correctly. The actual size of the FFT buffer is twice the number of bins, so given a standard sample rate, the buffer is 2048/44100 seconds long.
-params__smoothing = Number: (Optional) Smooth results of Freq Spectrum. 0.0 < smoothing < 1.0. Defaults to 0.8.
-params__bins = Number: (Optional) Length of resulting array. Must be a power of two between 16 and 1024. Defaults to 1024.
-setInput__description__0 = Set the input source for the FFT analysis. If no source is provided, FFT will analyze all sound in the sketch.
-setInput__params__source = Object: (Optional) p5.sound object (or web audio API source node)
-waveform__description__0 = Returns an array of amplitude values (between -1.0 and +1.0) that represent a snapshot of amplitude readings in a single buffer. Length will be equal to bins (defaults to 1024). Can be used to draw the waveform of a sound.
-waveform__returns = Array: Array Array of amplitude values (-1 to 1) over time. Array length = bins.
-waveform__params__bins = Number: (Optional) Must be a power of two between 16 and 1024. Defaults to 1024.
-waveform__params__precision = String: (Optional) If any value is provided, will return results in a Float32 Array which is more precise than a regular array.
-analyze__description__0 = Returns an array of amplitude values (between 0 and 255) across the frequency spectrum. Length is equal to FFT bins (1024 by default). The array indices correspond to frequencies (i.e. pitches), from the lowest to the highest that humans can hear. Each value represents amplitude at that slice of the frequency spectrum. Must be called prior to using getEnergy().
-analyze__returns = Array: spectrum Array of energy (amplitude/volume) values across the frequency spectrum. Lowest energy (silence) = 0, highest possible is 255.
-analyze__params__bins = Number: (Optional) Must be a power of two between 16 and 1024. Defaults to 1024.
-analyze__params__scale = Number: (Optional) If "dB," returns decibel float measurements between -140 and 0 (max). Otherwise returns integers from 0-255.
-getEnergy__description__0 = Returns the amount of energy (volume) at a specific frequency, or the average amount of energy between two frequencies. Accepts Number(s) corresponding to frequency (in Hz), or a "string" corresponding to predefined frequency ranges ("bass", "lowMid", "mid", "highMid", "treble"). Returns a range between 0 (no energy/volume at that frequency) and 255 (maximum energy). NOTE: analyze() must be called prior to getEnergy(). analyze() tells the FFT to analyze frequency data, and getEnergy() uses the results to determine the value at a specific frequency or range of frequencies.
-getEnergy__returns = Number: Energy Energy (volume/amplitude) from 0 and 255.
-getEnergy__params__frequency1 = Number|String: Will return a value representing energy at this frequency. Alternately, the strings "bass", "lowMid" "mid", "highMid", and "treble" will return predefined frequency ranges.
-getEnergy__params__frequency2 = Number: (Optional) If a second frequency is given, will return average amount of energy that exists between the two frequencies.
-getCentroid__description__0 = Returns the spectral centroid of the input signal. NOTE: analyze() must be called prior to getCentroid(). Analyze() tells the FFT to analyze frequency data, and getCentroid() uses the results determine the spectral centroid.
-getCentroid__returns = Number: Spectral Centroid Frequency of the spectral centroid in Hz.
-smooth__description__0 = Smooth FFT analysis by averaging with the last analysis frame.
-smooth__params__smoothing = Number: 0.0 < smoothing < 1.0. Defaults to 0.8.
-linAverages__description__0 = Returns an array of average amplitude values for a given number of frequency bands split equally. N defaults to 16. NOTE: analyze() must be called prior to linAverages(). Analyze() tells the FFT to analyze frequency data, and linAverages() uses the results to group them into a smaller set of averages.
-linAverages__returns = Array: linearAverages Array of average amplitude values for each group
-linAverages__params__N = Number: Number of returned frequency groups
-logAverages__description__0 = Returns an array of average amplitude values of the spectrum, for a given set of Octave Bands NOTE: analyze() must be called prior to logAverages(). Analyze() tells the FFT to analyze frequency data, and logAverages() uses the results to group them into a smaller set of averages.
-logAverages__returns = Array: logAverages Array of average amplitude values for each group
-logAverages__params__octaveBands = Array: Array of Octave Bands objects for grouping
-getOctaveBands__description__0 = Calculates and Returns the 1/N Octave Bands N defaults to 3 and minimum central frequency to 15.625Hz. (1/3 Octave Bands ~= 31 Frequency Bands) Setting fCtr0 to a central value of a higher octave will ignore the lower bands and produce less frequency groups.
-getOctaveBands__returns = Array: octaveBands Array of octave band objects with their bounds
-getOctaveBands__params__N = Number: Specifies the 1/N type of generated octave bands
-getOctaveBands__params__fCtr0 = Number: Minimum central frequency for the lowest band
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.File.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.File.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 91fc131ddd..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.File.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Base class for a file. Used for Element.drop and createFileInput.
-params__file = File: File that is wrapped
-file__description__0 = Underlying File object. All normal File methods can be called on this.
-type__description__0 = File type (image, text, etc.)
-subtype__description__0 = File subtype (usually the file extension jpg, png, xml, etc.)
-name__description__0 = File name
-size__description__0 = File size
-data__description__0 = URL string containing either image data, the text contents of the file or a parsed object if file is JSON and p5.XML if XML
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Filter.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Filter.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 4608f85587..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Filter.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A p5.Filter uses a Web Audio Biquad Filter to filter the frequency response of an input source. Subclasses include: p5.LowPass: Allows frequencies below the cutoff frequency to pass through, and attenuates frequencies above the cutoff.p5.HighPass: The opposite of a lowpass filter. p5.BandPass: Allows a range of frequencies to pass through and attenuates the frequencies below and above this frequency range.-description__1 = The
.res() method controls either width of the bandpass, or resonance of the low/highpass cutoff frequency.
-description__2 = This class extends p5.Effect. Methods amp(), chain(), drywet(), connect(), and disconnect() are available.
-params__type = String: (Optional) 'lowpass' (default), 'highpass', 'bandpass'
-biquadFilter__description__0 = The p5.Filter is built with a Web Audio BiquadFilter Node.
-process__description__0 = Filter an audio signal according to a set of filter parameters.
-process__params__Signal = Object: An object that outputs audio
-process__params__freq = Number: (Optional) Frequency in Hz, from 10 to 22050
-process__params__res = Number: (Optional) Resonance/Width of the filter frequency from 0.001 to 1000
-set__description__0 = Set the frequency and the resonance of the filter.
-set__params__freq = Number: (Optional) Frequency in Hz, from 10 to 22050
-set__params__res = Number: (Optional) Resonance (Q) from 0.001 to 1000
-set__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen seconds from now
-freq__description__0 = Set the filter frequency, in Hz, from 10 to 22050 (the range of human hearing, although in reality most people hear in a narrower range).
-freq__returns = Number: value Returns the current frequency value
-freq__params__freq = Number: Filter Frequency
-freq__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen seconds from now
-res__description__0 = Controls either width of a bandpass frequency, or the resonance of a low/highpass cutoff frequency.
-res__returns = Number: value Returns the current res value
-res__params__res = Number: Resonance/Width of filter freq from 0.001 to 1000
-res__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen seconds from now
-gain__description__0 = Controls the gain attribute of a Biquad Filter. This is distinctly different from .amp() which is inherited from p5.Effect .amp() controls the volume via the output gain node p5.Filter.gain() controls the gain parameter of a Biquad Filter node.
-gain__returns = Number: Returns the current or updated gain value
-gain__params__gain = Number
-toggle__description__0 = Toggle function. Switches between the specified type and allpass
-toggle__returns = Boolean: [Toggle value]
-setType__description__0 = Set the type of a p5.Filter. Possible types include: "lowpass" (default), "highpass", "bandpass", "lowshelf", "highshelf", "peaking", "notch", "allpass".
-setType__params__t = String
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Font.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Font.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index b5105a863c..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Font.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Base class for font handling
-params__pInst = P5: (Optional) pointer to p5 instance
-font__description__0 = Underlying opentype font implementation
-textBounds__description__0 = Returns a tight bounding box for the given text string using this font
-textBounds__returns = Object: a rectangle object with properties: x, y, w, h
-textBounds__params__line = String: a line of text
-textBounds__params__x = Number: x-position
-textBounds__params__y = Number: y-position
-textBounds__params__fontSize = Number: (Optional) font size to use (optional) Default is 12.
-textBounds__params__options = Object: (Optional) opentype options (optional) opentype fonts contains alignment and baseline options. Default is 'LEFT' and 'alphabetic'
-textToPoints__description__0 = Computes an array of points following the path for specified text
-textToPoints__returns = Array: an array of points, each with x, y, alpha (the path angle)
-textToPoints__params__txt = String: a line of text
-textToPoints__params__x = Number: x-position
-textToPoints__params__y = Number: y-position
-textToPoints__params__fontSize = Number: font size to use (optional)
-textToPoints__params__options = Object: (Optional) an (optional) object that can contain: sampleFactor - the ratio of path-length to number of samples (default=.1); higher values yield more points and are therefore more precise simplifyThreshold - if set to a non-zero value, collinear points will be be removed from the polygon; the value represents the threshold angle to use when determining whether two edges are collinear
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Gain.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Gain.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index a06aa722c9..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Gain.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A gain node is usefull to set the relative volume of sound. It's typically used to build mixers.
-setInput__description__0 = Connect a source to the gain node.
-setInput__params__src = Object: p5.sound / Web Audio object with a sound output.
-connect__description__0 = Send output to a p5.sound or web audio object
-connect__params__unit = Object
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect all output.
-amp__description__0 = Set the output level of the gain node.
-amp__params__volume = Number: amplitude between 0 and 1.0
-amp__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) create a fade that lasts rampTime
-amp__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen seconds from now
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Geometry.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Geometry.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 3453d8c46e..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Geometry.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = p5 Geometry class
-params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) number of vertices along the x-axis.
-params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) number of vertices along the y-axis.
-params__callback = Function: (Optional) function to call upon object instantiation.
-computeFaces__description__0 = computes faces for geometry objects based on the vertices.
-computeNormals__description__0 = computes smooth normals per vertex as an average of each face.
-averageNormals__description__0 = Averages the vertex normals. Used in curved surfaces
-averagePoleNormals__description__0 = Averages pole normals. Used in spherical primitives
-normalize__description__0 = Modifies all vertices to be centered within the range -100 to 100.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Graphics.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Graphics.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 74372de2a2..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Graphics.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Thin wrapper around a renderer, to be used for creating a graphics buffer object. Use this class if you need to draw into an off-screen graphics buffer. The two parameters define the width and height in pixels. The fields and methods for this class are extensive, but mirror the normal drawing API for p5.
-params__w = Number: width
-params__h = Number: height
-params__renderer = Constant: the renderer to use, either P2D or WEBGL
-params__pInst = P5: (Optional) pointer to p5 instance
-reset__description__0 = Resets certain values such as those modified by functions in the Transform category and in the Lights category that are not automatically reset with graphics buffer objects. Calling this in draw() will copy the behavior of the standard canvas.
-remove__description__0 = Removes a Graphics object from the page and frees any resources associated with it.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.HighPass.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.HighPass.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 98f66dfc82..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.HighPass.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Constructor: new p5.HighPass() Filter. This is the same as creating a p5.Filter and then calling its method setType('highpass'). See p5.Filter for methods.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Image.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Image.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ba9fe97cc..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Image.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Creates a new p5.Image. A p5.Image is a canvas backed representation of an image.
-description__1 = p5 can display .gif, .jpg and .png images. Images may be displayed in 2D and 3D space. Before an image is used, it must be loaded with the loadImage() function. The p5.Image class contains fields for the width and height of the image, as well as an array called pixels[] that contains the values for every pixel in the image.
-description__2 = The methods described below allow easy access to the image's pixels and alpha channel and simplify the process of compositing.
-description__3 = Before using the pixels[] array, be sure to use the loadPixels() method on the image to make sure that the pixel data is properly loaded.
-params__width = Number
-params__height = Number
-width__description__0 = Image width.
-height__description__0 = Image height.
-pixels__description__0 = Array containing the values for all the pixels in the display window. These values are numbers. This array is the size (include an appropriate factor for pixelDensity) of the display window x4, representing the R, G, B, A values in order for each pixel, moving from left to right across each row, then down each column. Retina and other high density displays may have more pixels (by a factor of pixelDensity^2). For example, if the image is 100×100 pixels, there will be 40,000. With pixelDensity = 2, there will be 160,000. The first four values (indices 0-3) in the array will be the R, G, B, A values of the pixel at (0, 0). The second four values (indices 4-7) will contain the R, G, B, A values of the pixel at (1, 0). More generally, to set values for a pixel at (x, y): let d = pixelDensity(); for (let i = 0; i < d; i++) {"{"} for (let j = 0; j < d; j++) {"{"} // loop over index = 4 * ((y * d + j) * width * d + (x * d + i)); pixels[index] = r; pixels[index+1] = g; pixels[index+2] = b; pixels[index+3] = a; {"}"} {"}"}new p5.LowPass() Filter. This is the same as creating a p5.Filter and then calling its method setType('lowpass'). See p5.Filter for methods.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.MediaElement.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.MediaElement.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index a946c36cd8..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.MediaElement.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Extends p5.Element to handle audio and video. In addition to the methods of p5.Element, it also contains methods for controlling media. It is not called directly, but p5.MediaElements are created by calling createVideo, createAudio, and createCapture.
-params__elt = String: DOM node that is wrapped
-src__description__0 = Path to the media element source.
-src__returns = String: src
-play__description__0 = Play an HTML5 media element.
-stop__description__0 = Stops an HTML5 media element (sets current time to zero).
-pause__description__0 = Pauses an HTML5 media element.
-loop__description__0 = Set 'loop' to true for an HTML5 media element, and starts playing.
-noLoop__description__0 = Set 'loop' to false for an HTML5 media element. Element will stop when it reaches the end.
-autoplay__description__0 = Set HTML5 media element to autoplay or not. If no argument is specified, by default it will autoplay.
-autoplay__params__shouldAutoplay = Boolean: whether the element should autoplay
-volume__description__0 = Sets volume for this HTML5 media element. If no argument is given, returns the current volume.
-volume__returns = Number: current volume
-volume__params__val = Number: volume between 0.0 and 1.0
-speed__description__0 = If no arguments are given, returns the current playback speed of the element. The speed parameter sets the speed where 2.0 will play the element twice as fast, 0.5 will play at half the speed, and -1 will play the element in normal speed in reverse.(Note that not all browsers support backward playback and even if they do, playback might not be smooth.)
-speed__returns = Number: current playback speed of the element
-speed__params__speed = Number: speed multiplier for element playback
-time__description__0 = If no arguments are given, returns the current time of the element. If an argument is given the current time of the element is set to it.
-time__returns = Number: current time (in seconds)
-time__params__time = Number: time to jump to (in seconds)
-duration__description__0 = Returns the duration of the HTML5 media element.
-duration__returns = Number: duration
-onended__description__0 = Schedule an event to be called when the audio or video element reaches the end. If the element is looping, this will not be called. The element is passed in as the argument to the onended callback.
-onended__params__callback = Function: function to call when the soundfile has ended. The media element will be passed in as the argument to the callback.
-connect__description__0 = Send the audio output of this element to a specified audioNode or p5.sound object. If no element is provided, connects to p5's main output. That connection is established when this method is first called. All connections are removed by the .disconnect() method.
-connect__description__1 = This method is meant to be used with the p5.sound.js addon library.
-connect__params__audioNode = AudioNode|Object: AudioNode from the Web Audio API, or an object from the p5.sound library
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect all Web Audio routing, including to main output. This is useful if you want to re-route the output through audio effects, for example.
-showControls__description__0 = Show the default MediaElement controls, as determined by the web browser.
-hideControls__description__0 = Hide the default mediaElement controls.
-addCue__description__0 = Schedule events to trigger every time a MediaElement (audio/video) reaches a playback cue point.
-addCue__description__1 = Accepts a callback function, a time (in seconds) at which to trigger the callback, and an optional parameter for the callback.
-addCue__description__2 = Time will be passed as the first parameter to the callback function, and param will be the second parameter.
-addCue__returns = Number: id ID of this cue, useful for removeCue(id)
-addCue__params__time = Number: Time in seconds, relative to this media element's playback. For example, to trigger an event every time playback reaches two seconds, pass in the number 2. This will be passed as the first parameter to the callback function.
-addCue__params__callback = Function: Name of a function that will be called at the given time. The callback will receive time and (optionally) param as its two parameters.
-addCue__params__value = Object: (Optional) An object to be passed as the second parameter to the callback function.
-removeCue__description__0 = Remove a callback based on its ID. The ID is returned by the addCue method.
-removeCue__params__id = Number: ID of the cue, as returned by addCue
-clearCues__description__0 = Remove all of the callbacks that had originally been scheduled via the addCue method.
-clearCues__params__id = Number: ID of the cue, as returned by addCue
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.MonoSynth.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.MonoSynth.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 02c4d229ea..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.MonoSynth.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A MonoSynth is used as a single voice for sound synthesis. This is a class to be used in conjunction with the PolySynth class. Custom synthetisers should be built inheriting from this class.
-attack__description__0 = Getters and Setters
-play__description__0 = Play tells the MonoSynth to start playing a note. This method schedules the calling of .triggerAttack and .triggerRelease.
-play__params__note = String | Number: the note you want to play, specified as a frequency in Hertz (Number) or as a midi value in Note/Octave format ("C4", "Eb3"...etc") See Tone. Defaults to 440 hz.
-play__params__velocity = Number: (Optional) velocity of the note to play (ranging from 0 to 1)
-play__params__secondsFromNow = Number: (Optional) time from now (in seconds) at which to play
-play__params__sustainTime = Number: (Optional) time to sustain before releasing the envelope. Defaults to 0.15 seconds.
-triggerAttack__description__0 = Trigger the Attack, and Decay portion of the Envelope. Similar to holding down a key on a piano, but it will hold the sustain level until you let go.
-triggerAttack__params__note = String | Number: the note you want to play, specified as a frequency in Hertz (Number) or as a midi value in Note/Octave format ("C4", "Eb3"...etc") See Tone. Defaults to 440 hz
-triggerAttack__params__velocity = Number: (Optional) velocity of the note to play (ranging from 0 to 1)
-triggerAttack__params__secondsFromNow = Number: (Optional) time from now (in seconds) at which to play
-triggerRelease__description__0 = Trigger the release of the Envelope. This is similar to releasing the key on a piano and letting the sound fade according to the release level and release time.
-triggerRelease__params__secondsFromNow = Number: time to trigger the release
-setADSR__description__0 = Set values like a traditional ADSR envelope .
-setADSR__params__attackTime = Number: Time (in seconds before envelope reaches Attack Level
-setADSR__params__decayTime = Number: (Optional) Time (in seconds) before envelope reaches Decay/Sustain Level
-setADSR__params__susRatio = Number: (Optional) Ratio between attackLevel and releaseLevel, on a scale from 0 to 1, where 1.0 = attackLevel, 0.0 = releaseLevel. The susRatio determines the decayLevel and the level at which the sustain portion of the envelope will sustain. For example, if attackLevel is 0.4, releaseLevel is 0, and susAmt is 0.5, the decayLevel would be 0.2. If attackLevel is increased to 1.0 (using setRange), then decayLevel would increase proportionally, to become 0.5.
-setADSR__params__releaseTime = Number: (Optional) Time in seconds from now (defaults to 0)
-amp__description__0 = MonoSynth amp
-amp__returns = Number: new volume value
-amp__params__vol = Number: desired volume
-amp__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) Time to reach new volume
-connect__description__0 = Connect to a p5.sound / Web Audio object.
-connect__params__unit = Object: A p5.sound or Web Audio object
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect all outputs
-dispose__description__0 = Get rid of the MonoSynth and free up its resources / memory.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Noise.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Noise.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b92afc02c..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Noise.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Noise is a type of oscillator that generates a buffer with random values.
-params__type = String: Type of noise can be 'white' (default), 'brown' or 'pink'.
-setType__description__0 = Set type of noise to 'white', 'pink' or 'brown'. White is the default.
-setType__params__type = String: (Optional) 'white', 'pink' or 'brown'
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.NumberDict.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.NumberDict.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 338c059d12..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.NumberDict.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A simple Dictionary class for Numbers.
-add__description__0 = Add the given number to the value currently stored at the given key. The sum then replaces the value previously stored in the Dictionary.
-add__params__Key = Number: for the value you wish to add to
-add__params__Number = Number: to add to the value
-sub__description__0 = Subtract the given number from the value currently stored at the given key. The difference then replaces the value previously stored in the Dictionary.
-sub__params__Key = Number: for the value you wish to subtract from
-sub__params__Number = Number: to subtract from the value
-mult__description__0 = Multiply the given number with the value currently stored at the given key. The product then replaces the value previously stored in the Dictionary.
-mult__params__Key = Number: for value you wish to multiply
-mult__params__Amount = Number: to multiply the value by
-div__description__0 = Divide the given number with the value currently stored at the given key. The quotient then replaces the value previously stored in the Dictionary.
-div__params__Key = Number: for value you wish to divide
-div__params__Amount = Number: to divide the value by
-minValue__description__0 = Return the lowest number currently stored in the Dictionary.
-minValue__returns = Number:
-maxValue__description__0 = Return the highest number currently stored in the Dictionary.
-maxValue__returns = Number:
-minKey__description__0 = Return the lowest key currently used in the Dictionary.
-minKey__returns = Number:
-maxKey__description__0 = Return the highest key currently used in the Dictionary.
-maxKey__returns = Number:
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.OnsetDetect.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.OnsetDetect.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 29fd30bdc3..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.OnsetDetect.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Listen for onsets (a sharp increase in volume) within a given frequency range.
-params__freqLow = Number: Low frequency
-params__freqHigh = Number: High frequency
-params__threshold = Number: Amplitude threshold between 0 (no energy) and 1 (maximum)
-params__callback = Function: Function to call when an onset is detected
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Oscillator.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Oscillator.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 1421f1072a..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Oscillator.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Creates a signal that oscillates between -1.0 and 1.0. By default, the oscillation takes the form of a sinusoidal shape ('sine'). Additional types include 'triangle', 'sawtooth' and 'square'. The frequency defaults to 440 oscillations per second (440Hz, equal to the pitch of an 'A' note).
-description__1 = Set the type of oscillation with setType(), or by instantiating a specific oscillator: p5.SinOsc, p5.TriOsc, p5.SqrOsc, or p5.SawOsc.
-params__freq = Number: (Optional) frequency defaults to 440Hz
-params__type = String: (Optional) type of oscillator. Options: 'sine' (default), 'triangle', 'sawtooth', 'square'
-start__description__0 = Start an oscillator.
-start__description__1 = Starting an oscillator on a user gesture will enable audio in browsers that have a strict autoplay policy, including Chrome and most mobile devices. See also: userStartAudio().
-start__params__time = Number: (Optional) startTime in seconds from now.
-start__params__frequency = Number: (Optional) frequency in Hz.
-stop__description__0 = Stop an oscillator. Accepts an optional parameter to determine how long (in seconds from now) until the oscillator stops.
-stop__params__secondsFromNow = Number: Time, in seconds from now.
-amp__description__0 = Set the amplitude between 0 and 1.0. Or, pass in an object such as an oscillator to modulate amplitude with an audio signal.
-amp__returns = AudioParam: gain If no value is provided, returns the Web Audio API AudioParam that controls this oscillator's gain/amplitude/volume)
-amp__params__vol = Number|Object: between 0 and 1.0 or a modulating signal/oscillator
-amp__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) create a fade that lasts rampTime
-amp__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen seconds from now
-getAmp__description__0 = Returns the value of output gain
-getAmp__returns = Number: Amplitude value between 0.0 and 1.0
-freq__description__0 = Set frequency of an oscillator to a value. Or, pass in an object such as an oscillator to modulate the frequency with an audio signal.
-freq__returns = AudioParam: Frequency If no value is provided, returns the Web Audio API AudioParam that controls this oscillator's frequency
-freq__params__Frequency = Number|Object: Frequency in Hz or modulating signal/oscillator
-freq__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) Ramp time (in seconds)
-freq__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) Schedule this event to happen at x seconds from now
-getFreq__description__0 = Returns the value of frequency of oscillator
-getFreq__returns = Number: Frequency of oscillator in Hertz
-setType__description__0 = Set type to 'sine', 'triangle', 'sawtooth' or 'square'.
-setType__params__type = String: 'sine', 'triangle', 'sawtooth' or 'square'.
-getType__description__0 = Returns current type of oscillator eg. 'sine', 'triangle', 'sawtooth' or 'square'.
-getType__returns = String: type of oscillator eg . 'sine', 'triangle', 'sawtooth' or 'square'.
-connect__description__0 = Connect to a p5.sound / Web Audio object.
-connect__params__unit = Object: A p5.sound or Web Audio object
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect all outputs
-pan__description__0 = Pan between Left (-1) and Right (1)
-pan__params__panning = Number: Number between -1 and 1
-pan__params__timeFromNow = Number: schedule this event to happen seconds from now
-getPan__description__0 = Returns the current value of panPosition , between Left (-1) and Right (1)
-getPan__returns = Number: panPosition of oscillator , between Left (-1) and Right (1)
-phase__description__0 = Set the phase of an oscillator between 0.0 and 1.0. In this implementation, phase is a delay time based on the oscillator's current frequency.
-phase__params__phase = Number: float between 0.0 and 1.0
-add__description__0 = Add a value to the p5.Oscillator's output amplitude, and return the oscillator. Calling this method again will override the initial add() with a new value.
-add__returns = p5.Oscillator: Oscillator Returns this oscillator with scaled output
-add__params__number = Number: Constant number to add
-mult__description__0 = Multiply the p5.Oscillator's output amplitude by a fixed value (i.e. turn it up!). Calling this method again will override the initial mult() with a new value.
-mult__returns = p5.Oscillator: Oscillator Returns this oscillator with multiplied output
-mult__params__number = Number: Constant number to multiply
-scale__description__0 = Scale this oscillator's amplitude values to a given range, and return the oscillator. Calling this method again will override the initial scale() with new values.
-scale__returns = p5.Oscillator: Oscillator Returns this oscillator with scaled output
-scale__params__inMin = Number: input range minumum
-scale__params__inMax = Number: input range maximum
-scale__params__outMin = Number: input range minumum
-scale__params__outMax = Number: input range maximum
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Panner3D.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Panner3D.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 92fd144bc0..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Panner3D.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Panner3D is based on the Web Audio Spatial Panner Node. This panner is a spatial processing node that allows audio to be positioned and oriented in 3D space.
-description__1 = The position is relative to an Audio Context Listener, which can be accessed by p5.soundOut.audiocontext.listener
-panner__description__0 = Web Audio Spatial Panner Node
-panner__description__1 = Properties include Panning Model : "equal power" or "HRTF" DistanceModel : "linear", "inverse", or "exponential"
-process__description__0 = Connect an audio sorce
-process__params__src = Object: Input source
-set__description__0 = Set the X,Y,Z position of the Panner
-set__returns = Array: Updated x, y, z values as an array
-set__params__xVal = Number
-set__params__yVal = Number
-set__params__zVal = Number
-set__params__time = Number
-positionX__description__0 = Getter and setter methods for position coordinates
-positionX__returns = Number: updated coordinate value
-positionY__description__0 = Getter and setter methods for position coordinates
-positionY__returns = Number: updated coordinate value
-positionZ__description__0 = Getter and setter methods for position coordinates
-positionZ__returns = Number: updated coordinate value
-orient__description__0 = Set the X,Y,Z position of the Panner
-orient__returns = Array: Updated x, y, z values as an array
-orient__params__xVal = Number
-orient__params__yVal = Number
-orient__params__zVal = Number
-orient__params__time = Number
-orientX__description__0 = Getter and setter methods for orient coordinates
-orientX__returns = Number: updated coordinate value
-orientY__description__0 = Getter and setter methods for orient coordinates
-orientY__returns = Number: updated coordinate value
-orientZ__description__0 = Getter and setter methods for orient coordinates
-orientZ__returns = Number: updated coordinate value
-setFalloff__description__0 = Set the rolloff factor and max distance
-setFalloff__params__maxDistance = Number (Optional)
-setFalloff__params__rolloffFactor = Number (Optional)
-maxDist__description__0 = Maxium distance between the source and the listener
-maxDist__returns = Number: updated value
-maxDist__params__maxDistance = Number
-rollof__description__0 = How quickly the volume is reduced as the source moves away from the listener
-rollof__returns = Number: updated value
-rollof__params__rolloffFactor = Number
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Part.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Part.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 6de2878e9a..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Part.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A p5.Part plays back one or more p5.Phrases. Instantiate a part with steps and tatums. By default, each step represents a 1/16th note.
-description__1 = See p5.Phrase for more about musical timing.
-params__steps = Number: (Optional) Steps in the part
-params__tatums = Number: (Optional) Divisions of a beat, e.g. use 1/4, or 0.25 for a quater note (default is 1/16, a sixteenth note)
-setBPM__description__0 = Set the tempo of this part, in Beats Per Minute.
-setBPM__params__BPM = Number: Beats Per Minute
-setBPM__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) Seconds from now
-getBPM__description__0 = Returns the tempo, in Beats Per Minute, of this part.
-getBPM__returns = Number:
-start__description__0 = Start playback of this part. It will play through all of its phrases at a speed determined by setBPM.
-start__params__time = Number: (Optional) seconds from now
-loop__description__0 = Loop playback of this part. It will begin looping through all of its phrases at a speed determined by setBPM.
-loop__params__time = Number: (Optional) seconds from now
-noLoop__description__0 = Tell the part to stop looping.
-stop__description__0 = Stop the part and cue it to step 0. Playback will resume from the begining of the Part when it is played again.
-stop__params__time = Number: (Optional) seconds from now
-pause__description__0 = Pause the part. Playback will resume from the current step.
-pause__params__time = Number: seconds from now
-addPhrase__description__0 = Add a p5.Phrase to this Part.
-addPhrase__params__phrase = p5.Phrase: reference to a p5.Phrase
-removePhrase__description__0 = Remove a phrase from this part, based on the name it was given when it was created.
-removePhrase__params__phraseName = String
-getPhrase__description__0 = Get a phrase from this part, based on the name it was given when it was created. Now you can modify its array.
-getPhrase__params__phraseName = String
-replaceSequence__description__0 = Find all sequences with the specified name, and replace their patterns with the specified array.
-replaceSequence__params__phraseName = String
-replaceSequence__params__sequence = Array: Array of values to pass into the callback at each step of the phrase.
-onStep__description__0 = Set the function that will be called at every step. This will clear the previous function.
-onStep__params__callback = Function: The name of the callback you want to fire on every beat/tatum.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.PeakDetect.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.PeakDetect.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 225467a07a..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.PeakDetect.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = PeakDetect works in conjunction with p5.FFT to look for onsets in some or all of the frequency spectrum.
-description__1 = To use p5.PeakDetect, call update in the draw loop and pass in a p5.FFT object.
-description__2 = You can listen for a specific part of the frequency spectrum by setting the range between freq1 and freq2.
-description__3 = threshold is the threshold for detecting a peak, scaled between 0 and 1. It is logarithmic, so 0.1 is half as loud as 1.0.
-description__4 = The update method is meant to be run in the draw loop, and frames determines how many loops must pass before another peak can be detected. For example, if the frameRate() = 60, you could detect the beat of a 120 beat-per-minute song with this equation: framesPerPeak = 60 / (estimatedBPM / 60 );
-description__5 = Based on example contribtued by @b2renger, and a simple beat detection explanation by Felix Turner.
-params__freq1 = Number: (Optional) lowFrequency - defaults to 20Hz
-params__freq2 = Number: (Optional) highFrequency - defaults to 20000 Hz
-params__threshold = Number: (Optional) Threshold for detecting a beat between 0 and 1 scaled logarithmically where 0.1 is 1/2 the loudness of 1.0. Defaults to 0.35.
-params__framesPerPeak = Number: (Optional) Defaults to 20.
-isDetected__description__0 = isDetected is set to true when a peak is detected.
-update__description__0 = The update method is run in the draw loop.
-update__description__1 = Accepts an FFT object. You must call .analyze() on the FFT object prior to updating the peakDetect because it relies on a completed FFT analysis.
-update__params__fftObject = p5.FFT: A p5.FFT object
-onPeak__description__0 = onPeak accepts two arguments: a function to call when a peak is detected. The value of the peak, between 0.0 and 1.0, is passed to the callback.
-onPeak__params__callback = Function: Name of a function that will be called when a peak is detected.
-onPeak__params__val = Object: (Optional) Optional value to pass into the function when a peak is detected.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Phrase.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Phrase.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 3713b544f7..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Phrase.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A phrase is a pattern of musical events over time, i.e. a series of notes and rests.
-description__1 = Phrases must be added to a p5.Part for playback, and each part can play multiple phrases at the same time. For example, one Phrase might be a kick drum, another could be a snare, and another could be the bassline.
-description__2 = The first parameter is a name so that the phrase can be modified or deleted later. The callback is a a function that this phrase will call at every step—for example it might be called playNote(value){"{"}{"}"}. The array determines which value is passed into the callback at each step of the phrase. It can be numbers, an object with multiple numbers, or a zero (0) indicates a rest so the callback won't be called).
-params__name = String: Name so that you can access the Phrase.
-params__callback = Function: The name of a function that this phrase will call. Typically it will play a sound, and accept two parameters: a time at which to play the sound (in seconds from now), and a value from the sequence array. The time should be passed into the play() or start() method to ensure precision.
-params__sequence = Array: Array of values to pass into the callback at each step of the phrase.
-sequence__description__0 = Array of values to pass into the callback at each step of the phrase. Depending on the callback function's requirements, these values may be numbers, strings, or an object with multiple parameters. Zero (0) indicates a rest.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.PolySynth.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.PolySynth.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 477f8567df..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.PolySynth.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = An AudioVoice is used as a single voice for sound synthesis. The PolySynth class holds an array of AudioVoice, and deals with voices allocations, with setting notes to be played, and parameters to be set.
-params__synthVoice = Number: (Optional) A monophonic synth voice inheriting the AudioVoice class. Defaults to p5.MonoSynth
-params__maxVoices = Number: (Optional) Number of voices, defaults to 8;
-notes__description__0 = An object that holds information about which notes have been played and which notes are currently being played. New notes are added as keys on the fly. While a note has been attacked, but not released, the value of the key is the audiovoice which is generating that note. When notes are released, the value of the key becomes undefined.
-polyvalue__description__0 = A PolySynth must have at least 1 voice, defaults to 8
-AudioVoice__description__0 = Monosynth that generates the sound for each note that is triggered. The p5.PolySynth defaults to using the p5.MonoSynth as its voice.
-play__description__0 = Play a note by triggering noteAttack and noteRelease with sustain time
-play__params__note = Number: (Optional) midi note to play (ranging from 0 to 127 - 60 being a middle C)
-play__params__velocity = Number: (Optional) velocity of the note to play (ranging from 0 to 1)
-play__params__secondsFromNow = Number: (Optional) time from now (in seconds) at which to play
-play__params__sustainTime = Number: (Optional) time to sustain before releasing the envelope
-noteADSR__description__0 = noteADSR sets the envelope for a specific note that has just been triggered. Using this method modifies the envelope of whichever audiovoice is being used to play the desired note. The envelope should be reset before noteRelease is called in order to prevent the modified envelope from being used on other notes.
-noteADSR__params__note = Number: (Optional) Midi note on which ADSR should be set.
-noteADSR__params__attackTime = Number: (Optional) Time (in seconds before envelope reaches Attack Level
-noteADSR__params__decayTime = Number: (Optional) Time (in seconds) before envelope reaches Decay/Sustain Level
-noteADSR__params__susRatio = Number: (Optional) Ratio between attackLevel and releaseLevel, on a scale from 0 to 1, where 1.0 = attackLevel, 0.0 = releaseLevel. The susRatio determines the decayLevel and the level at which the sustain portion of the envelope will sustain. For example, if attackLevel is 0.4, releaseLevel is 0, and susAmt is 0.5, the decayLevel would be 0.2. If attackLevel is increased to 1.0 (using setRange), then decayLevel would increase proportionally, to become 0.5.
-noteADSR__params__releaseTime = Number: (Optional) Time in seconds from now (defaults to 0)
-setADSR__description__0 = Set the PolySynths global envelope. This method modifies the envelopes of each monosynth so that all notes are played with this envelope.
-setADSR__params__attackTime = Number: (Optional) Time (in seconds before envelope reaches Attack Level
-setADSR__params__decayTime = Number: (Optional) Time (in seconds) before envelope reaches Decay/Sustain Level
-setADSR__params__susRatio = Number: (Optional) Ratio between attackLevel and releaseLevel, on a scale from 0 to 1, where 1.0 = attackLevel, 0.0 = releaseLevel. The susRatio determines the decayLevel and the level at which the sustain portion of the envelope will sustain. For example, if attackLevel is 0.4, releaseLevel is 0, and susAmt is 0.5, the decayLevel would be 0.2. If attackLevel is increased to 1.0 (using setRange), then decayLevel would increase proportionally, to become 0.5.
-setADSR__params__releaseTime = Number: (Optional) Time in seconds from now (defaults to 0)
-noteAttack__description__0 = Trigger the Attack, and Decay portion of a MonoSynth. Similar to holding down a key on a piano, but it will hold the sustain level until you let go.
-noteAttack__params__note = Number: (Optional) midi note on which attack should be triggered.
-noteAttack__params__velocity = Number: (Optional) velocity of the note to play (ranging from 0 to 1)/
-noteAttack__params__secondsFromNow = Number: (Optional) time from now (in seconds)
-noteRelease__description__0 = Trigger the Release of an AudioVoice note. This is similar to releasing the key on a piano and letting the sound fade according to the release level and release time.
-noteRelease__params__note = Number: (Optional) midi note on which attack should be triggered. If no value is provided, all notes will be released.
-noteRelease__params__secondsFromNow = Number: (Optional) time to trigger the release
-connect__description__0 = Connect to a p5.sound / Web Audio object.
-connect__params__unit = Object: A p5.sound or Web Audio object
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect all outputs
-dispose__description__0 = Get rid of the MonoSynth and free up its resources / memory.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.PrintWriter.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.PrintWriter.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index b0e9b6a172..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.PrintWriter.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-params__filename = String
-params__extension = String (Optional)
-write__description__0 = Writes data to the PrintWriter stream
-write__params__data = Array: all data to be written by the PrintWriter
-print__description__0 = Writes data to the PrintWriter stream, and adds a new line at the end
-print__params__data = Array: all data to be printed by the PrintWriter
-clear__description__0 = Clears the data already written to the PrintWriter object
-close__description__0 = Closes the PrintWriter
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Pulse.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Pulse.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 52ad1a1668..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Pulse.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Creates a Pulse object, an oscillator that implements Pulse Width Modulation. The pulse is created with two oscillators. Accepts a parameter for frequency, and to set the width between the pulses. See p5.Oscillator for a full list of methods.
-params__freq = Number: (Optional) Frequency in oscillations per second (Hz)
-params__w = Number: (Optional) Width between the pulses (0 to 1.0, defaults to 0)
-width__description__0 = Set the width of a Pulse object (an oscillator that implements Pulse Width Modulation).
-width__params__width = Number: (Optional) Width between the pulses (0 to 1.0, defaults to 0)
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Renderer.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Renderer.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index f9fbf7272f..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Renderer.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Main graphics and rendering context, as well as the base API implementation for p5.js "core". To be used as the superclass for Renderer2D and Renderer3D classes, respectively.
-params__elt = String: DOM node that is wrapped
-params__pInst = P5: (Optional) pointer to p5 instance
-params__isMainCanvas = Boolean: (Optional) whether we're using it as main canvas
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Reverb.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Reverb.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index ca566dba77..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Reverb.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Reverb adds depth to a sound through a large number of decaying echoes. It creates the perception that sound is occurring in a physical space. The p5.Reverb has paramters for Time (how long does the reverb last) and decayRate (how much the sound decays with each echo) that can be set with the .set() or .process() methods. The p5.Convolver extends p5.Reverb allowing you to recreate the sound of actual physical spaces through convolution.
-description__1 = This class extends p5.Effect. Methods amp(), chain(), drywet(), connect(), and disconnect() are available.
-process__description__0 = Connect a source to the reverb, and assign reverb parameters.
-process__params__src = Object: p5.sound / Web Audio object with a sound output.
-process__params__seconds = Number: (Optional) Duration of the reverb, in seconds. Min: 0, Max: 10. Defaults to 3.
-process__params__decayRate = Number: (Optional) Percentage of decay with each echo. Min: 0, Max: 100. Defaults to 2.
-process__params__reverse = Boolean: (Optional) Play the reverb backwards or forwards.
-set__description__0 = Set the reverb settings. Similar to .process(), but without assigning a new input.
-set__params__seconds = Number: (Optional) Duration of the reverb, in seconds. Min: 0, Max: 10. Defaults to 3.
-set__params__decayRate = Number: (Optional) Percentage of decay with each echo. Min: 0, Max: 100. Defaults to 2.
-set__params__reverse = Boolean: (Optional) Play the reverb backwards or forwards.
-amp__description__0 = Set the output level of the reverb effect.
-amp__params__volume = Number: amplitude between 0 and 1.0
-amp__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) create a fade that lasts rampTime
-amp__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen seconds from now
-connect__description__0 = Send output to a p5.sound or web audio object
-connect__params__unit = Object
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnect all output.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SawOsc.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.SawOsc.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e7f6c6ccdb..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SawOsc.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Constructor: new p5.SawOsc(). This creates a SawTooth Wave Oscillator and is equivalent to new p5.Oscillator('sawtooth') or creating a p5.Oscillator and then calling its method setType('sawtooth'). See p5.Oscillator for methods.
-params__freq = Number: (Optional) Set the frequency
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Score.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Score.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d57b4ee6e..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Score.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A Score consists of a series of Parts. The parts will be played back in order. For example, you could have an A part, a B part, and a C part, and play them back in this order new p5.Score(a, a, b, a, c)
-params__parts = p5.Part: (Optional) One or multiple parts, to be played in sequence.
-start__description__0 = Start playback of the score.
-stop__description__0 = Stop playback of the score.
-pause__description__0 = Pause playback of the score.
-loop__description__0 = Loop playback of the score.
-noLoop__description__0 = Stop looping playback of the score. If it is currently playing, this will go into effect after the current round of playback completes.
-setBPM__description__0 = Set the tempo for all parts in the score
-setBPM__params__BPM = Number: Beats Per Minute
-setBPM__params__rampTime = Number: Seconds from now
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Shader.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Shader.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 4f48485c0c..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Shader.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Shader class for WEBGL Mode
-params__renderer = p5.RendererGL: an instance of p5.RendererGL that will provide the GL context for this new p5.Shader
-params__vertSrc = String: source code for the vertex shader (as a string)
-params__fragSrc = String: source code for the fragment shader (as a string)
-setUniform__description__0 = Used to set the uniforms of a p5.Shader object.
-setUniform__description__1 = Uniforms are used as a way to provide shader programs (which run on the GPU) with values from a sketch (which runs on the CPU).
-setUniform__params__uniformName = String: the name of the uniform. Must correspond to the name used in the vertex and fragment shaders
-setUniform__params__data = Boolean|Number|Number[]|p5.Image|p5.Graphics|p5.MediaElement|p5.Texture: the data to associate with the uniform. The type can be a boolean (true/false), a number, an array of numbers, or an image (p5.Image, p5.Graphics, p5.MediaElement, p5.Texture)
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SinOsc.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.SinOsc.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 541f002d33..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SinOsc.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Constructor: new p5.SinOsc(). This creates a Sine Wave Oscillator and is equivalent to new p5.Oscillator('sine') or creating a p5.Oscillator and then calling its method setType('sine'). See p5.Oscillator for methods.
-params__freq = Number: (Optional) Set the frequency
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundFile.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundFile.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index b564c506ef..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundFile.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = SoundFile object with a path to a file.
-description__1 = The p5.SoundFile may not be available immediately because it loads the file information asynchronously.
-description__2 = To do something with the sound as soon as it loads pass the name of a function as the second parameter.
-description__3 = Only one file path is required. However, audio file formats (i.e. mp3, ogg, wav and m4a/aac) are not supported by all web browsers. If you want to ensure compatability, instead of a single file path, you may include an Array of filepaths, and the browser will choose a format that works.
-params__path = String|Array: path to a sound file (String). Optionally, you may include multiple file formats in an array. Alternately, accepts an object from the HTML5 File API, or a p5.File.
-params__successCallback = Function: (Optional) Name of a function to call once file loads
-params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) Name of a function to call if file fails to load. This function will receive an error or XMLHttpRequest object with information about what went wrong.
-params__whileLoadingCallback = Function: (Optional) Name of a function to call while file is loading. That function will receive progress of the request to load the sound file (between 0 and 1) as its first parameter. This progress does not account for the additional time needed to decode the audio data.
-isLoaded__description__0 = Returns true if the sound file finished loading successfully.
-isLoaded__returns = Boolean:
-play__description__0 = Play the p5.SoundFile
-play__params__startTime = Number: (Optional) (optional) schedule playback to start (in seconds from now).
-play__params__rate = Number: (Optional) (optional) playback rate
-play__params__amp = Number: (Optional) (optional) amplitude (volume) of playback
-play__params__cueStart = Number: (Optional) (optional) cue start time in seconds
-play__params__duration = Number: (Optional) (optional) duration of playback in seconds
-playMode__description__0 = p5.SoundFile has two play modes: restart and sustain. Play Mode determines what happens to a p5.SoundFile if it is triggered while in the middle of playback. In sustain mode, playback will continue simultaneous to the new playback. In restart mode, play() will stop playback and start over. With untilDone, a sound will play only if it's not already playing. Sustain is the default mode.
-playMode__params__str = String: 'restart' or 'sustain' or 'untilDone'
-pause__description__0 = Pauses a file that is currently playing. If the file is not playing, then nothing will happen.
-pause__description__1 = After pausing, .play() will resume from the paused position. If p5.SoundFile had been set to loop before it was paused, it will continue to loop after it is unpaused with .play().
-pause__params__startTime = Number: (Optional) (optional) schedule event to occur seconds from now
-loop__description__0 = Loop the p5.SoundFile. Accepts optional parameters to set the playback rate, playback volume, loopStart, loopEnd.
-loop__params__startTime = Number: (Optional) (optional) schedule event to occur seconds from now
-loop__params__rate = Number: (Optional) (optional) playback rate
-loop__params__amp = Number: (Optional) (optional) playback volume
-loop__params__cueLoopStart = Number: (Optional) (optional) startTime in seconds
-loop__params__duration = Number: (Optional) (optional) loop duration in seconds
-setLoop__description__0 = Set a p5.SoundFile's looping flag to true or false. If the sound is currently playing, this change will take effect when it reaches the end of the current playback.
-setLoop__params__Boolean = Boolean: set looping to true or false
-isLooping__description__0 = Returns 'true' if a p5.SoundFile is currently looping and playing, 'false' if not.
-isLooping__returns = Boolean:
-isPlaying__description__0 = Returns true if a p5.SoundFile is playing, false if not (i.e. paused or stopped).
-isPlaying__returns = Boolean:
-isPaused__description__0 = Returns true if a p5.SoundFile is paused, false if not (i.e. playing or stopped).
-isPaused__returns = Boolean:
-stop__description__0 = Stop soundfile playback.
-stop__params__startTime = Number: (Optional) (optional) schedule event to occur in seconds from now
-pan__description__0 = Set the stereo panning of a p5.sound object to a floating point number between -1.0 (left) and 1.0 (right). Default is 0.0 (center).
-pan__params__panValue = Number: (Optional) Set the stereo panner
-pan__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule this event to happen seconds from now
-getPan__description__0 = Returns the current stereo pan position (-1.0 to 1.0)
-getPan__returns = Number: Returns the stereo pan setting of the Oscillator as a number between -1.0 (left) and 1.0 (right). 0.0 is center and default.
-rate__description__0 = Set the playback rate of a sound file. Will change the speed and the pitch. Values less than zero will reverse the audio buffer.
-rate__params__playbackRate = Number: (Optional) Set the playback rate. 1.0 is normal, .5 is half-speed, 2.0 is twice as fast. Values less than zero play backwards.
-setVolume__description__0 = Multiply the output volume (amplitude) of a sound file between 0.0 (silence) and 1.0 (full volume). 1.0 is the maximum amplitude of a digital sound, so multiplying by greater than 1.0 may cause digital distortion. To fade, provide a rampTime parameter. For more complex fades, see the Envelope class.
-setVolume__description__1 = Alternately, you can pass in a signal source such as an oscillator to modulate the amplitude with an audio signal.
-setVolume__params__volume = Number|Object: Volume (amplitude) between 0.0 and 1.0 or modulating signal/oscillator
-setVolume__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) Fade for t seconds
-setVolume__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) Schedule this event to happen at t seconds in the future
-duration__description__0 = Returns the duration of a sound file in seconds.
-duration__returns = Number: The duration of the soundFile in seconds.
-currentTime__description__0 = Return the current position of the p5.SoundFile playhead, in seconds. Time is relative to the normal buffer direction, so if reverseBuffer has been called, currentTime will count backwards.
-currentTime__returns = Number: currentTime of the soundFile in seconds.
-jump__description__0 = Move the playhead of a soundfile that is currently playing to a new position and a new duration, in seconds. If none are given, will reset the file to play entire duration from start to finish. To set the position of a soundfile that is not currently playing, use the play or loop methods.
-jump__params__cueTime = Number: cueTime of the soundFile in seconds.
-jump__params__duration = Number: duration in seconds.
-channels__description__0 = Return the number of channels in a sound file. For example, Mono = 1, Stereo = 2.
-channels__returns = Number: [channels]
-sampleRate__description__0 = Return the sample rate of the sound file.
-sampleRate__returns = Number: [sampleRate]
-frames__description__0 = Return the number of samples in a sound file. Equal to sampleRate * duration.
-frames__returns = Number: [sampleCount]
-getPeaks__description__0 = Returns an array of amplitude peaks in a p5.SoundFile that can be used to draw a static waveform. Scans through the p5.SoundFile's audio buffer to find the greatest amplitudes. Accepts one parameter, 'length', which determines size of the array. Larger arrays result in more precise waveform visualizations.
-getPeaks__description__1 = Inspired by Wavesurfer.js.
-getPeaks__returns = Float32Array: Array of peaks.
-getPeaks__params__length = Number: (Optional) length is the size of the returned array. Larger length results in more precision. Defaults to 5*width of the browser window.
-reverseBuffer__description__0 = Reverses the p5.SoundFile's buffer source. Playback must be handled separately (see example).
-onended__description__0 = Schedule an event to be called when the soundfile reaches the end of a buffer. If the soundfile is playing through once, this will be called when it ends. If it is looping, it will be called when stop is called.
-onended__params__callback = Function: function to call when the soundfile has ended.
-connect__description__0 = Connects the output of a p5sound object to input of another p5.sound object. For example, you may connect a p5.SoundFile to an FFT or an Effect. If no parameter is given, it will connect to the main output. Most p5sound objects connect to the master output when they are created.
-connect__params__object = Object: (Optional) Audio object that accepts an input
-disconnect__description__0 = Disconnects the output of this p5sound object.
-setPath__description__0 = Reset the source for this SoundFile to a new path (URL).
-setPath__params__path = String: path to audio file
-setPath__params__callback = Function: Callback
-setBuffer__description__0 = Replace the current Audio Buffer with a new Buffer.
-setBuffer__params__buf = Array: Array of Float32 Array(s). 2 Float32 Arrays will create a stereo source. 1 will create a mono source.
-addCue__description__0 = Schedule events to trigger every time a MediaElement (audio/video) reaches a playback cue point.
-addCue__description__1 = Accepts a callback function, a time (in seconds) at which to trigger the callback, and an optional parameter for the callback.
-addCue__description__2 = Time will be passed as the first parameter to the callback function, and param will be the second parameter.
-addCue__returns = Number: id ID of this cue, useful for removeCue(id)
-addCue__params__time = Number: Time in seconds, relative to this media element's playback. For example, to trigger an event every time playback reaches two seconds, pass in the number 2. This will be passed as the first parameter to the callback function.
-addCue__params__callback = Function: Name of a function that will be called at the given time. The callback will receive time and (optionally) param as its two parameters.
-addCue__params__value = Object: (Optional) An object to be passed as the second parameter to the callback function.
-removeCue__description__0 = Remove a callback based on its ID. The ID is returned by the addCue method.
-removeCue__params__id = Number: ID of the cue, as returned by addCue
-clearCues__description__0 = Remove all of the callbacks that had originally been scheduled via the addCue method.
-save__description__0 = Save a p5.SoundFile as a .wav file. The browser will prompt the user to download the file to their device. To upload a file to a server, see getBlob
-save__params__fileName = String: (Optional) name of the resulting .wav file.
-getBlob__description__0 = This method is useful for sending a SoundFile to a server. It returns the .wav-encoded audio data as a "Blob". A Blob is a file-like data object that can be uploaded to a server with an http request. We'll use the httpDo options object to send a POST request with some specific options: we encode the request as multipart/form-data, and attach the blob as one of the form values using FormData.
-getBlob__returns = Blob: A file-like data object
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundLoop.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundLoop.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index cfad2ea3de..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundLoop.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = SoundLoop
-params__callback = Function: this function will be called on each iteration of theloop
-params__interval = Number|String: (Optional) amount of time (if a number) or beats (if a string, following Tone.Time convention) for each iteration of the loop. Defaults to 1 second.
-bpm__description__0 = Getters and Setters, setting any paramter will result in a change in the clock's frequency, that will be reflected after the next callback beats per minute (defaults to 60)
-timeSignature__description__0 = number of quarter notes in a measure (defaults to 4)
-interval__description__0 = length of the loops interval
-iterations__description__0 = how many times the callback has been called so far
-musicalTimeMode__description__0 = musicalTimeMode uses Tone.Time convention true if string, false if number
-maxIterations__description__0 = Set a limit to the number of loops to play. defaults to Infinity
-start__description__0 = Start the loop
-start__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule a starting time
-stop__description__0 = Stop the loop
-stop__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule a stopping time
-pause__description__0 = Pause the loop
-pause__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) schedule a pausing time
-syncedStart__description__0 = Synchronize loops. Use this method to start two or more loops in synchronization or to start a loop in synchronization with a loop that is already playing This method will schedule the implicit loop in sync with the explicit master loop i.e. loopToStart.syncedStart(loopToSyncWith)
-syncedStart__params__otherLoop = Object: a p5.SoundLoop to sync with
-syncedStart__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) Start the loops in sync after timeFromNow seconds
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundRecorder.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundRecorder.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e8f2ca9aa..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SoundRecorder.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Record sounds for playback and/or to save as a .wav file. The p5.SoundRecorder records all sound output from your sketch, or can be assigned a specific source with setInput().
-description__1 = The record() method accepts a p5.SoundFile as a parameter. When playback is stopped (either after the given amount of time, or with the stop() method), the p5.SoundRecorder will send its recording to that p5.SoundFile for playback.
-setInput__description__0 = Connect a specific device to the p5.SoundRecorder. If no parameter is given, p5.SoundRecorer will record all audible p5.sound from your sketch.
-setInput__params__unit = Object: (Optional) p5.sound object or a web audio unit that outputs sound
-record__description__0 = Start recording. To access the recording, provide a p5.SoundFile as the first parameter. The p5.SoundRecorder will send its recording to that p5.SoundFile for playback once recording is complete. Optional parameters include duration (in seconds) of the recording, and a callback function that will be called once the complete recording has been transfered to the p5.SoundFile.
-record__params__soundFile = p5.SoundFile: p5.SoundFile
-record__params__duration = Number: (Optional) Time (in seconds)
-record__params__callback = Function: (Optional) The name of a function that will be called once the recording completes
-stop__description__0 = Stop the recording. Once the recording is stopped, the results will be sent to the p5.SoundFile that was given on .record(), and if a callback function was provided on record, that function will be called.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SqrOsc.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.SqrOsc.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index be2dd3c835..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.SqrOsc.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Constructor: new p5.SqrOsc(). This creates a Square Wave Oscillator and is equivalent to new p5.Oscillator('square') or creating a p5.Oscillator and then calling its method setType('square'). See p5.Oscillator for methods.
-params__freq = Number: (Optional) Set the frequency
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.StringDict.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.StringDict.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index b76b577e7c..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.StringDict.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A simple Dictionary class for Strings.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Table.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Table.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 0768cc0699..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Table.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Table objects store data with multiple rows and columns, much like in a traditional spreadsheet. Tables can be generated from scratch, dynamically, or using data from an existing file.
-params__rows = p5.TableRow[]: (Optional) An array of p5.TableRow objects
-columns__description__0 = An array containing the names of the columns in the table, if the "header" the table is loaded with the "header" parameter.
-rows__description__0 = An array containing the p5.TableRow objects that make up the rows of the table. The same result as calling getRows()
-addRow__description__0 = Use addRow() to add a new row of data to a p5.Table object. By default, an empty row is created. Typically, you would store a reference to the new row in a TableRow object (see newRow in the example above), and then set individual values using set().
-addRow__description__1 = If a p5.TableRow object is included as a parameter, then that row is duplicated and added to the table.
-addRow__returns = p5.TableRow: the row that was added
-addRow__params__row = p5.TableRow: (Optional) row to be added to the table
-removeRow__description__0 = Removes a row from the table object.
-removeRow__params__id = Integer: ID number of the row to remove
-getRow__description__0 = Returns a reference to the specified p5.TableRow. The reference can then be used to get and set values of the selected row.
-getRow__returns = p5.TableRow: p5.TableRow object
-getRow__params__rowID = Integer: ID number of the row to get
-getRows__description__0 = Gets all rows from the table. Returns an array of p5.TableRows.
-getRows__returns = p5.TableRow[]: Array of p5.TableRows
-findRow__description__0 = Finds the first row in the Table that contains the value provided, and returns a reference to that row. Even if multiple rows are possible matches, only the first matching row is returned. The column to search may be specified by either its ID or title.
-findRow__returns = p5.TableRow:
-findRow__params__value = String: The value to match
-findRow__params__column = Integer|String: ID number or title of the column to search
-findRows__description__0 = Finds the rows in the Table that contain the value provided, and returns references to those rows. Returns an Array, so for must be used to iterate through all the rows, as shown in the example above. The column to search may be specified by either its ID or title.
-findRows__returns = p5.TableRow[]: An Array of TableRow objects
-findRows__params__value = String: The value to match
-findRows__params__column = Integer|String: ID number or title of the column to search
-matchRow__description__0 = Finds the first row in the Table that matches the regular expression provided, and returns a reference to that row. Even if multiple rows are possible matches, only the first matching row is returned. The column to search may be specified by either its ID or title.
-matchRow__returns = p5.TableRow: TableRow object
-matchRow__params__regexp = String|RegExp: The regular expression to match
-matchRow__params__column = String|Integer: The column ID (number) or title (string)
-matchRows__description__0 = Finds the rows in the Table that match the regular expression provided, and returns references to those rows. Returns an array, so for must be used to iterate through all the rows, as shown in the example. The column to search may be specified by either its ID or title.
-matchRows__returns = p5.TableRow[]: An Array of TableRow objects
-matchRows__params__regexp = String: The regular expression to match
-matchRows__params__column = String|Integer: (Optional) The column ID (number) or title (string)
-getColumn__description__0 = Retrieves all values in the specified column, and returns them as an array. The column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-getColumn__returns = Array: Array of column values
-getColumn__params__column = String|Number: String or Number of the column to return
-clearRows__description__0 = Removes all rows from a Table. While all rows are removed, columns and column titles are maintained.
-addColumn__description__0 = Use addColumn() to add a new column to a Table object. Typically, you will want to specify a title, so the column may be easily referenced later by name. (If no title is specified, the new column's title will be null.)
-addColumn__params__title = String: (Optional) title of the given column
-getColumnCount__description__0 = Returns the total number of columns in a Table.
-getColumnCount__returns = Integer: Number of columns in this table
-getRowCount__description__0 = Returns the total number of rows in a Table.
-getRowCount__returns = Integer: Number of rows in this table
-removeTokens__description__0 = Removes any of the specified characters (or "tokens").
-removeTokens__description__1 = If no column is specified, then the values in all columns and rows are processed. A specific column may be referenced by either its ID or title.
-removeTokens__params__chars = String: String listing characters to be removed
-removeTokens__params__column = String|Integer: (Optional) Column ID (number) or name (string)
-trim__description__0 = Trims leading and trailing whitespace, such as spaces and tabs, from String table values. If no column is specified, then the values in all columns and rows are trimmed. A specific column may be referenced by either its ID or title.
-trim__params__column = String|Integer: (Optional) Column ID (number) or name (string)
-removeColumn__description__0 = Use removeColumn() to remove an existing column from a Table object. The column to be removed may be identified by either its title (a String) or its index value (an int). removeColumn(0) would remove the first column, removeColumn(1) would remove the second column, and so on.
-removeColumn__params__column = String|Integer: columnName (string) or ID (number)
-set__description__0 = Stores a value in the Table's specified row and column. The row is specified by its ID, while the column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-set__params__row = Integer: row ID
-set__params__column = String|Integer: column ID (Number) or title (String)
-set__params__value = String|Number: value to assign
-setNum__description__0 = Stores a Float value in the Table's specified row and column. The row is specified by its ID, while the column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-setNum__params__row = Integer: row ID
-setNum__params__column = String|Integer: column ID (Number) or title (String)
-setNum__params__value = Number: value to assign
-setString__description__0 = Stores a String value in the Table's specified row and column. The row is specified by its ID, while the column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-setString__params__row = Integer: row ID
-setString__params__column = String|Integer: column ID (Number) or title (String)
-setString__params__value = String: value to assign
-get__description__0 = Retrieves a value from the Table's specified row and column. The row is specified by its ID, while the column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-get__returns = String|Number:
-get__params__row = Integer: row ID
-get__params__column = String|Integer: columnName (string) or ID (number)
-getNum__description__0 = Retrieves a Float value from the Table's specified row and column. The row is specified by its ID, while the column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-getNum__returns = Number:
-getNum__params__row = Integer: row ID
-getNum__params__column = String|Integer: columnName (string) or ID (number)
-getString__description__0 = Retrieves a String value from the Table's specified row and column. The row is specified by its ID, while the column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-getString__returns = String:
-getString__params__row = Integer: row ID
-getString__params__column = String|Integer: columnName (string) or ID (number)
-getObject__description__0 = Retrieves all table data and returns as an object. If a column name is passed in, each row object will be stored with that attribute as its title.
-getObject__returns = Object:
-getObject__params__headerColumn = String: (Optional) Name of the column which should be used to title each row object (optional)
-getArray__description__0 = Retrieves all table data and returns it as a multidimensional array.
-getArray__returns = Array:
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.TableRow.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.TableRow.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index c2490a7af6..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.TableRow.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A TableRow object represents a single row of data values, stored in columns, from a table.
-description__1 = A Table Row contains both an ordered array, and an unordered JSON object.
-params__str = String: (Optional) optional: populate the row with a string of values, separated by the separator
-params__separator = String: (Optional) comma separated values (csv) by default
-set__description__0 = Stores a value in the TableRow's specified column. The column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-set__params__column = String|Integer: Column ID (Number) or Title (String)
-set__params__value = String|Number: The value to be stored
-setNum__description__0 = Stores a Float value in the TableRow's specified column. The column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-setNum__params__column = String|Integer: Column ID (Number) or Title (String)
-setNum__params__value = Number|String: The value to be stored as a Float
-setString__description__0 = Stores a String value in the TableRow's specified column. The column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-setString__params__column = String|Integer: Column ID (Number) or Title (String)
-setString__params__value = String|Number|Boolean|Object: The value to be stored as a String
-get__description__0 = Retrieves a value from the TableRow's specified column. The column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-get__returns = String|Number:
-get__params__column = String|Integer: columnName (string) or ID (number)
-getNum__description__0 = Retrieves a Float value from the TableRow's specified column. The column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-getNum__returns = Number: Float Floating point number
-getNum__params__column = String|Integer: columnName (string) or ID (number)
-getString__description__0 = Retrieves an String value from the TableRow's specified column. The column may be specified by either its ID or title.
-getString__returns = String: String
-getString__params__column = String|Integer: columnName (string) or ID (number)
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.TriOsc.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.TriOsc.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index a62708257c..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.TriOsc.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Constructor: new p5.TriOsc(). This creates a Triangle Wave Oscillator and is equivalent to new p5.Oscillator('triangle') or creating a p5.Oscillator and then calling its method setType('triangle'). See p5.Oscillator for methods.
-params__freq = Number: (Optional) Set the frequency
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.TypedDict.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.TypedDict.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 374255da09..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.TypedDict.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Base class for all p5.Dictionary types. Specifically typed Dictionary classes inherit from this class.
-size__description__0 = Returns the number of key-value pairs currently stored in the Dictionary.
-size__returns = Integer: the number of key-value pairs in the Dictionary
-hasKey__description__0 = Returns true if the given key exists in the Dictionary, otherwise returns false.
-hasKey__returns = Boolean: whether that key exists in Dictionary
-hasKey__params__key = Number|String: that you want to look up
-get__description__0 = Returns the value stored at the given key.
-get__returns = Number|String: the value stored at that key
-get__params__the = Number|String: key you want to access
-set__description__0 = Updates the value associated with the given key in case it already exists in the Dictionary. Otherwise a new key-value pair is added.
-set__params__key = Number|String
-set__params__value = Number|String
-create__description__0 = Creates a new key-value pair in the Dictionary.
-create__params__key = Number|String
-create__params__value = Number|String
-create__params__obj = Object: key/value pair
-clear__description__0 = Removes all previously stored key-value pairs from the Dictionary.
-remove__description__0 = Removes the key-value pair stored at the given key from the Dictionary.
-remove__params__key = Number|String: for the pair to remove
-print__description__0 = Logs the set of items currently stored in the Dictionary to the console.
-saveTable__description__0 = Converts the Dictionary into a CSV file for local download.
-saveJSON__description__0 = Converts the Dictionary into a JSON file for local download.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Vector.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.Vector.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index b6752a3e42..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.Vector.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = A class to describe a two or three dimensional vector, specifically a Euclidean (also known as geometric) vector. A vector is an entity that has both magnitude and direction. The datatype, however, stores the components of the vector (x, y for 2D, and x, y, z for 3D). The magnitude and direction can be accessed via the methods mag() and heading().
-description__1 = In many of the p5.js examples, you will see p5.Vector used to describe a position, velocity, or acceleration. For example, if you consider a rectangle moving across the screen, at any given instant it has a position (a vector that points from the origin to its location), a velocity (the rate at which the object's position changes per time unit, expressed as a vector), and acceleration (the rate at which the object's velocity changes per time unit, expressed as a vector).
-description__2 = Since vectors represent groupings of values, we cannot simply use traditional addition/multiplication/etc. Instead, we'll need to do some "vector" math, which is made easy by the methods inside the p5.Vector class.
-params__x = Number: (Optional) x component of the vector
-params__y = Number: (Optional) y component of the vector
-params__z = Number: (Optional) z component of the vector
-x__description__0 = The x component of the vector
-y__description__0 = The y component of the vector
-z__description__0 = The z component of the vector
-toString__description__0 = Returns a string representation of a vector v by calling String(v) or v.toString(). This method is useful for logging vectors in the console.
-toString__returns = String:
-set__description__0 = Sets the x, y, and z component of the vector using two or three separate variables, the data from a p5.Vector, or the values from a float array.
-set__params__x = Number: (Optional) the x component of the vector
-set__params__y = Number: (Optional) the y component of the vector
-set__params__z = Number: (Optional) the z component of the vector
-set__params__value = p5.Vector|Number[]: the vector to set
-copy__description__0 = Gets a copy of the vector, returns a p5.Vector object.
-copy__returns = p5.Vector: the copy of the p5.Vector object
-add__description__0 = Adds x, y, and z components to a vector, adds one vector to another, or adds two independent vectors together. The version of the method that adds two vectors together is a static method and returns a p5.Vector, the others acts directly on the vector. Additionally, you may provide arguments to this function as an array. See the examples for more context.
-add__params__x = Number: the x component of the vector to be added
-add__params__y = Number: (Optional) the y component of the vector to be added
-add__params__z = Number: (Optional) the z component of the vector to be added
-add__params__value = p5.Vector|Number[]: the vector to add
-add__params__v1 = p5.Vector: a p5.Vector to add
-add__params__v2 = p5.Vector: a p5.Vector to add
-add__params__target = p5.Vector: (Optional) the vector to receive the result
-rem__description__0 = Gives remainder of a vector when it is divided by another vector. See examples for more context.
-rem__params__x = Number: the x component of divisor vector
-rem__params__y = Number: the y component of divisor vector
-rem__params__z = Number: the z component of divisor vector
-rem__params__value = p5.Vector | Number[]: divisor vector
-rem__params__v1 = p5.Vector: dividend p5.Vector
-rem__params__v2 = p5.Vector: divisor p5.Vector
-sub__description__0 = Subtracts x, y, and z components from a vector, subtracts one vector from another, or subtracts two independent vectors. The version of the method that subtracts two vectors is a static method and returns a p5.Vector, the other acts directly on the vector. Additionally, you may provide arguments to this function as an array. See the examples for more context.
-sub__params__x = Number: the x component of the vector to subtract
-sub__params__y = Number: (Optional) the y component of the vector to subtract
-sub__params__z = Number: (Optional) the z component of the vector to subtract
-sub__params__value = p5.Vector|Number[]: the vector to subtract
-sub__params__v1 = p5.Vector: a p5.Vector to subtract from
-sub__params__v2 = p5.Vector: a p5.Vector to subtract
-sub__params__target = p5.Vector: (Optional) the vector to receive the result
-mult__description__0 = Multiplies the vector by a scalar, multiplies the x, y, and z components from a vector, or multiplies the x, y, and z components of two independent vectors. When multiplying a vector by a scalar, the x, y, and z components of the vector are all multiplied by the scalar. When multiplying a vector by a vector, the x, y, z components of both vectors are multiplied by each other (for example, with two vectors a and b: a.x * b.x, a.y * b.y, a.z * b.z). The static version of this method creates a new p5.Vector while the non static version acts on the vector directly. Additionally, you may provide arguments to this function as an array. See the examples for more context.
-mult__params__n = Number: The number to multiply with the vector
-mult__params__x = Number: The number to multiply with the x component of the vector
-mult__params__y = Number: The number to multiply with the y component of the vector
-mult__params__z = Number: (Optional) The number to multiply with the z component of the vector
-mult__params__arr = Number[]: The array to multiply with the components of the vector
-mult__params__v = p5.Vector: The vector to multiply with the components of the original vector
-mult__params__target = p5.Vector: (Optional) the vector to receive the result
-mult__params__v0 = p5.Vector
-mult__params__v1 = p5.Vector
-div__description__0 = Divides the vector by a scalar, divides a vector by the x, y, and z arguments, or divides the x, y, and z components of two vectors against each other. When dividing a vector by a scalar, the x, y, and z components of the vector are all divided by the scalar. When dividing a vector by a vector, the x, y, z components of the source vector are treated as the dividend, and the x, y, z components of the argument is treated as the divisor (for example with two vectors a and b: a.x / b.x, a.y / b.y, a.z / b.z). The static version of this method creates a new p5.Vector while the non static version acts on the vector directly. Additionally, you may provide arguments to this function as an array. See the examples for more context.
-div__params__n = Number: The number to divide the vector by
-div__params__x = Number: The number to divide with the x component of the vector
-div__params__y = Number: The number to divide with the y component of the vector
-div__params__z = Number: (Optional) The number to divide with the z component of the vector
-div__params__arr = Number[]: The array to divide the components of the vector by
-div__params__v = p5.Vector: The vector to divide the components of the original vector by
-div__params__target = p5.Vector: (Optional) the vector to receive the result
-div__params__v0 = p5.Vector
-div__params__v1 = p5.Vector
-mag__description__0 = Calculates the magnitude (length) of the vector and returns the result as a float (this is simply the equation sqrt(x*x + y*y + z*z).)
-mag__returns = Number: magnitude of the vector
-mag__params__vecT = p5.Vector: the vector to return the magnitude of
-magSq__description__0 = Calculates the squared magnitude of the vector and returns the result as a float (this is simply the equation (x*x + y*y + z*z).) Faster if the real length is not required in the case of comparing vectors, etc.
-magSq__returns = Number: squared magnitude of the vector
-dot__description__0 = Calculates the dot product of two vectors. The version of the method that computes the dot product of two independent vectors is a static method. See the examples for more context.
-dot__returns = Number: the dot product
-dot__params__x = Number: x component of the vector
-dot__params__y = Number: (Optional) y component of the vector
-dot__params__z = Number: (Optional) z component of the vector
-dot__params__value = p5.Vector: value component of the vector or a p5.Vector
-dot__params__v1 = p5.Vector: the first p5.Vector
-dot__params__v2 = p5.Vector: the second p5.Vector
-cross__description__0 = Calculates and returns a vector composed of the cross product between two vectors. Both the static and non static methods return a new p5.Vector. See the examples for more context.
-cross__returns = p5.Vector: p5.Vector composed of cross product
-cross__params__v = p5.Vector: p5.Vector to be crossed
-cross__params__v1 = p5.Vector: the first p5.Vector
-cross__params__v2 = p5.Vector: the second p5.Vector
-dist__description__0 = Calculates the Euclidean distance between two points (considering a point as a vector object). If you are looking to calculate distance with 2 points see dist()
-dist__returns = Number: the distance
-dist__params__v = p5.Vector: the x, y, and z coordinates of a p5.Vector
-dist__params__v1 = p5.Vector: the first p5.Vector
-dist__params__v2 = p5.Vector: the second p5.Vector
-normalize__description__0 = Normalize the vector to length 1 (make it a unit vector).
-normalize__returns = p5.Vector: normalized p5.Vector
-normalize__params__v = p5.Vector: the vector to normalize
-normalize__params__target = p5.Vector: (Optional) the vector to receive the result
-limit__description__0 = Limit the magnitude of this vector to the value used for the max parameter.
-limit__params__max = Number: the maximum magnitude for the vector
-setMag__description__0 = Set the magnitude of this vector to the value used for the len parameter.
-setMag__params__len = Number: the new length for this vector
-heading__description__0 = Calculate the angle of rotation for this vector(only 2D vectors). p5.Vectors created using createVector() will take the current angleMode into consideration, and give the angle in radians or degree accordingly.
-heading__returns = Number: the angle of rotation
-setHeading__description__0 = Rotate the vector to a specific angle (only 2D vectors), magnitude remains the same
-setHeading__params__angle = Number: the angle of rotation
-rotate__description__0 = Rotate the vector by an angle (only 2D vectors), magnitude remains the same
-rotate__params__angle = Number: the angle of rotation
-rotate__params__v = p5.Vector
-rotate__params__target = p5.Vector: (Optional) the vector to receive the result
-angleBetween__description__0 = Calculates and returns the angle between two vectors. This function will take the current angleMode into consideration, and give the angle in radians or degree accordingly.
-angleBetween__returns = Number: the angle between (in radians)
-angleBetween__params__value = p5.Vector: the x, y, and z components of a p5.Vector
-lerp__description__0 = Linear interpolate the vector to another vector
-lerp__params__x = Number: the x component
-lerp__params__y = Number: the y component
-lerp__params__z = Number: the z component
-lerp__params__amt = Number: the amount of interpolation; some value between 0.0 (old vector) and 1.0 (new vector). 0.9 is very near the new vector. 0.5 is halfway in between.
-lerp__params__v = p5.Vector: the p5.Vector to lerp to
-lerp__params__v1 = p5.Vector
-lerp__params__v2 = p5.Vector
-lerp__params__target = p5.Vector: (Optional) the vector to receive the result
-reflect__description__0 = Reflect the incoming vector about a normal to a line in 2D, or about a normal to a plane in 3D This method acts on the vector directly
-reflect__params__surfaceNormal = p5.Vector: the p5.Vector to reflect about, will be normalized by this method
-array__description__0 = Return a representation of this vector as a float array. This is only for temporary use. If used in any other fashion, the contents should be copied by using the p5.Vector.copy() method to copy into your own array.
-array__returns = Number[]: an Array with the 3 values
-equals__description__0 = Equality check against a p5.Vector
-equals__returns = Boolean: whether the vectors are equals
-equals__params__x = Number: (Optional) the x component of the vector
-equals__params__y = Number: (Optional) the y component of the vector
-equals__params__z = Number: (Optional) the z component of the vector
-equals__params__value = p5.Vector|Array: the vector to compare
-fromAngle__description__0 = Make a new 2D vector from an angle
-fromAngle__returns = p5.Vector: the new p5.Vector object
-fromAngle__params__angle = Number: the desired angle, in radians (unaffected by angleMode)
-fromAngle__params__length = Number: (Optional) the length of the new vector (defaults to 1)
-fromAngles__description__0 = Make a new 3D vector from a pair of ISO spherical angles
-fromAngles__returns = p5.Vector: the new p5.Vector object
-fromAngles__params__theta = Number: the polar angle, in radians (zero is up)
-fromAngles__params__phi = Number: the azimuthal angle, in radians (zero is out of the screen)
-fromAngles__params__length = Number: (Optional) the length of the new vector (defaults to 1)
-random2D__description__0 = Make a new 2D unit vector from a random angle
-random2D__returns = p5.Vector: the new p5.Vector object
-random3D__description__0 = Make a new random 3D unit vector.
-random3D__returns = p5.Vector: the new p5.Vector object
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.XML.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.XML.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 8fff4e3de9..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.XML.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = XML is a representation of an XML object, able to parse XML code. Use loadXML() to load external XML files and create XML objects.
-getParent__description__0 = Gets a copy of the element's parent. Returns the parent as another p5.XML object.
-getParent__returns = p5.XML: element parent
-getName__description__0 = Gets the element's full name, which is returned as a String.
-getName__returns = String: the name of the node
-setName__description__0 = Sets the element's name, which is specified as a String.
-setName__params__the = String: new name of the node
-hasChildren__description__0 = Checks whether or not the element has any children, and returns the result as a boolean.
-hasChildren__returns = Boolean:
-listChildren__description__0 = Get the names of all of the element's children, and returns the names as an array of Strings. This is the same as looping through and calling getName() on each child element individually.
-listChildren__returns = String[]: names of the children of the element
-getChildren__description__0 = Returns all of the element's children as an array of p5.XML objects. When the name parameter is specified, then it will return all children that match that name.
-getChildren__returns = p5.XML[]: children of the element
-getChildren__params__name = String: (Optional) element name
-getChild__description__0 = Returns the first of the element's children that matches the name parameter or the child of the given index.It returns undefined if no matching child is found.
-getChild__returns = p5.XML:
-getChild__params__name = String|Integer: element name or index
-addChild__description__0 = Appends a new child to the element. The child can be specified with either a String, which will be used as the new tag's name, or as a reference to an existing p5.XML object. A reference to the newly created child is returned as an p5.XML object.
-addChild__params__node = p5.XML: a p5.XML Object which will be the child to be added
-removeChild__description__0 = Removes the element specified by name or index.
-removeChild__params__name = String|Integer: element name or index
-getAttributeCount__description__0 = Counts the specified element's number of attributes, returned as an Number.
-getAttributeCount__returns = Integer:
-listAttributes__description__0 = Gets all of the specified element's attributes, and returns them as an array of Strings.
-listAttributes__returns = String[]: an array of strings containing the names of attributes
-hasAttribute__description__0 = Checks whether or not an element has the specified attribute.
-hasAttribute__returns = Boolean: true if attribute found else false
-hasAttribute__params__the = String: attribute to be checked
-getNum__description__0 = Returns an attribute value of the element as an Number. If the defaultValue parameter is specified and the attribute doesn't exist, then defaultValue is returned. If no defaultValue is specified and the attribute doesn't exist, the value 0 is returned.
-getNum__returns = Number:
-getNum__params__name = String: the non-null full name of the attribute
-getNum__params__defaultValue = Number: (Optional) the default value of the attribute
-getString__description__0 = Returns an attribute value of the element as an String. If the defaultValue parameter is specified and the attribute doesn't exist, then defaultValue is returned. If no defaultValue is specified and the attribute doesn't exist, null is returned.
-getString__returns = String:
-getString__params__name = String: the non-null full name of the attribute
-getString__params__defaultValue = Number: (Optional) the default value of the attribute
-setAttribute__description__0 = Sets the content of an element's attribute. The first parameter specifies the attribute name, while the second specifies the new content.
-setAttribute__params__name = String: the full name of the attribute
-setAttribute__params__value = Number|String|Boolean: the value of the attribute
-getContent__description__0 = Returns the content of an element. If there is no such content, defaultValue is returned if specified, otherwise null is returned.
-getContent__returns = String:
-getContent__params__defaultValue = String: (Optional) value returned if no content is found
-setContent__description__0 = Sets the element's content.
-setContent__params__text = String: the new content
-serialize__description__0 = Serializes the element into a string. This function is useful for preparing the content to be sent over a http request or saved to file.
-serialize__returns = String: Serialized string of the element
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index fead75094c..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/p5.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1556 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = This is the p5 instance constructor.
-description__1 = A p5 instance holds all the properties and methods related to a p5 sketch. It expects an incoming sketch closure and it can also take an optional node parameter for attaching the generated p5 canvas to a node. The sketch closure takes the newly created p5 instance as its sole argument and may optionally set preload(), setup(), and/or draw() properties on it for running a sketch.
-description__2 = A p5 sketch can run in "global" or "instance" mode: "global" - all properties and methods are attached to the window "instance" - all properties and methods are bound to this p5 object
-returns = P5: a p5 instance
-params__sketch = Function: a closure that can set optional preload(), setup(), and/or draw() properties on the given p5 instance
-params__node = HTMLElement: (Optional) element to attach canvas to
-describe__description__0 = Creates a screen reader accessible description for the canvas. The first parameter should be a string with a description of the canvas. The second parameter is optional. If specified, it determines how the description is displayed.
-describe__description__1 = describe(text, LABEL) displays the description to all users as a tombstone or exhibit label/caption in a div adjacent to the canvas. You can style it as you wish in your CSS.
-describe__description__2 = describe(text, FALLBACK) makes the description accessible to screen-reader users only, in a sub DOM inside the canvas element. If a second parameter is not specified, by default, the description will only be available to screen-reader users.
-describe__params__text = String: description of the canvas
-describe__params__display = Constant: (Optional) either LABEL or FALLBACK
-describeElement__description__0 = This function creates a screen-reader accessible description for elements —shapes or groups of shapes that create meaning together— in the canvas. The first paramater should be the name of the element. The second parameter should be a string with a description of the element. The third parameter is optional. If specified, it determines how the element description is displayed.
-describeElement__description__1 = describeElement(name, text, LABEL) displays the element description to all users as a tombstone or exhibit label/caption in a div adjacent to the canvas. You can style it as you wish in your CSS.
-describeElement__description__2 = describeElement(name, text, FALLBACK) makes the element description accessible to screen-reader users only, in a sub DOM inside the canvas element. If a second parameter is not specified, by default, the element description will only be available to screen-reader users.
-describeElement__params__name = String: name of the element
-describeElement__params__text = String: description of the element
-describeElement__params__display = Constant: (Optional) either LABEL or FALLBACK
-textOutput__description__0 = textOutput() creates a screenreader accessible output that describes the shapes present on the canvas. The general description of the canvas includes canvas size, canvas color, and number of elements in the canvas (example: 'Your output is a, 400 by 400 pixels, lavender blue canvas containing the following 4 shapes:'). This description is followed by a list of shapes where the color, position, and area of each shape are described (example: "orange ellipse at top left covering 1% of the canvas"). Each element can be selected to get more details. A table of elements is also provided. In this table, shape, color, location, coordinates and area are described (example: "orange ellipse location=top left area=2").
-textOutput__description__1 = textOutput() and textOutput(FALLBACK) make the output available in a sub DOM inside the canvas element which is accessible to screen readers. textOutput(LABEL) creates an additional div with the output adjacent to the canvas, this is useful for non-screen reader users that might want to display the output outside of the canvas' sub DOM as they code. However, using LABEL will create unnecessary redundancy for screen reader users. We recommend using LABEL only as part of the development process of a sketch and removing it before publishing or sharing with screen reader users.
-textOutput__params__display = Constant: (Optional) either FALLBACK or LABEL
-gridOutput__description__0 = gridOutput() lays out the content of the canvas in the form of a grid (html table) based on the spatial location of each shape. A brief description of the canvas is available before the table output. This description includes: color of the background, size of the canvas, number of objects, and object types (example: "lavender blue canvas is 200 by 200 and contains 4 objects - 3 ellipses 1 rectangle"). The grid describes the content spatially, each element is placed on a cell of the table depending on its position. Within each cell an element the color and type of shape of that element are available (example: "orange ellipse"). These descriptions can be selected individually to get more details. A list of elements where shape, color, location, and area are described (example: "orange ellipse location=top left area=1%") is also available.
-gridOutput__description__1 = gridOutput() and gridOutput(FALLBACK) make the output available in a sub DOM inside the canvas element which is accessible to screen readers. gridOutput(LABEL) creates an additional div with the output adjacent to the canvas, this is useful for non-screen reader users that might want to display the output outside of the canvas' sub DOM as they code. However, using LABEL will create unnecessary redundancy for screen reader users. We recommend using LABEL only as part of the development process of a sketch and removing it before publishing or sharing with screen reader users.
-gridOutput__params__display = Constant: (Optional) either FALLBACK or LABEL
-alpha__description__0 = Extracts the alpha value from a color or pixel array.
-alpha__returns = Number: the alpha value
-alpha__params__color = p5.Color|Number[]|String: p5.Color object, color components, or CSS color
-blue__description__0 = Extracts the blue value from a color or pixel array.
-blue__returns = Number: the blue value
-blue__params__color = p5.Color|Number[]|String: p5.Color object, color components, or CSS color
-brightness__description__0 = Extracts the HSB brightness value from a color or pixel array.
-brightness__returns = Number: the brightness value
-brightness__params__color = p5.Color|Number[]|String: p5.Color object, color components, or CSS color
-color__description__0 = Creates colors for storing in variables of the color datatype. The parameters are interpreted as RGB or HSB values depending on the current colorMode(). The default mode is RGB values from 0 to 255 and, therefore, the function call color(255, 204, 0) will return a bright yellow color.
-color__description__1 = Note that if only one value is provided to color(), it will be interpreted as a grayscale value. Add a second value, and it will be used for alpha transparency. When three values are specified, they are interpreted as either RGB or HSB values. Adding a fourth value applies alpha transparency.
-color__description__2 = If a single string argument is provided, RGB, RGBA and Hex CSS color strings and all named color strings are supported. In this case, an alpha number value as a second argument is not supported, the RGBA form should be used.
-color__returns = p5.Color: resulting color
-color__params__gray = Number: number specifying value between white and black.
-color__params__alpha = Number: (Optional) alpha value relative to current color range (default is 0-255)
-color__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value relative to the current color range
-color__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value relative to the current color range
-color__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value relative to the current color range
-color__params__value = String: a color string
-color__params__values = Number[]: an array containing the red,green,blue & and alpha components of the color
-color__params__color = p5.Color
-green__description__0 = Extracts the green value from a color or pixel array.
-green__returns = Number: the green value
-green__params__color = p5.Color|Number[]|String: p5.Color object, color components, or CSS color
-hue__description__0 = Extracts the hue value from a color or pixel array.
-hue__description__1 = Hue exists in both HSB and HSL. This function will return the HSB-normalized hue when supplied with an HSB color object (or when supplied with a pixel array while the color mode is HSB), but will default to the HSL-normalized hue otherwise. (The values will only be different if the maximum hue setting for each system is different.)
-hue__returns = Number: the hue
-hue__params__color = p5.Color|Number[]|String: p5.Color object, color components, or CSS color
-lerpColor__description__0 = Blends two colors to find a third color somewhere between them. The amt parameter is the amount to interpolate between the two values where 0.0 is equal to the first color, 0.1 is very near the first color, 0.5 is halfway in between, etc. An amount below 0 will be treated as 0. Likewise, amounts above 1 will be capped at 1. This is different from the behavior of lerp(), but necessary because otherwise numbers outside the range will produce strange and unexpected colors.
-lerpColor__description__1 = The way that colors are interpolated depends on the current color mode.
-lerpColor__returns = p5.Color: interpolated color
-lerpColor__params__c1 = p5.Color: interpolate from this color
-lerpColor__params__c2 = p5.Color: interpolate to this color
-lerpColor__params__amt = Number: number between 0 and 1
-lightness__description__0 = Extracts the HSL lightness value from a color or pixel array.
-lightness__returns = Number: the lightness
-lightness__params__color = p5.Color|Number[]|String: p5.Color object, color components, or CSS color
-red__description__0 = Extracts the red value from a color or pixel array.
-red__returns = Number: the red value
-red__params__color = p5.Color|Number[]|String: p5.Color object, color components, or CSS color
-saturation__description__0 = Extracts the saturation value from a color or pixel array.
-saturation__description__1 = Saturation is scaled differently in HSB and HSL. This function will return the HSB saturation when supplied with an HSB color object (or when supplied with a pixel array while the color mode is HSB), but will default to the HSL saturation otherwise.
-saturation__returns = Number: the saturation value
-saturation__params__color = p5.Color|Number[]|String: p5.Color object, color components, or CSS color
-background__description__0 = The background() function sets the color used for the background of the p5.js canvas. The default background is transparent. This function is typically used within draw() to clear the display window at the beginning of each frame, but it can be used inside setup() to set the background on the first frame of animation or if the background need only be set once.
-background__description__1 = The color is either specified in terms of the RGB, HSB, or HSL color depending on the current colorMode. (The default color space is RGB, with each value in the range from 0 to 255). The alpha range by default is also 0 to 255.
-background__description__2 = If a single string argument is provided, RGB, RGBA and Hex CSS color strings and all named color strings are supported. In this case, an alpha number value as a second argument is not supported, the RGBA form should be used.
-background__description__3 = A p5.Color object can also be provided to set the background color.
-background__description__4 = A p5.Image can also be provided to set the background image.
-background__params__color = p5.Color: any value created by the color() function
-background__params__colorstring = String: color string, possible formats include: integer rgb() or rgba(), percentage rgb() or rgba(), 3-digit hex, 6-digit hex
-background__params__a = Number: (Optional) opacity of the background relative to current color range (default is 0-255)
-background__params__gray = Number: specifies a value between white and black
-background__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value (depending on the current color mode)
-background__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value (depending on the current color mode)
-background__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value (depending on the current color mode)
-background__params__values = Number[]: an array containing the red, green, blue and alpha components of the color
-background__params__image = p5.Image: image created with loadImage() or createImage(), to set as background (must be same size as the sketch window)
-clear__description__0 = Clears the pixels within a buffer. This function only clears the canvas. It will not clear objects created by createX() methods such as createVideo() or createDiv(). Unlike the main graphics context, pixels in additional graphics areas created with createGraphics() can be entirely or partially transparent. This function clears everything to make all of the pixels 100% transparent.
-clear__description__1 = Note: In WebGL mode, this function can be passed normalized RGBA color values in order to clear the screen to a specific color. In addition to color, it will also clear the depth buffer. If you are not using the webGL renderer these color values will have no effect.
-clear__params__r = Number: normalized red val.
-clear__params__g = Number: normalized green val.
-clear__params__b = Number: normalized blue val.
-clear__params__a = Number: normalized alpha val.
-colorMode__description__0 = colorMode() changes the way p5.js interprets color data. By default, the parameters for fill(), stroke(), background(), and color() are defined by values between 0 and 255 using the RGB color model. This is equivalent to setting colorMode(RGB, 255). Setting colorMode(HSB) lets you use the HSB system instead. By default, this is colorMode(HSB, 360, 100, 100, 1). You can also use HSL.
-colorMode__description__1 = Note: existing color objects remember the mode that they were created in, so you can change modes as you like without affecting their appearance.
-colorMode__params__mode = Constant: either RGB, HSB or HSL, corresponding to Red/Green/Blue and Hue/Saturation/Brightness (or Lightness)
-colorMode__params__max = Number: (Optional) range for all values
-colorMode__params__max1 = Number: range for the red or hue depending on the current color mode
-colorMode__params__max2 = Number: range for the green or saturation depending on the current color mode
-colorMode__params__max3 = Number: range for the blue or brightness/lightness depending on the current color mode
-colorMode__params__maxA = Number: (Optional) range for the alpha
-fill__description__0 = Sets the color used to fill shapes. For example, if you run fill(204, 102, 0), all shapes drawn after the fill command will be filled with the color orange. This color is either specified in terms of the RGB or HSB color depending on the current colorMode(). (The default color space is RGB, with each value in the range from 0 to 255). The alpha range by default is also 0 to 255.
-fill__description__1 = If a single string argument is provided, RGB, RGBA and Hex CSS color strings and all named color strings are supported. In this case, an alpha number value as a second argument is not supported, the RGBA form should be used.
-fill__description__2 = A p5 Color object can also be provided to set the fill color.
-fill__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value relative to the current color range
-fill__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value relative to the current color range
-fill__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value relative to the current color range
-fill__params__alpha = Number (Optional)
-fill__params__value = String: a color string
-fill__params__gray = Number: a gray value
-fill__params__values = Number[]: an array containing the red,green,blue & and alpha components of the color
-fill__params__color = p5.Color: the fill color
-noFill__description__0 = Disables filling geometry. If both noStroke() and noFill() are called, nothing will be drawn to the screen.
-noStroke__description__0 = Disables drawing the stroke (outline). If both noStroke() and noFill() are called, nothing will be drawn to the screen.
-stroke__description__0 = Sets the color used to draw lines and borders around shapes. This color is either specified in terms of the RGB or HSB color depending on the current colorMode() (the default color space is RGB, with each value in the range from 0 to 255). The alpha range by default is also 0 to 255.
-stroke__description__1 = If a single string argument is provided, RGB, RGBA and Hex CSS color strings and all named color strings are supported. In this case, an alpha number value as a second argument is not supported, the RGBA form should be used.
-stroke__description__2 = A p5 Color object can also be provided to set the stroke color.
-stroke__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value relative to the current color range
-stroke__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value relative to the current color range
-stroke__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value relative to the current color range
-stroke__params__alpha = Number (Optional)
-stroke__params__value = String: a color string
-stroke__params__gray = Number: a gray value
-stroke__params__values = Number[]: an array containing the red,green,blue & and alpha components of the color
-stroke__params__color = p5.Color: the stroke color
-erase__description__0 = All drawing that follows erase() will subtract from the canvas.Erased areas will reveal the web page underneath the canvas.Erasing can be canceled with noErase().
-erase__description__1 = Drawing done with image() and background() in between erase() and noErase() will not erase the canvas but works as usual.
-erase__params__strengthFill = Number: (Optional) A number (0-255) for the strength of erasing for a shape's fill. This will default to 255 when no argument is given, which is full strength.
-erase__params__strengthStroke = Number: (Optional) A number (0-255) for the strength of erasing for a shape's stroke. This will default to 255 when no argument is given, which is full strength.
-noErase__description__0 = Ends erasing that was started with erase(). The fill(), stroke(), and blendMode() settings will return to what they were prior to calling erase().
-arc__description__0 = Draw an arc to the screen. If called with only x, y, w, h, start and stop, the arc will be drawn and filled as an open pie segment. If a mode parameter is provided, the arc will be filled like an open semi-circle (OPEN), a closed semi-circle (CHORD), or as a closed pie segment (PIE). The origin may be changed with the ellipseMode() function.
-arc__description__1 = The arc is always drawn clockwise from wherever start falls to wherever stop falls on the ellipse. Adding or subtracting TWO_PI to either angle does not change where they fall. If both start and stop fall at the same place, a full ellipse will be drawn. Be aware that the y-axis increases in the downward direction, therefore angles are measured clockwise from the positive x-direction ("3 o'clock").
-arc__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of the arc's ellipse
-arc__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of the arc's ellipse
-arc__params__w = Number: width of the arc's ellipse by default
-arc__params__h = Number: height of the arc's ellipse by default
-arc__params__start = Number: angle to start the arc, specified in radians
-arc__params__stop = Number: angle to stop the arc, specified in radians
-arc__params__mode = Constant: (Optional) optional parameter to determine the way of drawing the arc. either CHORD, PIE or OPEN
-arc__params__detail = Integer: (Optional) optional parameter for WebGL mode only. This is to specify the number of vertices that makes up the perimeter of the arc. Default value is 25. Won't draw a stroke for a detail of more than 50.
-ellipse__description__0 = Draws an ellipse (oval) to the screen. By default, the first two parameters set the location of the center of the ellipse, and the third and fourth parameters set the shape's width and height. If no height is specified, the value of width is used for both the width and height. If a negative height or width is specified, the absolute value is taken.
-ellipse__description__1 = An ellipse with equal width and height is a circle. The origin may be changed with the ellipseMode() function.
-ellipse__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of the center of ellipse.
-ellipse__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of the center of ellipse.
-ellipse__params__w = Number: width of the ellipse.
-ellipse__params__h = Number: (Optional) height of the ellipse.
-ellipse__params__detail = Integer: (Optional) optional parameter for WebGL mode only. This is to specify the number of vertices that makes up the perimeter of the ellipse. Default value is 25. Won't draw a stroke for a detail of more than 50.
-circle__description__0 = Draws a circle to the screen. A circle is a simple closed shape. It is the set of all points in a plane that are at a given distance from a given point, the centre. This function is a special case of the ellipse() function, where the width and height of the ellipse are the same. Height and width of the ellipse correspond to the diameter of the circle. By default, the first two parameters set the location of the centre of the circle, the third sets the diameter of the circle.
-circle__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of the centre of the circle.
-circle__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of the centre of the circle.
-circle__params__d = Number: diameter of the circle.
-line__description__0 = Draws a line (a direct path between two points) to the screen. If called with only 4 parameters, it will draw a line in 2D with a default width of 1 pixel. This width can be modified by using the strokeWeight() function. A line cannot be filled, therefore the fill() function will not affect the color of a line. So to color a line, use the stroke() function.
-line__params__x1 = Number: the x-coordinate of the first point
-line__params__y1 = Number: the y-coordinate of the first point
-line__params__x2 = Number: the x-coordinate of the second point
-line__params__y2 = Number: the y-coordinate of the second point
-line__params__z1 = Number: the z-coordinate of the first point
-line__params__z2 = Number: the z-coordinate of the second point
-point__description__0 = Draws a point, a coordinate in space at the dimension of one pixel. The first parameter is the horizontal value for the point, the second param is the vertical value for the point. The color of the point is changed with the stroke() function. The size of the point can be changed with the strokeWeight() function.
-point__params__x = Number: the x-coordinate
-point__params__y = Number: the y-coordinate
-point__params__z = Number: (Optional) the z-coordinate (for WebGL mode)
-point__params__coordinate_vector = p5.Vector: the coordinate vector
-quad__description__0 = Draws a quad on the canvas. A quad is a quadrilateral, a four sided polygon. It is similar to a rectangle, but the angles between its edges are not constrained to ninety degrees. The first pair of parameters (x1,y1) sets the first vertex and the subsequent pairs should proceed clockwise or counter-clockwise around the defined shape. z-arguments only work when quad() is used in WEBGL mode.
-quad__params__x1 = Number: the x-coordinate of the first point
-quad__params__y1 = Number: the y-coordinate of the first point
-quad__params__x2 = Number: the x-coordinate of the second point
-quad__params__y2 = Number: the y-coordinate of the second point
-quad__params__x3 = Number: the x-coordinate of the third point
-quad__params__y3 = Number: the y-coordinate of the third point
-quad__params__x4 = Number: the x-coordinate of the fourth point
-quad__params__y4 = Number: the y-coordinate of the fourth point
-quad__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) number of segments in the x-direction
-quad__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) number of segments in the y-direction
-quad__params__z1 = Number: the z-coordinate of the first point
-quad__params__z2 = Number: the z-coordinate of the second point
-quad__params__z3 = Number: the z-coordinate of the third point
-quad__params__z4 = Number: the z-coordinate of the fourth point
-rect__description__0 = Draws a rectangle on the canvas. A rectangle is a four-sided closed shape with every angle at ninety degrees. By default, the first two parameters set the location of the upper-left corner, the third sets the width, and the fourth sets the height. The way these parameters are interpreted, may be changed with the rectMode() function.
-rect__description__1 = The fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth parameters, if specified, determine corner radius for the top-left, top-right, lower-right and lower-left corners, respectively. An omitted corner radius parameter is set to the value of the previously specified radius value in the parameter list.
-rect__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of the rectangle.
-rect__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of the rectangle.
-rect__params__w = Number: width of the rectangle.
-rect__params__h = Number: (Optional) height of the rectangle.
-rect__params__tl = Number: (Optional) optional radius of top-left corner.
-rect__params__tr = Number: (Optional) optional radius of top-right corner.
-rect__params__br = Number: (Optional) optional radius of bottom-right corner.
-rect__params__bl = Number: (Optional) optional radius of bottom-left corner.
-rect__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) number of segments in the x-direction (for WebGL mode)
-rect__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) number of segments in the y-direction (for WebGL mode)
-square__description__0 = Draws a square to the screen. A square is a four-sided shape with every angle at ninety degrees, and equal side size. This function is a special case of the rect() function, where the width and height are the same, and the parameter is called "s" for side size. By default, the first two parameters set the location of the upper-left corner, the third sets the side size of the square. The way these parameters are interpreted, may be changed with the rectMode() function.
-square__description__1 = The fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh parameters, if specified, determine corner radius for the top-left, top-right, lower-right and lower-left corners, respectively. An omitted corner radius parameter is set to the value of the previously specified radius value in the parameter list.
-square__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of the square.
-square__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of the square.
-square__params__s = Number: side size of the square.
-square__params__tl = Number: (Optional) optional radius of top-left corner.
-square__params__tr = Number: (Optional) optional radius of top-right corner.
-square__params__br = Number: (Optional) optional radius of bottom-right corner.
-square__params__bl = Number: (Optional) optional radius of bottom-left corner.
-triangle__description__0 = Draws a triangle to the canvas. A triangle is a plane created by connecting three points. The first two arguments specify the first point, the middle two arguments specify the second point, and the last two arguments specify the third point.
-triangle__params__x1 = Number: x-coordinate of the first point
-triangle__params__y1 = Number: y-coordinate of the first point
-triangle__params__x2 = Number: x-coordinate of the second point
-triangle__params__y2 = Number: y-coordinate of the second point
-triangle__params__x3 = Number: x-coordinate of the third point
-triangle__params__y3 = Number: y-coordinate of the third point
-ellipseMode__description__0 = Modifies the location from which ellipses are drawn by changing the way in which parameters given to ellipse(), circle() and arc() are interpreted.
-ellipseMode__description__1 = The default mode is CENTER, in which the first two parameters are interpreted as the shape's center point's x and y coordinates respectively, while the third and fourth parameters are its width and height.
-ellipseMode__description__2 = ellipseMode(RADIUS) also uses the first two parameters as the shape's center point's x and y coordinates, but uses the third and fourth parameters to specify half of the shapes's width and height.
-ellipseMode__description__3 = ellipseMode(CORNER) interprets the first two parameters as the upper-left corner of the shape, while the third and fourth parameters are its width and height.
-ellipseMode__description__4 = ellipseMode(CORNERS) interprets the first two parameters as the location of one corner of the ellipse's bounding box, and the third and fourth parameters as the location of the opposite corner.
-ellipseMode__description__5 = The parameter to this method must be written in ALL CAPS because they are predefined as constants in ALL CAPS and Javascript is a case-sensitive language.
-ellipseMode__params__mode = Constant: either CENTER, RADIUS, CORNER, or CORNERS
-noSmooth__description__0 = Draws all geometry with jagged (aliased) edges. Note that smooth() is active by default in 2D mode, so it is necessary to call noSmooth() to disable smoothing of geometry, images, and fonts. In 3D mode, noSmooth() is enabled by default, so it is necessary to call smooth() if you would like smooth (antialiased) edges on your geometry.
-rectMode__description__0 = Modifies the location from which rectangles are drawn by changing the way in which parameters given to rect() are interpreted.
-rectMode__description__1 = The default mode is CORNER, which interprets the first two parameters as the upper-left corner of the shape, while the third and fourth parameters are its width and height.
-rectMode__description__2 = rectMode(CORNERS) interprets the first two parameters as the location of one of the corners, and the third and fourth parameters as the location of the diagonally opposite corner. Note, the rectangle is drawn between the coordinates, so it is not neccesary that the first corner be the upper left corner.
-rectMode__description__3 = rectMode(CENTER) interprets the first two parameters as the shape's center point, while the third and fourth parameters are its width and height.
-rectMode__description__4 = rectMode(RADIUS) also uses the first two parameters as the shape's center point, but uses the third and fourth parameters to specify half of the shape's width and height respectively.
-rectMode__description__5 = The parameter to this method must be written in ALL CAPS because they are predefined as constants in ALL CAPS and Javascript is a case-sensitive language.
-rectMode__params__mode = Constant: either CORNER, CORNERS, CENTER, or RADIUS
-smooth__description__0 = Draws all geometry with smooth (anti-aliased) edges. smooth() will also improve image quality of resized images. Note that smooth() is active by default in 2D mode; noSmooth() can be used to disable smoothing of geometry, images, and fonts. In 3D mode, noSmooth() is enabled by default, so it is necessary to call smooth() if you would like smooth (antialiased) edges on your geometry.
-strokeCap__description__0 = Sets the style for rendering line endings. These ends are either rounded, squared or extended, each of which specified with the corresponding parameters: ROUND, SQUARE and PROJECT. The default cap is ROUND.
-strokeCap__description__1 = The parameter to this method must be written in ALL CAPS because they are predefined as constants in ALL CAPS and Javascript is a case-sensitive language.
-strokeCap__params__cap = Constant: either ROUND, SQUARE or PROJECT
-strokeJoin__description__0 = Sets the style of the joints which connect line segments. These joints are either mitered, beveled or rounded and specified with the corresponding parameters MITER, BEVEL and ROUND. The default joint is MITER.
-strokeJoin__description__1 = The parameter to this method must be written in ALL CAPS because they are predefined as constants in ALL CAPS and Javascript is a case-sensitive language.
-strokeJoin__params__join = Constant: either MITER, BEVEL, ROUND
-strokeWeight__description__0 = Sets the width of the stroke used for lines, points and the border around shapes. All widths are set in units of pixels.
-strokeWeight__description__1 = Note that it is affected by any transformation or scaling that has been applied previously.
-strokeWeight__params__weight = Number: the weight of the stroke (in pixels)
-bezier__description__0 = Draws a cubic Bezier curve on the screen. These curves are defined by a series of anchor and control points. The first two parameters specify the first anchor point and the last two parameters specify the other anchor point, which become the first and last points on the curve. The middle parameters specify the two control points which define the shape of the curve. Approximately speaking, control points "pull" the curve towards them.
-bezier__description__1 = Bezier curves were developed by French automotive engineer Pierre Bezier, and are commonly used in computer graphics to define gently sloping curves. See also curve().
-bezier__params__x1 = Number: x-coordinate for the first anchor point
-bezier__params__y1 = Number: y-coordinate for the first anchor point
-bezier__params__x2 = Number: x-coordinate for the first control point
-bezier__params__y2 = Number: y-coordinate for the first control point
-bezier__params__x3 = Number: x-coordinate for the second control point
-bezier__params__y3 = Number: y-coordinate for the second control point
-bezier__params__x4 = Number: x-coordinate for the second anchor point
-bezier__params__y4 = Number: y-coordinate for the second anchor point
-bezier__params__z1 = Number: z-coordinate for the first anchor point
-bezier__params__z2 = Number: z-coordinate for the first control point
-bezier__params__z3 = Number: z-coordinate for the second control point
-bezier__params__z4 = Number: z-coordinate for the second anchor point
-bezierDetail__description__0 = Sets the resolution at which Bezier's curve is displayed. The default value is 20.
-bezierDetail__description__1 = Note, This function is only useful when using the WEBGL renderer as the default canvas renderer does not use this information.
-bezierDetail__params__detail = Number: resolution of the curves
-bezierPoint__description__0 = Given the x or y co-ordinate values of control and anchor points of a bezier curve, it evaluates the x or y coordinate of the bezier at position t. The parameters a and d are the x or y coordinates of first and last points on the curve while b and c are of the control points.The final parameter t is the position of the resultant point which is given between 0 and 1. This can be done once with the x coordinates and a second time with the y coordinates to get the location of a bezier curve at t.
-bezierPoint__returns = Number: the value of the Bezier at position t
-bezierPoint__params__a = Number: coordinate of first point on the curve
-bezierPoint__params__b = Number: coordinate of first control point
-bezierPoint__params__c = Number: coordinate of second control point
-bezierPoint__params__d = Number: coordinate of second point on the curve
-bezierPoint__params__t = Number: value between 0 and 1
-bezierTangent__description__0 = Evaluates the tangent to the Bezier at position t for points a, b, c, d. The parameters a and d are the first and last points on the curve, and b and c are the control points. The final parameter t varies between 0 and 1.
-bezierTangent__returns = Number: the tangent at position t
-bezierTangent__params__a = Number: coordinate of first point on the curve
-bezierTangent__params__b = Number: coordinate of first control point
-bezierTangent__params__c = Number: coordinate of second control point
-bezierTangent__params__d = Number: coordinate of second point on the curve
-bezierTangent__params__t = Number: value between 0 and 1
-curve__description__0 = Draws a curved line on the screen between two points, given as the middle four parameters. The first two parameters are a control point, as if the curve came from this point even though it's not drawn. The last two parameters similarly describe the other control point. Longer curves can be created by putting a series of curve() functions together or using curveVertex(). An additional function called curveTightness() provides control for the visual quality of the curve. The curve() function is an implementation of Catmull-Rom splines. -curve__params__x1 = Number: x-coordinate for the beginning control point -curve__params__y1 = Number: y-coordinate for the beginning control point -curve__params__x2 = Number: x-coordinate for the first point -curve__params__y2 = Number: y-coordinate for the first point -curve__params__x3 = Number: x-coordinate for the second point -curve__params__y3 = Number: y-coordinate for the second point -curve__params__x4 = Number: x-coordinate for the ending control point -curve__params__y4 = Number: y-coordinate for the ending control point -curve__params__z1 = Number: z-coordinate for the beginning control point -curve__params__z2 = Number: z-coordinate for the first point -curve__params__z3 = Number: z-coordinate for the second point -curve__params__z4 = Number: z-coordinate for the ending control point -curveDetail__description__0 = Sets the resolution at which curves display. The default value is 20 while the minimum value is 3. -curveDetail__description__1 = This function is only useful when using the WEBGL renderer as the default canvas renderer does not use this information. -curveDetail__params__resolution = Number: resolution of the curves -curveTightness__description__0 = Modifies the quality of forms created with curve() and curveVertex().The parameter tightness determines how the curve fits to the vertex points. The value 0.0 is the default value for tightness (this value defines the curves to be Catmull-Rom splines) and the value 1.0 connects all the points with straight lines. Values within the range -5.0 and 5.0 will deform the curves but will leave them recognizable and as values increase in magnitude, they will continue to deform. -curveTightness__params__amount = Number: amount of deformation from the original vertices -curvePoint__description__0 = Evaluates the curve at position t for points a, b, c, d. The parameter t varies between 0 and 1, a and d are control points of the curve, and b and c are the start and end points of the curve. This can be done once with the x coordinates and a second time with the y coordinates to get the location of a curve at t. -curvePoint__returns = Number: bezier value at position t -curvePoint__params__a = Number: coordinate of first control point of the curve -curvePoint__params__b = Number: coordinate of first point -curvePoint__params__c = Number: coordinate of second point -curvePoint__params__d = Number: coordinate of second control point -curvePoint__params__t = Number: value between 0 and 1 -curveTangent__description__0 = Evaluates the tangent to the curve at position t for points a, b, c, d. The parameter t varies between 0 and 1, a and d are points on the curve, and b and c are the control points. -curveTangent__returns = Number: the tangent at position t -curveTangent__params__a = Number: coordinate of first control point -curveTangent__params__b = Number: coordinate of first point on the curve -curveTangent__params__c = Number: coordinate of second point on the curve -curveTangent__params__d = Number: coordinate of second conrol point -curveTangent__params__t = Number: value between 0 and 1 -beginContour__description__0 = Use the beginContour() and endContour() functions to create negative shapes within shapes such as the center of the letter 'O'. beginContour() begins recording vertices for the shape and endContour() stops recording. The vertices that define a negative shape must "wind" in the opposite direction from the exterior shape. First draw vertices for the exterior clockwise order, then for internal shapes, draw vertices shape in counter-clockwise. -beginContour__description__1 = These functions can only be used within a beginShape()/endShape() pair and transformations such as translate(), rotate(), and scale() do not work within a beginContour()/endContour() pair. It is also not possible to use other shapes, such as ellipse() or rect() within. -beginShape__description__0 = Using the beginShape() and endShape() functions allow creating more complex forms. beginShape() begins recording vertices for a shape and endShape() stops recording. The value of the kind parameter tells it which types of shapes to create from the provided vertices. With no mode specified, the shape can be any irregular polygon. -beginShape__description__1 = The parameters available for beginShape() are: -beginShape__description__2 = POINTS Draw a series of points -beginShape__description__3 = LINES Draw a series of unconnected line segments (individual lines) -beginShape__description__4 = TRIANGLES Draw a series of separate triangles -beginShape__description__5 = TRIANGLE_FAN Draw a series of connected triangles sharing the first vertex in a fan-like fashion -beginShape__description__6 = TRIANGLE_STRIP Draw a series of connected triangles in strip fashion -beginShape__description__7 = QUADS Draw a series of separate quad -beginShape__description__8 = QUAD_STRIP Draw quad strip using adjacent edges to form the next quad -beginShape__description__9 = TESS (WebGl only) Handle irregular polygon for filling curve by explicit tessellation -beginShape__description__10 = After calling the beginShape() function, a series of vertex() commands must follow. To stop drawing the shape, call endShape(). Each shape will be outlined with the current stroke color and filled with the fill color. -beginShape__description__11 = Transformations such as translate(), rotate(), and scale() do not work within beginShape(). It is also not possible to use other shapes, such as ellipse() or rect() within beginShape(). -beginShape__params__kind = Constant: (Optional) either POINTS, LINES, TRIANGLES, TRIANGLE_FAN TRIANGLE_STRIP, QUADS, QUAD_STRIP or TESS -bezierVertex__description__0 = Specifies vertex coordinates for Bezier curves. Each call to bezierVertex() defines the position of two control points and one anchor point of a Bezier curve, adding a new segment to a line or shape. For WebGL mode bezierVertex() can be used in 2D as well as 3D mode. 2D mode expects 6 parameters, while 3D mode expects 9 parameters (including z coordinates). -bezierVertex__description__1 = The first time bezierVertex() is used within a beginShape() call, it must be prefaced with a call to vertex() to set the first anchor point. This function must be used between beginShape() and endShape() and only when there is no MODE or POINTS parameter specified to beginShape(). -bezierVertex__params__x2 = Number: x-coordinate for the first control point -bezierVertex__params__y2 = Number: y-coordinate for the first control point -bezierVertex__params__x3 = Number: x-coordinate for the second control point -bezierVertex__params__y3 = Number: y-coordinate for the second control point -bezierVertex__params__x4 = Number: x-coordinate for the anchor point -bezierVertex__params__y4 = Number: y-coordinate for the anchor point -bezierVertex__params__z2 = Number: z-coordinate for the first control point (for WebGL mode) -bezierVertex__params__z3 = Number: z-coordinate for the second control point (for WebGL mode) -bezierVertex__params__z4 = Number: z-coordinate for the anchor point (for WebGL mode) -curveVertex__description__0 = Specifies vertex coordinates for curves. This function may only be used between beginShape() and endShape() and only when there is no MODE parameter specified to beginShape(). For WebGL mode curveVertex() can be used in 2D as well as 3D mode. 2D mode expects 2 parameters, while 3D mode expects 3 parameters. -curveVertex__description__1 = The first and last points in a series of curveVertex() lines will be used to guide the beginning and end of the curve. A minimum of four points is required to draw a tiny curve between the second and third points. Adding a fifth point with curveVertex() will draw the curve between the second, third, and fourth points. The curveVertex() function is an implementation of Catmull-Rom splines. -curveVertex__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of the vertex -curveVertex__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of the vertex -curveVertex__params__z = Number: (Optional) z-coordinate of the vertex (for WebGL mode) -endContour__description__0 = Use the beginContour() and endContour() functions to create negative shapes within shapes such as the center of the letter 'O'. beginContour() begins recording vertices for the shape and endContour() stops recording. The vertices that define a negative shape must "wind" in the opposite direction from the exterior shape. First draw vertices for the exterior clockwise order, then for internal shapes, draw vertices shape in counter-clockwise. -endContour__description__1 = These functions can only be used within a beginShape()/endShape() pair and transformations such as translate(), rotate(), and scale() do not work within a beginContour()/endContour() pair. It is also not possible to use other shapes, such as ellipse() or rect() within. -endShape__description__0 = The endShape() function is the companion to beginShape() and may only be called after beginShape(). When endShape() is called, all of image data defined since the previous call to beginShape() is written into the image buffer. The constant CLOSE as the value for the MODE parameter to close the shape (to connect the beginning and the end). -endShape__params__mode = Constant: (Optional) use CLOSE to close the shape -quadraticVertex__description__0 = Specifies vertex coordinates for quadratic Bezier curves. Each call to quadraticVertex() defines the position of one control points and one anchor point of a Bezier curve, adding a new segment to a line or shape. The first time quadraticVertex() is used within a beginShape() call, it must be prefaced with a call to vertex() to set the first anchor point. For WebGL mode quadraticVertex() can be used in 2D as well as 3D mode. 2D mode expects 4 parameters, while 3D mode expects 6 parameters (including z coordinates). -quadraticVertex__description__1 = This function must be used between beginShape() and endShape() and only when there is no MODE or POINTS parameter specified to beginShape(). -quadraticVertex__params__cx = Number: x-coordinate for the control point -quadraticVertex__params__cy = Number: y-coordinate for the control point -quadraticVertex__params__x3 = Number: x-coordinate for the anchor point -quadraticVertex__params__y3 = Number: y-coordinate for the anchor point -quadraticVertex__params__cz = Number: z-coordinate for the control point (for WebGL mode) -quadraticVertex__params__z3 = Number: z-coordinate for the anchor point (for WebGL mode) -vertex__description__0 = All shapes are constructed by connecting a series of vertices. vertex() is used to specify the vertex coordinates for points, lines, triangles, quads, and polygons. It is used exclusively within the beginShape() and endShape() functions. -vertex__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of the vertex -vertex__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of the vertex -vertex__params__z = Number: z-coordinate of the vertex. Defaults to 0 if not specified. -vertex__params__u = Number: the vertex's texture u-coordinate -vertex__params__v = Number: the vertex's texture v-coordinate -normal__description__0 = Sets the 3d vertex normal to use for subsequent vertices drawn with vertex(). A normal is a vector that is generally nearly perpendicular to a shape's surface which controls how much light will be reflected from that part of the surface. -normal__params__vector = Vector: A p5.Vector representing the vertex normal. -normal__params__x = Number: The x component of the vertex normal. -normal__params__y = Number: The y component of the vertex normal. -normal__params__z = Number: The z component of the vertex normal. -VERSION__description__0 = Version of this p5.js. -P2D__description__0 = The default, two-dimensional renderer. -WEBGL__description__0 = One of the two render modes in p5.js: P2D (default renderer) and WEBGL Enables 3D render by introducing the third dimension: Z -HALF_PI__description__0 = HALF_PI is a mathematical constant with the value 1.57079632679489661923. It is half the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter. It is useful in combination with the trigonometric functions sin() and cos(). -PI__description__0 = PI is a mathematical constant with the value 3.14159265358979323846. It is the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter. It is useful in combination with the trigonometric functions sin() and cos(). -QUARTER_PI__description__0 = QUARTER_PI is a mathematical constant with the value 0.7853982. It is one quarter the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter. It is useful in combination with the trigonometric functions sin() and cos(). -TAU__description__0 = TAU is an alias for TWO_PI, a mathematical constant with the value 6.28318530717958647693. It is twice the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter. It is useful in combination with the trigonometric functions sin() and cos(). -TWO_PI__description__0 = TWO_PI is a mathematical constant with the value 6.28318530717958647693. It is twice the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter. It is useful in combination with the trigonometric functions sin() and cos(). -DEGREES__description__0 = Constant to be used with angleMode() function, to set the mode which p5.js interprets and calculates angles (either DEGREES or RADIANS). -RADIANS__description__0 = Constant to be used with angleMode() function, to set the mode which p5.js interprets and calculates angles (either RADIANS or DEGREES). -HSB__description__0 = HSB (hue, saturation, brightness) is a type of color model. You can learn more about it at HSB. -AUTO__description__0 = AUTO allows us to automatically set the width or height of an element (but not both), based on the current height and width of the element. Only one parameter can be passed to the size function as AUTO, at a time. -print__description__0 = The print() function writes to the console area of your browser. This function is often helpful for looking at the data a program is producing. This function creates a new line of text for each call to the function. Individual elements can be separated with quotes ("") and joined with the addition operator (+). -print__description__1 = Note that calling print() without any arguments invokes the window.print() function which opens the browser's print dialog. To print a blank line to console you can write print('\n'). -print__params__contents = Any: any combination of Number, String, Object, Boolean, Array to print -frameCount__description__0 = The system variable frameCount contains the number of frames that have been displayed since the program started. Inside setup() the value is 0, after the first iteration of draw it is 1, etc. -deltaTime__description__0 = The system variable deltaTime contains the time difference between the beginning of the previous frame and the beginning of the current frame in milliseconds. -deltaTime__description__1 = This variable is useful for creating time sensitive animation or physics calculation that should stay constant regardless of frame rate. -focused__description__0 = Confirms if the window a p5.js program is in is "focused," meaning that the sketch will accept mouse or keyboard input. This variable is "true" if the window is focused and "false" if not. -cursor__description__0 = Sets the cursor to a predefined symbol or an image, or makes it visible if already hidden. If you are trying to set an image as the cursor, the recommended size is 16×16 or 32×32 pixels. The values for parameters x and y must be less than the dimensions of the image. -cursor__params__type = String|Constant: Built-In: either ARROW, CROSS, HAND, MOVE, TEXT and WAIT Native CSS properties: 'grab', 'progress', 'cell' etc. External: path for cursor's images (Allowed File extensions: .cur, .gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .png) For more information on Native CSS cursors and url visit: https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/cursor -cursor__params__x = Number: (Optional) the horizontal active spot of the cursor (must be less than 32) -cursor__params__y = Number: (Optional) the vertical active spot of the cursor (must be less than 32) -frameRate__description__0 = Specifies the number of frames to be displayed every second. For example, the function call frameRate(30) will attempt to refresh 30 times a second. If the processor is not fast enough to maintain the specified rate, the frame rate will not be achieved. Setting the frame rate within setup() is recommended. The default frame rate is based on the frame rate of the display (here also called "refresh rate"), which is set to 60 frames per second on most computers. A frame rate of 24 frames per second (usual for movies) or above will be enough for smooth animations. This is the same as setFrameRate(val). -frameRate__description__1 = Calling frameRate() with no arguments returns the current framerate. The draw function must run at least once before it will return a value. This is the same as getFrameRate(). -frameRate__description__2 = Calling frameRate() with arguments that are not of the type numbers or are non positive also returns current framerate. -frameRate__params__fps = Number: number of frames to be displayed every second -noCursor__description__0 = Hides the cursor from view. -displayWidth__description__0 = System variable that stores the width of the screen display according to The default pixelDensity. This is used to run a full-screen program on any display size. To return actual screen size, multiply this by pixelDensity. -displayHeight__description__0 = System variable that stores the height of the screen display according to The default pixelDensity. This is used to run a full-screen program on any display size. To return actual screen size, multiply this by pixelDensity. -windowWidth__description__0 = System variable that stores the width of the inner window, it maps to window.innerWidth. -windowHeight__description__0 = System variable that stores the height of the inner window, it maps to window.innerHeight. -windowResized__description__0 = The windowResized() function is called once every time the browser window is resized. This is a good place to resize the canvas or do any other adjustments to accommodate the new window size. -windowResized__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional Event callback argument. -width__description__0 = System variable that stores the width of the drawing canvas. This value is set by the first parameter of the createCanvas() function. For example, the function call createCanvas(320, 240) sets the width variable to the value 320. The value of width defaults to 100 if createCanvas() is not used in a program. -height__description__0 = System variable that stores the height of the drawing canvas. This value is set by the second parameter of the createCanvas() function. For example, the function call createCanvas(320, 240) sets the height variable to the value 240. The value of height defaults to 100 if createCanvas() is not used in a program. -fullscreen__description__0 = If argument is given, sets the sketch to fullscreen or not based on the value of the argument. If no argument is given, returns the current fullscreen state. Note that due to browser restrictions this can only be called on user input, for example, on mouse press like the example below. -fullscreen__returns = Boolean: current fullscreen state -fullscreen__params__val = Boolean: (Optional) whether the sketch should be in fullscreen mode or not -pixelDensity__description__0 = Sets the pixel scaling for high pixel density displays. By default pixel density is set to match display density, call pixelDensity(1) to turn this off. Calling pixelDensity() with no arguments returns the current pixel density of the sketch. -pixelDensity__params__val = Number: whether or how much the sketch should scale -displayDensity__description__0 = Returns the pixel density of the current display the sketch is running on. -displayDensity__returns = Number: current pixel density of the display -getURL__description__0 = Gets the current URL. Note: when using the p5 Editor, this will return an empty object because the sketch is embedded in an iframe. It will work correctly if you view the sketch using the editor's present or share URLs. -getURL__returns = String: url -getURLPath__description__0 = Gets the current URL path as an array. Note: when using the p5 Editor, this will return an empty object because the sketch is embedded in an iframe. It will work correctly if you view the sketch using the editor's present or share URLs. -getURLPath__returns = String[]: path components -getURLParams__description__0 = Gets the current URL params as an Object. Note: when using the p5 Editor, this will return an empty object because the sketch is embedded in an iframe. It will work correctly if you view the sketch using the editor's present or share URLs. -getURLParams__returns = Object: URL params -preload__description__0 = Called directly before setup(), the preload() function is used to handle asynchronous loading of external files in a blocking way. If a preload function is defined, setup() will wait until any load calls within have finished. Nothing besides load calls (loadImage, loadJSON, loadFont, loadStrings, etc.) should be inside the preload function. If asynchronous loading is preferred, the load methods can instead be called in setup() or anywhere else with the use of a callback parameter. -preload__description__1 = By default the text "loading..." will be displayed. To make your own loading page, include an HTML element with id "p5_loading" in your page. More information here. -setup__description__0 = The setup() function is called once when the program starts. It's used to define initial environment properties such as screen size and background color and to load media such as images and fonts as the program starts. There can only be one setup() function for each program and it shouldn't be called again after its initial execution. -setup__description__1 = Note: Variables declared within setup() are not accessible within other functions, including draw(). -draw__description__0 = Called directly after setup(), the draw() function continuously executes the lines of code contained inside its block until the program is stopped or noLoop() is called. Note if noLoop() is called in setup(), draw() will still be executed once before stopping. draw() is called automatically and should never be called explicitly. -draw__description__1 = It should always be controlled with noLoop(), redraw() and loop(). After noLoop() stops the code in draw() from executing, redraw() causes the code inside draw() to execute once, and loop() will cause the code inside draw() to resume executing continuously. -draw__description__2 = The number of times draw() executes in each second may be controlled with the frameRate() function. -draw__description__3 = There can only be one draw() function for each sketch, and draw() must exist if you want the code to run continuously, or to process events such as mousePressed(). Sometimes, you might have an empty call to draw() in your program, as shown in the above example. -draw__description__4 = It is important to note that the drawing coordinate system will be reset at the beginning of each draw() call. If any transformations are performed within draw() (ex: scale, rotate, translate), their effects will be undone at the beginning of draw(), so transformations will not accumulate over time. On the other hand, styling applied (ex: fill, stroke, etc) will remain in effect. -remove__description__0 = Removes the entire p5 sketch. This will remove the canvas and any elements created by p5.js. It will also stop the draw loop and unbind any properties or methods from the window global scope. It will leave a variable p5 in case you wanted to create a new p5 sketch. If you like, you can set p5 = null to erase it. While all functions and variables and objects created by the p5 library will be removed, any other global variables created by your code will remain. -disableFriendlyErrors__description__0 = Turn off some features of the friendly error system (FES), which can give a significant boost to performance when needed. -disableFriendlyErrors__description__1 = Note that this will disable the parts of the FES that cause performance slowdown (like argument checking). Friendly errors that have no performance cost (like giving an descriptive error if a file load fails, or warning you if you try to override p5.js functions in the global space), will remain in place. -disableFriendlyErrors__description__2 = See disabling the friendly error system. -let__description__0 = Creates and names a new variable. A variable is a container for a value. -let__description__1 = Variables that are declared with let will have block-scope. This means that the variable only exists within the block that it is created within. -let__description__2 = From the MDN entry: Declares a block scope local variable, optionally initializing it to a value. -const__description__0 = Creates and names a new constant. Like a variable created with let, a constant that is created with const is a container for a value, however constants cannot be reassigned once they are declared. Although it is noteworthy that for non-primitive data types like objects & arrays, their elements can still be changeable. So if a variable is assigned an array, you can still add or remove elements from the array but cannot reassign another array to it. Also unlike
let, you cannot declare variables without value using const.
-const__description__1 = Constants have block-scope. This means that the constant only exists within the block that it is created within. A constant cannot be redeclared within a scope in which it already exists.
-const__description__2 = From the MDN entry: Declares a read-only named constant. Constants are block-scoped, much like variables defined using the 'let' statement. The value of a constant can't be changed through reassignment, and it can't be redeclared.
-===__description__0 = The strict equality operator === checks to see if two values are equal and of the same type.
-===__description__1 = A comparison expression always evaluates to a boolean.
-===__description__2 = From the MDN entry: The non-identity operator returns true if the operands are not equal and/or not of the same type.
-===__description__3 = Note: In some examples around the web you may see a double-equals-sign ==, used for comparison instead. This is the non-strict equality operator in Javascript. This will convert the two values being compared to the same type before comparing them.
->__description__0 = The greater than operator > evaluates to true if the left value is greater than the right value. There is more info on comparison operators on MDN.
->=__description__0 = The greater than or equal to operator >= evaluates to true if the left value is greater than or equal to the right value.
->=__description__1 = There is more info on comparison operators on MDN.
-<__description__0 = The less than operator < evaluates to true if the left value is less than the right value.
-<__description__1 = There is more info on comparison operators on MDN.
-<=__description__0 = The less than or equal to operator <= evaluates to true if the left value is less than or equal to the right value.
-<=__description__1 = There is more info on comparison operators on MDN.
-if-else__description__0 = The if-else statement helps control the flow of your code.
-if-else__description__1 = A condition is placed between the parenthesis following 'if', when that condition evalues to truthy, the code between the following curly braces is run. Alternatively, when the condition evaluates to falsy, the code between the curly braces of 'else' block is run instead. Writing an else block is optional.
-if-else__description__2 = From the MDN entry: The 'if' statement executes a statement if a specified condition is truthy. If the condition is falsy, another statement can be executed
-function__description__0 = Creates and names a function. A function is a set of statements that perform a task.
-function__description__1 = Optionally, functions can have parameters. Parameters are variables that are scoped to the function, that can be assigned a value when calling the function.Multiple parameters can be given by seperating them with commmas.
-function__description__2 = From the MDN entry: Declares a function with the specified parameters.
-return__description__0 = Specifies the value to be returned by a function. For more info checkout the MDN entry for return.
-boolean__description__0 = Converts a number or string to its boolean representation. For a number, any non-zero value (positive or negative) evaluates to true, while zero evaluates to false. For a string, the value "true" evaluates to true, while any other value evaluates to false. When an array of number or string values is passed in, then a array of booleans of the same length is returned.
-boolean__returns = Boolean: boolean representation of value
-boolean__params__n = String|Boolean|Number|Array: value to parse
-string__description__0 = A string is one of the 7 primitive data types in Javascript. A string is a series of text characters. In Javascript, a string value must be surrounded by either single-quotation marks(') or double-quotation marks(").
-string__description__1 = From the MDN entry: A string is a sequence of characters used to represent text.
-number__description__0 = A number is one of the 7 primitive data types in Javascript. A number can be a whole number or a decimal number.
-number__description__1 = The MDN entry for number
-object__description__0 = From MDN's object basics: An object is a collection of related data and/or functionality (which usually consists of several variables and functions — which are called properties and methods when they are inside objects.)
-class__description__0 = Creates and names a class which is a template for the creation of objects.
-class__description__1 = From the MDN entry: The class declaration creates a new Class with a given name using prototype-based inheritance.
-for__description__0 = for creates a loop that is useful for executing one section of code multiple times.
-for__description__1 = A 'for loop' consists of three different expressions inside of a parenthesis, all of which are optional.These expressions are used to control the number of times the loop is run.The first expression is a statement that is used to set the initial state for the loop.The second expression is a condition that you would like to check before each loop. If this expression returns false then the loop will exit.The third expression is executed at the end of each loop. These expression are separated by ; (semi-colon).In case of an empty expression, only a semi-colon is written.
-for__description__2 = The code inside of the loop body (in between the curly braces) is executed between the evaluation of the second and third expression.
-for__description__3 = As with any loop, it is important to ensure that the loop can 'exit', or that the test condition will eventually evaluate to false. The test condition with a for loop is the second expression detailed above. Ensuring that this expression can eventually become false ensures that your loop doesn't attempt to run an infinite amount of times, which can crash your browser.
-for__description__4 = From the MDN entry: Creates a loop that executes a specified statement until the test condition evaluates to false. The condition is evaluated after executing the statement, resulting in the specified statement executing at least once.
-while__description__0 = while creates a loop that is useful for executing one section of code multiple times.
-while__description__1 = With a 'while loop', the code inside of the loop body (between the curly braces) is run repeatedly until the test condition (inside of the parenthesis) evaluates to false. The condition is tested before executing the code body with while, so if the condition is initially false the loop body, or statement, will never execute.
-while__description__2 = As with any loop, it is important to ensure that the loop can 'exit', or that the test condition will eventually evaluate to false. This is to keep your loop from trying to run an infinite amount of times, which can crash your browser.
-while__description__3 = From the MDN entry: The while statement creates a loop that executes a specified statement as long as the test condition evaluates to true.The condition is evaluated before executing the statement.
-createCanvas__description__0 = Creates a canvas element in the document, and sets the dimensions of it in pixels. This method should be called only once at the start of setup. Calling createCanvas more than once in a sketch will result in very unpredictable behavior. If you want more than one drawing canvas you could use createGraphics (hidden by default but it can be shown).
-createCanvas__description__1 = Important note: in 2D mode (i.e. when p5.Renderer is not set) the origin (0,0) is positioned at the top left of the screen. In 3D mode (i.e. when p5.Renderer is set to WEBGL), the origin is positioned at the center of the canvas. See this issue for more information.
-createCanvas__description__2 = The system variables width and height are set by the parameters passed to this function. If createCanvas() is not used, the window will be given a default size of 100×100 pixels.
-createCanvas__description__3 = For more ways to position the canvas, see the positioning the canvas wiki page.
-createCanvas__returns = p5.Renderer:
-createCanvas__params__w = Number: width of the canvas
-createCanvas__params__h = Number: height of the canvas
-createCanvas__params__renderer = Constant: (Optional) either P2D or WEBGL
-resizeCanvas__description__0 = Resizes the canvas to given width and height. The canvas will be cleared and draw will be called immediately, allowing the sketch to re-render itself in the resized canvas.
-resizeCanvas__params__w = Number: width of the canvas
-resizeCanvas__params__h = Number: height of the canvas
-resizeCanvas__params__noRedraw = Boolean: (Optional) don't redraw the canvas immediately
-noCanvas__description__0 = Removes the default canvas for a p5 sketch that doesn't require a canvas
-createGraphics__description__0 = Creates and returns a new p5.Renderer object. Use this class if you need to draw into an off-screen graphics buffer. The two parameters define the width and height in pixels.
-createGraphics__returns = p5.Graphics: offscreen graphics buffer
-createGraphics__params__w = Number: width of the offscreen graphics buffer
-createGraphics__params__h = Number: height of the offscreen graphics buffer
-createGraphics__params__renderer = Constant: (Optional) either P2D or WEBGL undefined defaults to p2d
-blendMode__description__0 = Blends the pixels in the display window according to the defined mode. There is a choice of the following modes to blend the source pixels (A) with the ones of pixels already in the display window (B): BLEND- linear interpolation of colours: C = A*factor + B. This is the default blending mode.ADD- sum of A and BDARKEST- only the darkest colour succeeds: C = min(A*factor, B).LIGHTEST- only the lightest colour succeeds: C = max(A*factor, B).DIFFERENCE- subtract colors from underlying image.EXCLUSION- similar toDIFFERENCE, but less extreme.MULTIPLY- multiply the colors, result will always be darker.SCREEN- opposite multiply, uses inverse values of the colors.REPLACE- the pixels entirely replace the others and don't utilize alpha (transparency) values.REMOVE- removes pixels from B with the alpha strength of A.OVERLAY- mix ofMULTIPLYandSCREEN. Multiplies dark values, and screens light values. (2D)HARD_LIGHT-SCREENwhen greater than 50% gray,MULTIPLYwhen lower. (2D)SOFT_LIGHT- mix ofDARKESTandLIGHTEST. Works likeOVERLAY, but not as harsh. (2D)DODGE- lightens light tones and increases contrast, ignores darks. (2D)BURN- darker areas are applied, increasing contrast, ignores lights. (2D)SUBTRACT- remainder of A and B (3D)
drawingContext, as in the example shown. This is the equivalent of calling canvas.getContext('2d'); or canvas.getContext('webgl');. See this reference for the native canvas API for possible drawing functions you can call.
-noLoop__description__0 = Stops p5.js from continuously executing the code within draw(). If loop() is called, the code in draw() begins to run continuously again. If using noLoop() in setup(), it should be the last line inside the block.
-noLoop__description__1 = When noLoop() is used, it's not possible to manipulate or access the screen inside event handling functions such as mousePressed() or keyPressed(). Instead, use those functions to call redraw() or loop(), which will run draw(), which can update the screen properly. This means that when noLoop() has been called, no drawing can happen, and functions like saveFrames() or loadPixels() may not be used.
-noLoop__description__2 = Note that if the sketch is resized, redraw() will be called to update the sketch, even after noLoop() has been specified. Otherwise, the sketch would enter an odd state until loop() was called.
-noLoop__description__3 = Use isLooping() to check current state of loop().
-loop__description__0 = By default, p5.js loops through draw() continuously, executing the code within it. However, the draw() loop may be stopped by calling noLoop(). In that case, the draw() loop can be resumed with loop().
-loop__description__1 = Avoid calling loop() from inside setup().
-loop__description__2 = Use isLooping() to check current state of loop().
-isLooping__description__0 = By default, p5.js loops through draw() continuously, executing the code within it. If the sketch is stopped with noLoop() or resumed with loop(), isLooping() returns the current state for use within custom event handlers.
-push__description__0 = The push() function saves the current drawing style settings and transformations, while pop() restores these settings. Note that these functions are always used together. They allow you to change the style and transformation settings and later return to what you had. When a new state is started with push(), it builds on the current style and transform information. The push() and pop() functions can be embedded to provide more control. (See the second example for a demonstration.)
-push__description__1 = push() stores information related to the current transformation state and style settings controlled by the following functions: fill(), noFill(), noStroke(), stroke(), tint(), noTint(), strokeWeight(), strokeCap(), strokeJoin(), imageMode(), rectMode(), ellipseMode(), colorMode(), textAlign(), textFont(), textSize(), textLeading(), applyMatrix(), resetMatrix(), rotate(), scale(), shearX(), shearY(), translate(), noiseSeed().
-push__description__2 = In WEBGL mode additional style settings are stored. These are controlled by the following functions: setCamera(), ambientLight(), directionalLight(), pointLight(), texture(), specularMaterial(), shininess(), normalMaterial() and shader().
-pop__description__0 = The push() function saves the current drawing style settings and transformations, while pop() restores these settings. Note that these functions are always used together. They allow you to change the style and transformation settings and later return to what you had. When a new state is started with push(), it builds on the current style and transform information. The push() and pop() functions can be embedded to provide more control. (See the second example for a demonstration.)
-pop__description__1 = push() stores information related to the current transformation state and style settings controlled by the following functions: fill(), noFill(), noStroke(), stroke(), tint(), noTint(), strokeWeight(), strokeCap(), strokeJoin(), imageMode(), rectMode(), ellipseMode(), colorMode(), textAlign(), textFont(), textSize(), textLeading(), applyMatrix(), resetMatrix(), rotate(), scale(), shearX(), shearY(), translate(), noiseSeed().
-pop__description__2 = In WEBGL mode additional style settings are stored. These are controlled by the following functions: setCamera(), ambientLight(), directionalLight(), pointLight(), texture(), specularMaterial(), shininess(), normalMaterial() and shader().
-redraw__description__0 = Executes the code within draw() one time. This function allows the program to update the display window only when necessary, for example when an event registered by mousePressed() or keyPressed() occurs.
-redraw__description__1 = In structuring a program, it only makes sense to call redraw() within events such as mousePressed(). This is because redraw() does not run draw() immediately (it only sets a flag that indicates an update is needed).
-redraw__description__2 = The redraw() function does not work properly when called inside draw().To enable/disable animations, use loop() and noLoop().
-redraw__description__3 = In addition you can set the number of redraws per method call. Just add an integer as single parameter for the number of redraws.
-redraw__params__n = Integer: (Optional) Redraw for n-times. The default value is 1.
-p5__description__0 = The p5() constructor enables you to activate "instance mode" instead of normal "global mode". This is an advanced topic. A short description and example is included below. Please see Dan Shiffman's Coding Train video tutorial or this tutorial page for more info.
-p5__description__1 = By default, all p5.js functions are in the global namespace (i.e. bound to the window object), meaning you can call them simply ellipse(), fill(), etc. However, this might be inconvenient if you are mixing with other JS libraries (synchronously or asynchronously) or writing long programs of your own. p5.js currently supports a way around this problem called "instance mode". In instance mode, all p5 functions are bound up in a single variable instead of polluting your global namespace.
-p5__description__2 = Optionally, you can specify a default container for the canvas and any other elements to append to with a second argument. You can give the ID of an element in your html, or an html node itself.
-p5__description__3 = Note that creating instances like this also allows you to have more than one p5 sketch on a single web page, as they will each be wrapped up with their own set up variables. Of course, you could also use iframes to have multiple sketches in global mode.
-p5__params__sketch = Object: a function containing a p5.js sketch
-p5__params__node = String|Object: ID or pointer to HTML DOM node to contain sketch in
-applyMatrix__description__0 = Multiplies the current matrix by the one specified through the parameters. This is a powerful operation that can perform the equivalent of translate, scale, shear and rotate all at once. You can learn more about transformation matrices on Wikipedia.
-applyMatrix__description__1 = The naming of the arguments here follows the naming of the WHATWG specification and corresponds to a transformation matrix of the form: -applyMatrix__description__2 =-applyMatrix__params__a = Number|Array: numbers which define the 2×3 matrix to be multiplied, or an array of numbers -applyMatrix__params__b = Number: numbers which define the 2×3 matrix to be multiplied -applyMatrix__params__c = Number: numbers which define the 2×3 matrix to be multiplied -applyMatrix__params__d = Number: numbers which define the 2×3 matrix to be multiplied -applyMatrix__params__e = Number: numbers which define the 2×3 matrix to be multiplied -applyMatrix__params__f = Number: numbers which define the 2×3 matrix to be multiplied -resetMatrix__description__0 = Replaces the current matrix with the identity matrix. -rotate__description__0 = Rotates a shape by the amount specified by the angle parameter. This function accounts for angleMode, so angles can be entered in either RADIANS or DEGREES. -rotate__description__1 = Objects are always rotated around their relative position to the origin and positive numbers rotate objects in a clockwise direction. Transformations apply to everything that happens after and subsequent calls to the function accumulates the effect. For example, calling rotate(HALF_PI) and then rotate(HALF_PI) is the same as rotate(PI). All transformations are reset when draw() begins again. -rotate__description__2 = Technically, rotate() multiplies the current transformation matrix by a rotation matrix. This function can be further controlled by the push() and pop(). -rotate__params__angle = Number: the angle of rotation, specified in radians or degrees, depending on current angleMode -rotate__params__axis = p5.Vector|Number[]: (Optional) (in 3d) the axis to rotate around -rotateX__description__0 = Rotates a shape around X axis by the amount specified in angle parameter. The angles can be entered in either RADIANS or DEGREES. -rotateX__description__1 = Objects are always rotated around their relative position to the origin and positive numbers rotate objects in a clockwise direction. All transformations are reset when draw() begins again. -rotateX__params__angle = Number: the angle of rotation, specified in radians or degrees, depending on current angleMode -rotateY__description__0 = Rotates a shape around Y axis by the amount specified in angle parameter. The angles can be entered in either RADIANS or DEGREES. -rotateY__description__1 = Objects are always rotated around their relative position to the origin and positive numbers rotate objects in a clockwise direction. All transformations are reset when draw() begins again. -rotateY__params__angle = Number: the angle of rotation, specified in radians or degrees, depending on current angleMode -rotateZ__description__0 = Rotates a shape around Z axis by the amount specified in angle parameter. The angles can be entered in either RADIANS or DEGREES. -rotateZ__description__1 = This method works in WEBGL mode only. -rotateZ__description__2 = Objects are always rotated around their relative position to the origin and positive numbers rotate objects in a clockwise direction. All transformations are reset when draw() begins again. -rotateZ__params__angle = Number: the angle of rotation, specified in radians or degrees, depending on current angleMode -scale__description__0 = Increases or decreases the size of a shape by expanding or contracting vertices. Objects always scale from their relative origin to the coordinate system. Scale values are specified as decimal percentages. For example, the function call scale(2.0) increases the dimension of a shape by 200%. -scale__description__1 = Transformations apply to everything that happens after and subsequent calls to the function multiply the effect. For example, calling scale(2.0) and then scale(1.5) is the same as scale(3.0). If scale() is called within draw(), the transformation is reset when the loop begins again. -scale__description__2 = Using this function with the z parameter is only available in WEBGL mode. This function can be further controlled with push() and pop(). -scale__params__s = Number|p5.Vector|Number[]: percent to scale the object, or percentage to scale the object in the x-axis if multiple arguments are given -scale__params__y = Number: (Optional) percent to scale the object in the y-axis -scale__params__z = Number: (Optional) percent to scale the object in the z-axis (webgl only) -scale__params__scales = p5.Vector|Number[]: per-axis percents to scale the object -shearX__description__0 = Shears a shape around the x-axis by the amount specified by the angle parameter. Angles should be specified in the current angleMode. Objects are always sheared around their relative position to the origin and positive numbers shear objects in a clockwise direction. -shearX__description__1 = Transformations apply to everything that happens after and subsequent calls to the function accumulates the effect. For example, calling shearX(PI/2) and then shearX(PI/2) is the same as shearX(PI). If shearX() is called within the draw(), the transformation is reset when the loop begins again. -shearX__description__2 = Technically, shearX() multiplies the current transformation matrix by a rotation matrix. This function can be further controlled by the push() and pop() functions. -shearX__params__angle = Number: angle of shear specified in radians or degrees, depending on current angleMode -shearY__description__0 = Shears a shape around the y-axis the amount specified by the angle parameter. Angles should be specified in the current angleMode. Objects are always sheared around their relative position to the origin and positive numbers shear objects in a clockwise direction. -shearY__description__1 = Transformations apply to everything that happens after and subsequent calls to the function accumulates the effect. For example, calling shearY(PI/2) and then shearY(PI/2) is the same as shearY(PI). If shearY() is called within the draw(), the transformation is reset when the loop begins again. -shearY__description__2 = Technically, shearY() multiplies the current transformation matrix by a rotation matrix. This function can be further controlled by the push() and pop() functions. -shearY__params__angle = Number: angle of shear specified in radians or degrees, depending on current angleMode -translate__description__0 = Specifies an amount to displace objects within the display window. The x parameter specifies left/right translation, the y parameter specifies up/down translation. -translate__description__1 = Transformations are cumulative and apply to everything that happens after and subsequent calls to the function accumulates the effect. For example, calling translate(50, 0) and then translate(20, 0) is the same as translate(70, 0). If translate() is called within draw(), the transformation is reset when the loop begins again. This function can be further controlled by using push() and pop(). -translate__params__x = Number: left/right translation -translate__params__y = Number: up/down translation -translate__params__z = Number: (Optional) forward/backward translation (webgl only) -translate__params__vector = p5.Vector: the vector to translate by -storeItem__description__0 = Stores a value in local storage under the key name. Local storage is saved in the browser and persists between browsing sessions and page reloads. The key can be the name of the variable but doesn't have to be. To retrieve stored items see getItem. Sensitive data such as passwords or personal information should not be stored in local storage. -storeItem__params__key = String -storeItem__params__value = String|Number|Object|Boolean|p5.Color|p5.Vector -getItem__description__0 = Returns the value of an item that was stored in local storage using storeItem() -getItem__returns = Number|Object|String|Boolean|p5.Color|p5.Vector: Value of stored item -getItem__params__key = String: name that you wish to use to store in local storage -clearStorage__description__0 = Clears all local storage items set with storeItem() for the current domain. -removeItem__description__0 = Removes an item that was stored with storeItem() -removeItem__params__key = String -createStringDict__description__0 = Creates a new instance of p5.StringDict using the key-value pair or the object you provide. -createStringDict__returns = p5.StringDict: -createStringDict__params__key = String -createStringDict__params__value = String -createStringDict__params__object = Object: object -createNumberDict__description__0 = Creates a new instance of p5.NumberDict using the key-value pair or object you provide. -createNumberDict__returns = p5.NumberDict: -createNumberDict__params__key = Number -createNumberDict__params__value = Number -createNumberDict__params__object = Object: object -select__description__0 = Searches the page for the first element that matches the given CSS selector string (can be an ID, class, tag name or a combination) and returns it as a p5.Element. The DOM node itself can be accessed with .elt. Returns null if none found. You can also specify a container to search within. -select__returns = p5.Element|null: p5.Element containing node found -select__params__selectors = String: CSS selector string of element to search for -select__params__container = String|p5.Element|HTMLElement: (Optional) CSS selector string, p5.Element, or HTML element to search within -selectAll__description__0 = Searches the page for elements that match the given CSS selector string (can be an ID a class, tag name or a combination) and returns them as p5.Elements in an array. The DOM node itself can be accessed with .elt. Returns an empty array if none found. You can also specify a container to search within. -selectAll__returns = p5.Element[]: Array of p5.Elements containing nodes found -selectAll__params__selectors = String: CSS selector string of elements to search for -selectAll__params__container = String|p5.Element|HTMLElement: (Optional) CSS selector string, p5.Element , or HTML element to search within -removeElements__description__0 = Removes all elements created by p5, except any canvas / graphics elements created by createCanvas or createGraphics. Event handlers are removed, and element is removed from the DOM. -changed__description__0 = The .changed() function is called when the value of an element changes. This can be used to attach an element specific event listener. -changed__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when the value of an element changes. if
false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-input__description__0 = The .input() function is called when any user input is detected with an element. The input event is often used to detect keystrokes in a input element, or changes on a slider element. This can be used to attach an element specific event listener.
-input__params__fxn = Function|Boolean: function to be fired when any user input is detected within the element. if false is passed instead, the previously firing function will no longer fire.
-createDiv__description__0 = Creates a <div></div> element in the DOM with given inner HTML.
-createDiv__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createDiv__params__html = String: (Optional) inner HTML for element created
-createP__description__0 = Creates a <p></p> element in the DOM with given inner HTML. Used for paragraph length text.
-createP__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createP__params__html = String: (Optional) inner HTML for element created
-createSpan__description__0 = Creates a <span></span> element in the DOM with given inner HTML.
-createSpan__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createSpan__params__html = String: (Optional) inner HTML for element created
-createImg__description__0 = Creates an <img> element in the DOM with given src and alternate text.
-createImg__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createImg__params__src = String: src path or url for image
-createImg__params__alt = String: alternate text to be used if image does not load. You can use also an empty string ("") if that an image is not intended to be viewed.
-createImg__params__crossOrigin = String: crossOrigin property of the img element; use either 'anonymous' or 'use-credentials' to retrieve the image with cross-origin access (for later use with canvas. if an empty string("") is passed, CORS is not used
-createImg__params__successCallback = Function: (Optional) callback to be called once image data is loaded with the p5.Element as argument
-createA__description__0 = Creates an <a></a> element in the DOM for including a hyperlink.
-createA__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createA__params__href = String: url of page to link to
-createA__params__html = String: inner html of link element to display
-createA__params__target = String: (Optional) target where new link should open, could be _blank, _self, _parent, _top.
-createSlider__description__0 = Creates a slider <input></input> element in the DOM. Use .size() to set the display length of the slider.
-createSlider__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createSlider__params__min = Number: minimum value of the slider
-createSlider__params__max = Number: maximum value of the slider
-createSlider__params__value = Number: (Optional) default value of the slider
-createSlider__params__step = Number: (Optional) step size for each tick of the slider (if step is set to 0, the slider will move continuously from the minimum to the maximum value)
-createButton__description__0 = Creates a <button></button> element in the DOM. Use .size() to set the display size of the button. Use .mousePressed() to specify behavior on press.
-createButton__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createButton__params__label = String: label displayed on the button
-createButton__params__value = String: (Optional) value of the button
-createCheckbox__description__0 = Creates a checkbox <input></input> element in the DOM. Calling .checked() on a checkbox returns if it is checked or not
-createCheckbox__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createCheckbox__params__label = String: (Optional) label displayed after checkbox
-createCheckbox__params__value = Boolean: (Optional) value of the checkbox; checked is true, unchecked is false
-createSelect__description__0 = Creates a dropdown menu <select></select> element in the DOM. It also helps to assign select-box methods to p5.Element when selecting existing select box. .option(name, [value])can be used to set options for the select after it is created..value()will return the currently selected option..selected()will return current dropdown element which is an instance of p5.Element.selected(value)can be used to make given option selected by default when the page first loads..disable()marks whole of dropdown element as disabled..disable(value)marks given option as disabled
.option(value, [label])can be used to create a new option for the element. If an option with a value already exists, it will be returned. It is recommended to use string values as input forvalue. Optionally, a label can be provided as second argument for the option..remove(value)can be used to remove an option for the element. String values recommended as input forvalue..value()method will return the currently selected value..selected()method will return the currently selected input element..selected(value)method will select the option and return it. String values recommended as input forvalue..disable(Boolean)method will enable/disable the whole radio button element.
<input></input> element in the DOM for text input. Use .size() to set the display length of the box.
-createInput__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createInput__params__value = String: default value of the input box
-createInput__params__type = String: (Optional) type of text, ie text, password etc. Defaults to text. Needs a value to be specified first.
-createFileInput__description__0 = Creates an <input></input> element in the DOM of type 'file'. This allows users to select local files for use in a sketch.
-createFileInput__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created DOM element
-createFileInput__params__callback = Function: callback function for when a file is loaded
-createFileInput__params__multiple = Boolean: (Optional) optional, to allow multiple files to be selected
-createVideo__description__0 = Creates an HTML5 <video> element in the DOM for simple playback of audio/video. Shown by default, can be hidden with .hide() and drawn into canvas using image(). The first parameter can be either a single string path to a video file, or an array of string paths to different formats of the same video. This is useful for ensuring that your video can play across different browsers, as each supports different formats. See this page for further information about supported formats.
-createVideo__returns = p5.MediaElement: pointer to video p5.MediaElement
-createVideo__params__src = String|String[]: path to a video file, or array of paths for supporting different browsers
-createVideo__params__callback = Function: (Optional) callback function to be called upon 'canplaythrough' event fire, that is, when the browser can play the media, and estimates that enough data has been loaded to play the media up to its end without having to stop for further buffering of content
-createAudio__description__0 = Creates a hidden HTML5 <audio> element in the DOM for simple audio playback. The first parameter can be either a single string path to a audio file, or an array of string paths to different formats of the same audio. This is useful for ensuring that your audio can play across different browsers, as each supports different formats. See this page for further information about supported formats.
-createAudio__returns = p5.MediaElement: pointer to audio p5.MediaElement
-createAudio__params__src = String|String[]: (Optional) path to an audio file, or array of paths for supporting different browsers
-createAudio__params__callback = Function: (Optional) callback function to be called upon 'canplaythrough' event fire, that is, when the browser can play the media, and estimates that enough data has been loaded to play the media up to its end without having to stop for further buffering of content
-createCapture__description__0 = Creates a new HTML5 <video> element that contains the audio/video feed from a webcam. The element is separate from the canvas and is displayed by default. The element can be hidden using .hide(). The feed can be drawn onto the canvas using image(). The loadedmetadata property can be used to detect when the element has fully loaded (see second example).
-createCapture__description__1 = More specific properties of the feed can be passing in a Constraints object. See the W3C spec for possible properties. Note that not all of these are supported by all browsers.
-createCapture__description__2 = Security note: A new browser security specification requires that getUserMedia, which is behind createCapture(), only works when you're running the code locally, or on HTTPS. Learn more here and here.
-createCapture__returns = p5.Element: capture video p5.Element
-createCapture__params__type = String|Constant|Object: type of capture, either VIDEO or AUDIO if none specified, default both, or a Constraints object
-createCapture__params__callback = Function: (Optional) function to be called once stream has loaded
-createElement__description__0 = Creates element with given tag in the DOM with given content.
-createElement__returns = p5.Element: pointer to p5.Element holding created node
-createElement__params__tag = String: tag for the new element
-createElement__params__content = String: (Optional) html content to be inserted into the element
-deviceOrientation__description__0 = The system variable deviceOrientation always contains the orientation of the device. The value of this variable will either be set 'landscape' or 'portrait'. If no data is available it will be set to 'undefined'. either LANDSCAPE or PORTRAIT.
-accelerationX__description__0 = The system variable accelerationX always contains the acceleration of the device along the x axis. Value is represented as meters per second squared.
-accelerationY__description__0 = The system variable accelerationY always contains the acceleration of the device along the y axis. Value is represented as meters per second squared.
-accelerationZ__description__0 = The system variable accelerationZ always contains the acceleration of the device along the z axis. Value is represented as meters per second squared.
-pAccelerationX__description__0 = The system variable pAccelerationX always contains the acceleration of the device along the x axis in the frame previous to the current frame. Value is represented as meters per second squared.
-pAccelerationY__description__0 = The system variable pAccelerationY always contains the acceleration of the device along the y axis in the frame previous to the current frame. Value is represented as meters per second squared.
-pAccelerationZ__description__0 = The system variable pAccelerationZ always contains the acceleration of the device along the z axis in the frame previous to the current frame. Value is represented as meters per second squared.
-rotationX__description__0 = The system variable rotationX always contains the rotation of the device along the x axis. If the sketch angleMode() is set to DEGREES, the value will be -180 to 180. If it is set to RADIANS, the value will be -PI to PI.
-rotationX__description__1 = Note: The order the rotations are called is important, ie. if used together, it must be called in the order Z-X-Y or there might be unexpected behaviour.
-rotationY__description__0 = The system variable rotationY always contains the rotation of the device along the y axis. If the sketch angleMode() is set to DEGREES, the value will be -90 to 90. If it is set to RADIANS, the value will be -PI/2 to PI/2.
-rotationY__description__1 = Note: The order the rotations are called is important, ie. if used together, it must be called in the order Z-X-Y or there might be unexpected behaviour.
-rotationZ__description__0 = The system variable rotationZ always contains the rotation of the device along the z axis. If the sketch angleMode() is set to DEGREES, the value will be 0 to 360. If it is set to RADIANS, the value will be 0 to 2*PI.
-rotationZ__description__1 = Unlike rotationX and rotationY, this variable is available for devices with a built-in compass only.
-rotationZ__description__2 = Note: The order the rotations are called is important, ie. if used together, it must be called in the order Z-X-Y or there might be unexpected behaviour.
-pRotationX__description__0 = The system variable pRotationX always contains the rotation of the device along the x axis in the frame previous to the current frame. If the sketch angleMode() is set to DEGREES, the value will be -180 to 180. If it is set to RADIANS, the value will be -PI to PI.
-pRotationX__description__1 = pRotationX can also be used with rotationX to determine the rotate direction of the device along the X-axis.
-pRotationY__description__0 = The system variable pRotationY always contains the rotation of the device along the y axis in the frame previous to the current frame. If the sketch angleMode() is set to DEGREES, the value will be -90 to 90. If it is set to RADIANS, the value will be -PI/2 to PI/2.
-pRotationY__description__1 = pRotationY can also be used with rotationY to determine the rotate direction of the device along the Y-axis.
-pRotationZ__description__0 = The system variable pRotationZ always contains the rotation of the device along the z axis in the frame previous to the current frame. If the sketch angleMode() is set to DEGREES, the value will be 0 to 360. If it is set to RADIANS, the value will be 0 to 2*PI.
-pRotationZ__description__1 = pRotationZ can also be used with rotationZ to determine the rotate direction of the device along the Z-axis.
-turnAxis__description__0 = When a device is rotated, the axis that triggers the deviceTurned() method is stored in the turnAxis variable. The turnAxis variable is only defined within the scope of deviceTurned().
-setMoveThreshold__description__0 = The setMoveThreshold() function is used to set the movement threshold for the deviceMoved() function. The default threshold is set to 0.5.
-setMoveThreshold__params__value = Number: The threshold value
-setShakeThreshold__description__0 = The setShakeThreshold() function is used to set the movement threshold for the deviceShaken() function. The default threshold is set to 30.
-setShakeThreshold__params__value = Number: The threshold value
-deviceMoved__description__0 = The deviceMoved() function is called when the device is moved by more than the threshold value along X, Y or Z axis. The default threshold is set to 0.5. The threshold value can be changed using setMoveThreshold().
-deviceTurned__description__0 = The deviceTurned() function is called when the device rotates by more than 90 degrees continuously.
-deviceTurned__description__1 = The axis that triggers the deviceTurned() method is stored in the turnAxis variable. The deviceTurned() method can be locked to trigger on any axis: X, Y or Z by comparing the turnAxis variable to 'X', 'Y' or 'Z'.
-deviceShaken__description__0 = The deviceShaken() function is called when the device total acceleration changes of accelerationX and accelerationY values is more than the threshold value. The default threshold is set to 30. The threshold value can be changed using setShakeThreshold().
-keyIsPressed__description__0 = The boolean system variable keyIsPressed is true if any key is pressed and false if no keys are pressed.
-key__description__0 = The system variable key always contains the value of the most recent key on the keyboard that was typed. To get the proper capitalization, it is best to use it within keyTyped(). For non-ASCII keys, use the keyCode variable.
-keyCode__description__0 = The variable keyCode is used to detect special keys such as BACKSPACE, DELETE, ENTER, RETURN, TAB, ESCAPE, SHIFT, CONTROL, OPTION, ALT, UP_ARROW, DOWN_ARROW, LEFT_ARROW, RIGHT_ARROW. You can also check for custom keys by looking up the keyCode of any key on a site like this: keycode.info.
-keyPressed__description__0 = The keyPressed() function is called once every time a key is pressed. The keyCode for the key that was pressed is stored in the keyCode variable.
-keyPressed__description__1 = For non-ASCII keys, use the keyCode variable. You can check if the keyCode equals BACKSPACE, DELETE, ENTER, RETURN, TAB, ESCAPE, SHIFT, CONTROL, OPTION, ALT, UP_ARROW, DOWN_ARROW, LEFT_ARROW, RIGHT_ARROW.
-keyPressed__description__2 = For ASCII keys, the key that was pressed is stored in the key variable. However, it does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. For this reason, it is recommended to use keyTyped() to read the key variable, in which the case of the variable will be distinguished.
-keyPressed__description__3 = Because of how operating systems handle key repeats, holding down a key may cause multiple calls to keyTyped() (and keyReleased() as well). The rate of repeat is set by the operating system and how each computer is configured. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various key events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-keyPressed__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional KeyboardEvent callback argument.
-keyReleased__description__0 = The keyReleased() function is called once every time a key is released. See key and keyCode for more information. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various key events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-keyReleased__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional KeyboardEvent callback argument.
-keyTyped__description__0 = The keyTyped() function is called once every time a key is pressed, but action keys such as Backspace, Delete, Ctrl, Shift, and Alt are ignored. If you are trying to detect a keyCode for one of these keys, use the keyPressed() function instead. The most recent key typed will be stored in the key variable.
-keyTyped__description__1 = Because of how operating systems handle key repeats, holding down a key will cause multiple calls to keyTyped() (and keyReleased() as well). The rate of repeat is set by the operating system and how each computer is configured. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various key events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-keyTyped__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional KeyboardEvent callback argument.
-keyIsDown__description__0 = The keyIsDown() function checks if the key is currently down, i.e. pressed. It can be used if you have an object that moves, and you want several keys to be able to affect its behaviour simultaneously, such as moving a sprite diagonally. You can put in any number representing the keyCode of the key, or use any of the variable keyCode names listed here.
-keyIsDown__returns = Boolean: whether key is down or not
-keyIsDown__params__code = Number: The key to check for.
-movedX__description__0 = The variable movedX contains the horizontal movement of the mouse since the last frame
-movedY__description__0 = The variable movedY contains the vertical movement of the mouse since the last frame
-mouseX__description__0 = The system variable mouseX always contains the current horizontal position of the mouse, relative to (0, 0) of the canvas. The value at the top-left corner is (0, 0) for 2-D and (-width/2, -height/2) for WebGL. If touch is used instead of mouse input, mouseX will hold the x value of the most recent touch point.
-mouseY__description__0 = The system variable mouseY always contains the current vertical position of the mouse, relative to (0, 0) of the canvas. The value at the top-left corner is (0, 0) for 2-D and (-width/2, -height/2) for WebGL. If touch is used instead of mouse input, mouseY will hold the y value of the most recent touch point.
-pmouseX__description__0 = The system variable pmouseX always contains the horizontal position of the mouse or finger in the frame previous to the current frame, relative to (0, 0) of the canvas. The value at the top-left corner is (0, 0) for 2-D and (-width/2, -height/2) for WebGL. Note: pmouseX will be reset to the current mouseX value at the start of each touch event.
-pmouseY__description__0 = The system variable pmouseY always contains the vertical position of the mouse or finger in the frame previous to the current frame, relative to (0, 0) of the canvas. The value at the top-left corner is (0, 0) for 2-D and (-width/2, -height/2) for WebGL. Note: pmouseY will be reset to the current mouseY value at the start of each touch event.
-winMouseX__description__0 = The system variable winMouseX always contains the current horizontal position of the mouse, relative to (0, 0) of the window.
-winMouseY__description__0 = The system variable winMouseY always contains the current vertical position of the mouse, relative to (0, 0) of the window.
-pwinMouseX__description__0 = The system variable pwinMouseX always contains the horizontal position of the mouse in the frame previous to the current frame, relative to (0, 0) of the window. Note: pwinMouseX will be reset to the current winMouseX value at the start of each touch event.
-pwinMouseY__description__0 = The system variable pwinMouseY always contains the vertical position of the mouse in the frame previous to the current frame, relative to (0, 0) of the window. Note: pwinMouseY will be reset to the current winMouseY value at the start of each touch event.
-mouseButton__description__0 = p5 automatically tracks if the mouse button is pressed and which button is pressed. The value of the system variable mouseButton is either LEFT, RIGHT, or CENTER depending on which button was pressed last. Warning: different browsers may track mouseButton differently.
-mouseIsPressed__description__0 = The boolean system variable mouseIsPressed is true if the mouse is pressed and false if not.
-mouseMoved__description__0 = The mouseMoved() function is called every time the mouse moves and a mouse button is not pressed. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various mouse events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-mouseMoved__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional MouseEvent callback argument.
-mouseDragged__description__0 = The mouseDragged() function is called once every time the mouse moves and a mouse button is pressed. If no mouseDragged() function is defined, the touchMoved() function will be called instead if it is defined. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various mouse events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-mouseDragged__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional MouseEvent callback argument.
-mousePressed__description__0 = The mousePressed() function is called once after every time a mouse button is pressed. The mouseButton variable (see the related reference entry) can be used to determine which button has been pressed. If no mousePressed() function is defined, the touchStarted() function will be called instead if it is defined. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various mouse events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-mousePressed__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional MouseEvent callback argument.
-mouseReleased__description__0 = The mouseReleased() function is called every time a mouse button is released. If no mouseReleased() function is defined, the touchEnded() function will be called instead if it is defined. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various mouse events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-mouseReleased__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional MouseEvent callback argument.
-mouseClicked__description__0 = The mouseClicked() function is called once after a mouse button has been pressed and then released. Browsers handle clicks differently, so this function is only guaranteed to be run when the left mouse button is clicked. To handle other mouse buttons being pressed or released, see mousePressed() or mouseReleased(). Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various mouse events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-mouseClicked__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional MouseEvent callback argument.
-doubleClicked__description__0 = The doubleClicked() function is executed every time a event listener has detected a dblclick event which is a part of the DOM L3 specification. The doubleClicked event is fired when a pointing device button (usually a mouse's primary button) is clicked twice on a single element. For more info on the dblclick event refer to mozilla's documentation here: https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/Events/dblclick
-doubleClicked__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional MouseEvent callback argument.
-mouseWheel__description__0 = The function mouseWheel() is executed every time a vertical mouse wheel event is detected either triggered by an actual mouse wheel or by a touchpad. The event.delta property returns the amount the mouse wheel have scrolled. The values can be positive or negative depending on the scroll direction (on OS X with "natural" scrolling enabled, the signs are inverted). Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various mouse events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method. Due to the current support of the "wheel" event on Safari, the function may only work as expected if "return false" is included while using Safari.
-mouseWheel__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional WheelEvent callback argument.
-requestPointerLock__description__0 = The function requestPointerLock() locks the pointer to its current position and makes it invisible. Use movedX and movedY to get the difference the mouse was moved since the last call of draw. Note that not all browsers support this feature. This enables you to create experiences that aren't limited by the mouse moving out of the screen even if it is repeatedly moved into one direction. For example, a first person perspective experience.
-exitPointerLock__description__0 = The function exitPointerLock() exits a previously triggered pointer Lock for example to make ui elements usable etc
-touches__description__0 = The system variable touches[] contains an array of the positions of all current touch points, relative to (0, 0) of the canvas, and IDs identifying a unique touch as it moves. Each element in the array is an object with x, y, and id properties.
-touches__description__1 = The touches[] array is not supported on Safari and IE on touch-based desktops (laptops).
-touchStarted__description__0 = The touchStarted() function is called once after every time a touch is registered. If no touchStarted() function is defined, the mousePressed() function will be called instead if it is defined. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various touch events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-touchStarted__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional TouchEvent callback argument.
-touchMoved__description__0 = The touchMoved() function is called every time a touch move is registered. If no touchMoved() function is defined, the mouseDragged() function will be called instead if it is defined. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various touch events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-touchMoved__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional TouchEvent callback argument.
-touchEnded__description__0 = The touchEnded() function is called every time a touch ends. If no touchEnded() function is defined, the mouseReleased() function will be called instead if it is defined. Browsers may have different default behaviors attached to various touch events. To prevent any default behavior for this event, add "return false" to the end of the method.
-touchEnded__params__event = Object: (Optional) optional TouchEvent callback argument.
-createImage__description__0 = Creates a new p5.Image (the datatype for storing images). This provides a fresh buffer of pixels to play with. Set the size of the buffer with the width and height parameters.
-createImage__description__1 = .pixels gives access to an array containing the values for all the pixels in the display window. These values are numbers. This array is the size (including an appropriate factor for the pixelDensity) of the display window x4, representing the R, G, B, A values in order for each pixel, moving from left to right across each row, then down each column. See .pixels for more info. It may also be simpler to use set() or get().
-createImage__description__2 = Before accessing the pixels of an image, the data must loaded with the loadPixels() function. After the array data has been modified, the updatePixels() function must be run to update the changes.
-createImage__returns = p5.Image: the p5.Image object
-createImage__params__width = Integer: width in pixels
-createImage__params__height = Integer: height in pixels
-saveCanvas__description__0 = Save the current canvas as an image. The browser will either save the file immediately, or prompt the user with a dialogue window.
-saveCanvas__params__selectedCanvas = p5.Element|HTMLCanvasElement: a variable representing a specific html5 canvas (optional)
-saveCanvas__params__filename = String (Optional)
-saveCanvas__params__extension = String: (Optional) 'jpg' or 'png'
-saveFrames__description__0 = Capture a sequence of frames that can be used to create a movie. Accepts a callback. For example, you may wish to send the frames to a server where they can be stored or converted into a movie. If no callback is provided, the browser will pop up save dialogues in an attempt to download all of the images that have just been created. With the callback provided the image data isn't saved by default but instead passed as an argument to the callback function as an array of objects, with the size of array equal to the total number of frames.
-saveFrames__description__1 = Note that saveFrames() will only save the first 15 frames of an animation. To export longer animations, you might look into a library like ccapture.js.
-saveFrames__params__filename = String
-saveFrames__params__extension = String: 'jpg' or 'png'
-saveFrames__params__duration = Number: Duration in seconds to save the frames for.
-saveFrames__params__framerate = Number: Framerate to save the frames in.
-saveFrames__params__callback = Function(Array): (Optional) A callback function that will be executed to handle the image data. This function should accept an array as argument. The array will contain the specified number of frames of objects. Each object has three properties: imageData - an image/octet-stream, filename and extension.
-loadImage__description__0 = Loads an image from a path and creates a p5.Image from it.
-loadImage__description__1 = The image may not be immediately available for rendering. If you want to ensure that the image is ready before doing anything with it, place the loadImage() call in preload(). You may also supply a callback function to handle the image when it's ready.
-loadImage__description__2 = The path to the image should be relative to the HTML file that links in your sketch. Loading an image from a URL or other remote location may be blocked due to your browser's built-in security.
-loadImage__description__3 = You can also pass in a string of a base64 encoded image as an alternative to the file path. Remember to add "data:image/png;base64," in front of the string.
-loadImage__returns = p5.Image: the p5.Image object
-loadImage__params__path = String: Path of the image to be loaded
-loadImage__params__successCallback = function(p5.Image): (Optional) Function to be called once the image is loaded. Will be passed the p5.Image.
-loadImage__params__failureCallback = Function(Event): (Optional) called with event error if the image fails to load.
-image__description__0 = Draw an image to the p5.js canvas.
-image__description__1 = This function can be used with different numbers of parameters. The simplest use requires only three parameters: img, x, and y—where (x, y) is the position of the image. Two more parameters can optionally be added to specify the width and height of the image.
-image__description__2 = This function can also be used with all eight Number parameters. To differentiate between all these parameters, p5.js uses the language of "destination rectangle" (which corresponds to "dx", "dy", etc.) and "source image" (which corresponds to "sx", "sy", etc.) below. Specifying the "source image" dimensions can be useful when you want to display a subsection of the source image instead of the whole thing. Here's a diagram to explain further: 
-image__params__img = p5.Image|p5.Element|p5.Texture: the image to display
-image__params__x = Number: the x-coordinate of the top-left corner of the image
-image__params__y = Number: the y-coordinate of the top-left corner of the image
-image__params__width = Number: (Optional) the width to draw the image
-image__params__height = Number: (Optional) the height to draw the image
-image__params__dx = Number: the x-coordinate of the destination rectangle in which to draw the source image
-image__params__dy = Number: the y-coordinate of the destination rectangle in which to draw the source image
-image__params__dWidth = Number: the width of the destination rectangle
-image__params__dHeight = Number: the height of the destination rectangle
-image__params__sx = Number: the x-coordinate of the subsection of the source image to draw into the destination rectangle
-image__params__sy = Number: the y-coordinate of the subsection of the source image to draw into the destination rectangle
-image__params__sWidth = Number: (Optional) the width of the subsection of the source image to draw into the destination rectangle
-image__params__sHeight = Number: (Optional) the height of the subsection of the source image to draw into the destination rectangle
-tint__description__0 = Sets the fill value for displaying images. Images can be tinted to specified colors or made transparent by including an alpha value.
-tint__description__1 = To apply transparency to an image without affecting its color, use white as the tint color and specify an alpha value. For instance, tint(255, 128) will make an image 50% transparent (assuming the default alpha range of 0-255, which can be changed with colorMode()).
-tint__description__2 = The value for the gray parameter must be less than or equal to the current maximum value as specified by colorMode(). The default maximum value is 255.
-tint__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value relative to the current color range
-tint__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value relative to the current color range
-tint__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value relative to the current color range
-tint__params__alpha = Number (Optional)
-tint__params__value = String: a color string
-tint__params__gray = Number: a gray value
-tint__params__values = Number[]: an array containing the red,green,blue & and alpha components of the color
-tint__params__color = p5.Color: the tint color
-noTint__description__0 = Removes the current fill value for displaying images and reverts to displaying images with their original hues.
-imageMode__description__0 = Set image mode. Modifies the location from which images are drawn by changing the way in which parameters given to image() are interpreted. The default mode is imageMode(CORNER), which interprets the second and third parameters of image() as the upper-left corner of the image. If two additional parameters are specified, they are used to set the image's width and height.
-imageMode__description__1 = imageMode(CORNERS) interprets the second and third parameters of image() as the location of one corner, and the fourth and fifth parameters as the opposite corner.
-imageMode__description__2 = imageMode(CENTER) interprets the second and third parameters of image() as the image's center point. If two additional parameters are specified, they are used to set the image's width and height.
-imageMode__params__mode = Constant: either CORNER, CORNERS, or CENTER
-pixels__description__0 = Uint8ClampedArray containing the values for all the pixels in the display window. These values are numbers. This array is the size (include an appropriate factor for pixelDensity) of the display window x4, representing the R, G, B, A values in order for each pixel, moving from left to right across each row, then down each column. Retina and other high density displays will have more pixels[] (by a factor of pixelDensity^2). For example, if the image is 100×100 pixels, there will be 40,000. On a retina display, there will be 160,000.
-pixels__description__1 = The first four values (indices 0-3) in the array will be the R, G, B, A values of the pixel at (0, 0). The second four values (indices 4-7) will contain the R, G, B, A values of the pixel at (1, 0). More generally, to set values for a pixel at (x, y): let d = pixelDensity(); for (let i = 0; i < d; i++) {"{"} for (let j = 0; j < d; j++) {"{"} // loop over index = 4 * ((y * d + j) * width * d + (x * d + i)); pixels[index] = r; pixels[index+1] = g; pixels[index+2] = b; pixels[index+3] = a; {"}"} {"}"}let x, y, d; // set these to the coordinates let off = (y * width + x) * d * 4; let components = [ pixels[off], pixels[off + 1], pixels[off + 2], pixels[off + 3] ]; print(components);httpDo(path, 'GET'). The 'binary' datatype will return a Blob object, and the 'arrayBuffer' datatype will return an ArrayBuffer which can be used to initialize typed arrays (such as Uint8Array).
-httpGet__returns = Promise: A promise that resolves with the data when the operation completes successfully or rejects with the error after one occurs.
-httpGet__params__path = String: name of the file or url to load
-httpGet__params__datatype = String: (Optional) "json", "jsonp", "binary", "arrayBuffer", "xml", or "text"
-httpGet__params__data = Object|Boolean: (Optional) param data passed sent with request
-httpGet__params__callback = Function: (Optional) function to be executed after httpGet() completes, data is passed in as first argument
-httpGet__params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) function to be executed if there is an error, response is passed in as first argument
-httpPost__description__0 = Method for executing an HTTP POST request. If data type is not specified, p5 will try to guess based on the URL, defaulting to text. This is equivalent to calling httpDo(path, 'POST').
-httpPost__returns = Promise: A promise that resolves with the data when the operation completes successfully or rejects with the error after one occurs.
-httpPost__params__path = String: name of the file or url to load
-httpPost__params__datatype = String: (Optional) "json", "jsonp", "xml", or "text". If omitted, httpPost() will guess.
-httpPost__params__data = Object|Boolean: (Optional) param data passed sent with request
-httpPost__params__callback = Function: (Optional) function to be executed after httpPost() completes, data is passed in as first argument
-httpPost__params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) function to be executed if there is an error, response is passed in as first argument
-httpDo__description__0 = Method for executing an HTTP request. If data type is not specified, p5 will try to guess based on the URL, defaulting to text. For more advanced use, you may also pass in the path as the first argument and a object as the second argument, the signature follows the one specified in the Fetch API specification. This method is suitable for fetching files up to size of 64MB when "GET" is used.
-httpDo__returns = Promise: A promise that resolves with the data when the operation completes successfully or rejects with the error after one occurs.
-httpDo__params__path = String: name of the file or url to load
-httpDo__params__method = String: (Optional) either "GET", "POST", or "PUT", defaults to "GET"
-httpDo__params__datatype = String: (Optional) "json", "jsonp", "xml", or "text"
-httpDo__params__data = Object: (Optional) param data passed sent with request
-httpDo__params__callback = Function: (Optional) function to be executed after httpGet() completes, data is passed in as first argument
-httpDo__params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) function to be executed if there is an error, response is passed in as first argument
-httpDo__params__options = Object: Request object options as documented in the "fetch" API reference
-createWriter__returns = p5.PrintWriter:
-createWriter__params__name = String: name of the file to be created
-createWriter__params__extension = String (Optional)
-save__description__0 = Saves a given element(image, text, json, csv, wav, or html) to the client's computer. The first parameter can be a pointer to element we want to save. The element can be one of p5.Element,an Array of Strings, an Array of JSON, a JSON object, a p5.Table , a p5.Image, or a p5.SoundFile (requires p5.sound). The second parameter is a filename (including extension).The third parameter is for options specific to this type of object. This method will save a file that fits the given parameters. If it is called without specifying an element, by default it will save the whole canvas as an image file. You can optionally specify a filename as the first parameter in such a case. Note that it is not recommended to call this method within draw, as it will open a new save dialog on every render.
-save__params__objectOrFilename = Object|String: (Optional) If filename is provided, will save canvas as an image with either png or jpg extension depending on the filename. If object is provided, will save depending on the object and filename (see examples above).
-save__params__filename = String: (Optional) If an object is provided as the first parameter, then the second parameter indicates the filename, and should include an appropriate file extension (see examples above).
-save__params__options = Boolean|String: (Optional) Additional options depend on filetype. For example, when saving JSON, true indicates that the output will be optimized for filesize, rather than readability.
-saveJSON__description__0 = Writes the contents of an Array or a JSON object to a .json file. The file saving process and location of the saved file will vary between web browsers.
-saveJSON__params__json = Array|Object
-saveJSON__params__filename = String
-saveJSON__params__optimize = Boolean: (Optional) If true, removes line breaks and spaces from the output file to optimize filesize (but not readability).
-saveStrings__description__0 = Writes an array of Strings to a text file, one line per String. The file saving process and location of the saved file will vary between web browsers.
-saveStrings__params__list = String[]: string array to be written
-saveStrings__params__filename = String: filename for output
-saveStrings__params__extension = String: (Optional) the filename's extension
-saveStrings__params__isCRLF = Boolean: (Optional) if true, change line-break to CRLF
-saveTable__description__0 = Writes the contents of a Table object to a file. Defaults to a text file with comma-separated-values ('csv') but can also use tab separation ('tsv'), or generate an HTML table ('html'). The file saving process and location of the saved file will vary between web browsers.
-saveTable__params__Table = p5.Table: the Table object to save to a file
-saveTable__params__filename = String: the filename to which the Table should be saved
-saveTable__params__options = String: (Optional) can be one of "tsv", "csv", or "html"
-abs__description__0 = Calculates the absolute value (magnitude) of a number. Maps to Math.abs(). The absolute value of a number is always positive.
-abs__returns = Number: absolute value of given number
-abs__params__n = Number: number to compute
-ceil__description__0 = Calculates the closest int value that is greater than or equal to the value of the parameter. Maps to Math.ceil(). For example, ceil(9.03) returns the value 10.
-ceil__returns = Integer: rounded up number
-ceil__params__n = Number: number to round up
-constrain__description__0 = Constrains a value between a minimum and maximum value.
-constrain__returns = Number: constrained number
-constrain__params__n = Number: number to constrain
-constrain__params__low = Number: minimum limit
-constrain__params__high = Number: maximum limit
-dist__description__0 = Calculates the distance between two points, in either two or three dimensions. If you looking for distance between two vectors see dist()
-dist__returns = Number: distance between the two points
-dist__params__x1 = Number: x-coordinate of the first point
-dist__params__y1 = Number: y-coordinate of the first point
-dist__params__x2 = Number: x-coordinate of the second point
-dist__params__y2 = Number: y-coordinate of the second point
-dist__params__z1 = Number: z-coordinate of the first point
-dist__params__z2 = Number: z-coordinate of the second point
-exp__description__0 = Returns Euler's number e (2.71828...) raised to the power of the n parameter. Maps to Math.exp().
-exp__returns = Number: e^n
-exp__params__n = Number: exponent to raise
-floor__description__0 = Calculates the closest int value that is less than or equal to the value of the parameter. Maps to Math.floor().
-floor__returns = Integer: rounded down number
-floor__params__n = Number: number to round down
-lerp__description__0 = Calculates a number between two numbers at a specific increment. The amt parameter is the amount to interpolate between the two values where 0.0 equal to the first point, 0.1 is very near the first point, 0.5 is half-way in between, and 1.0 is equal to the second point. If the value of amt is more than 1.0 or less than 0.0, the number will be calculated accordingly in the ratio of the two given numbers. The lerp function is convenient for creating motion along a straight path and for drawing dotted lines.
-lerp__returns = Number: lerped value
-lerp__params__start = Number: first value
-lerp__params__stop = Number: second value
-lerp__params__amt = Number: number
-log__description__0 = Calculates the natural logarithm (the base-e logarithm) of a number. This function expects the n parameter to be a value greater than 0.0. Maps to Math.log().
-log__returns = Number: natural logarithm of n
-log__params__n = Number: number greater than 0
-mag__description__0 = Calculates the magnitude (or length) of a vector. A vector is a direction in space commonly used in computer graphics and linear algebra. Because it has no "start" position, the magnitude of a vector can be thought of as the distance from the coordinate 0,0 to its x,y value. Therefore, mag() is a shortcut for writing dist(0, 0, x, y).
-mag__returns = Number: magnitude of vector from (0,0) to (a,b)
-mag__params__a = Number: first value
-mag__params__b = Number: second value
-map__description__0 = Re-maps a number from one range to another.
-map__description__1 = In the first example above, the number 25 is converted from a value in the range of 0 to 100 into a value that ranges from the left edge of the window (0) to the right edge (width).
-map__returns = Number: remapped number
-map__params__value = Number: the incoming value to be converted
-map__params__start1 = Number: lower bound of the value's current range
-map__params__stop1 = Number: upper bound of the value's current range
-map__params__start2 = Number: lower bound of the value's target range
-map__params__stop2 = Number: upper bound of the value's target range
-map__params__withinBounds = Boolean: (Optional) constrain the value to the newly mapped range
-max__description__0 = Determines the largest value in a sequence of numbers, and then returns that value. max() accepts any number of Number parameters, or an Array of any length.
-max__returns = Number: maximum Number
-max__params__n0 = Number: Number to compare
-max__params__n1 = Number: Number to compare
-max__params__nums = Number[]: Numbers to compare
-min__description__0 = Determines the smallest value in a sequence of numbers, and then returns that value. min() accepts any number of Number parameters, or an Array of any length.
-min__returns = Number: minimum Number
-min__params__n0 = Number: Number to compare
-min__params__n1 = Number: Number to compare
-min__params__nums = Number[]: Numbers to compare
-norm__description__0 = Normalizes a number from another range into a value between 0 and 1. Identical to map(value, low, high, 0, 1). Numbers outside of the range are not clamped to 0 and 1, because out-of-range values are often intentional and useful. (See the example above.)
-norm__returns = Number: normalized number
-norm__params__value = Number: incoming value to be normalized
-norm__params__start = Number: lower bound of the value's current range
-norm__params__stop = Number: upper bound of the value's current range
-pow__description__0 = Facilitates exponential expressions. The pow() function is an efficient way of multiplying numbers by themselves (or their reciprocals) in large quantities. For example, pow(3, 5) is equivalent to the expression 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 and pow(3, -5) is equivalent to 1 / 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3. Maps to Math.pow().
-pow__returns = Number: n^e
-pow__params__n = Number: base of the exponential expression
-pow__params__e = Number: power by which to raise the base
-round__description__0 = Calculates the integer closest to the n parameter. For example, round(133.8) returns the value 134. Maps to Math.round().
-round__returns = Integer: rounded number
-round__params__n = Number: number to round
-round__params__decimals = Number: (Optional) number of decimal places to round to, default is 0
-sq__description__0 = Squares a number (multiplies a number by itself). The result is always a positive number, as multiplying two negative numbers always yields a positive result. For example, -1 * -1 = 1.
-sq__returns = Number: squared number
-sq__params__n = Number: number to square
-sqrt__description__0 = Calculates the square root of a number. The square root of a number is always positive, even though there may be a valid negative root. The square root s of number a is such that s*s = a. It is the opposite of squaring. Maps to Math.sqrt().
-sqrt__returns = Number: square root of number
-sqrt__params__n = Number: non-negative number to square root
-fract__description__0 = Calculates the fractional part of a number.
-fract__returns = Number: fractional part of x, i.e, {"{"}x{"}"}
-fract__params__num = Number: Number whose fractional part needs to be found out
-createVector__description__0 = Creates a new p5.Vector (the datatype for storing vectors). This provides a two or three dimensional vector, specifically a Euclidean (also known as geometric) vector. A vector is an entity that has both magnitude and direction.
-createVector__returns = p5.Vector:
-createVector__params__x = Number: (Optional) x component of the vector
-createVector__params__y = Number: (Optional) y component of the vector
-createVector__params__z = Number: (Optional) z component of the vector
-noise__description__0 = Returns the Perlin noise value at specified coordinates. Perlin noise is a random sequence generator producing a more naturally ordered, harmonic succession of numbers compared to the standard random() function. It was invented by Ken Perlin in the 1980s and been used since in graphical applications to produce procedural textures, natural motion, shapes, terrains etc.The main difference to the random() function is that Perlin noise is defined in an infinite n-dimensional space where each pair of coordinates corresponds to a fixed semi-random value (fixed only for the lifespan of the program; see the noiseSeed() function). p5.js can compute 1D, 2D and 3D noise, depending on the number of coordinates given. The resulting value will always be between 0.0 and 1.0. The noise value can be animated by moving through the noise space as demonstrated in the example above. The 2nd and 3rd dimension can also be interpreted as time.
The actual noise is structured similar to an audio signal, in respect to the function's use of frequencies. Similar to the concept of harmonics in physics, perlin noise is computed over several octaves which are added together for the final result.
Another way to adjust the character of the resulting sequence is the scale of the input coordinates. As the function works within an infinite space the value of the coordinates doesn't matter as such, only the distance between successive coordinates does (eg. when using noise() within a loop). As a general rule the smaller the difference between coordinates, the smoother the resulting noise sequence will be. Steps of 0.005-0.03 work best for most applications, but this will differ depending on use. -noise__returns = Number: Perlin noise value (between 0 and 1) at specified coordinates -noise__params__x = Number: x-coordinate in noise space -noise__params__y = Number: (Optional) y-coordinate in noise space -noise__params__z = Number: (Optional) z-coordinate in noise space -noiseDetail__description__0 = Adjusts the character and level of detail produced by the Perlin noise function. Similar to harmonics in physics, noise is computed over several octaves. Lower octaves contribute more to the output signal and as such define the overall intensity of the noise, whereas higher octaves create finer grained details in the noise sequence. By default, noise is computed over 4 octaves with each octave contributing exactly half than its predecessor, starting at 50% strength for the 1st octave. This falloff amount can be changed by adding an additional function parameter. Eg. a falloff factor of 0.75 means each octave will now have 75% impact (25% less) of the previous lower octave. Any value between 0.0 and 1.0 is valid, however note that values greater than 0.5 might result in greater than 1.0 values returned by noise(). By changing these parameters, the signal created by the noise() function can be adapted to fit very specific needs and characteristics. -noiseDetail__params__lod = Number: number of octaves to be used by the noise -noiseDetail__params__falloff = Number: falloff factor for each octave -noiseSeed__description__0 = Sets the seed value for noise(). By default, noise() produces different results each time the program is run. Set the value parameter to a constant to return the same pseudo-random numbers each time the software is run. -noiseSeed__params__seed = Number: the seed value -randomSeed__description__0 = Sets the seed value for random(). -randomSeed__description__1 = By default, random() produces different results each time the program is run. Set the seed parameter to a constant to return the same pseudo-random numbers each time the software is run. -randomSeed__params__seed = Number: the seed value -random__description__0 = Return a random floating-point number. -random__description__1 = Takes either 0, 1 or 2 arguments. -random__description__2 = If no argument is given, returns a random number from 0 up to (but not including) 1. -random__description__3 = If one argument is given and it is a number, returns a random number from 0 up to (but not including) the number. -random__description__4 = If one argument is given and it is an array, returns a random element from that array. -random__description__5 = If two arguments are given, returns a random number from the first argument up to (but not including) the second argument. -random__returns = Number: the random number -random__params__min = Number: (Optional) the lower bound (inclusive) -random__params__max = Number: (Optional) the upper bound (exclusive) -random__params__choices = Array: the array to choose from -randomGaussian__description__0 = Returns a random number fitting a Gaussian, or normal, distribution. There is theoretically no minimum or maximum value that randomGaussian() might return. Rather, there is just a very low probability that values far from the mean will be returned; and a higher probability that numbers near the mean will be returned. Takes either 0, 1 or 2 arguments. If no args, returns a mean of 0 and standard deviation of 1. If one arg, that arg is the mean (standard deviation is 1). If two args, first is mean, second is standard deviation. -randomGaussian__returns = Number: the random number -randomGaussian__params__mean = Number: (Optional) the mean -randomGaussian__params__sd = Number: (Optional) the standard deviation -acos__description__0 = The inverse of cos(), returns the arc cosine of a value. This function expects the values in the range of -1 to 1 and values are returned in the range 0 to PI (3.1415927) if the angleMode is RADIANS or 0 to 180 if the angle mode is DEGREES. -acos__returns = Number: the arc cosine of the given value -acos__params__value = Number: the value whose arc cosine is to be returned -asin__description__0 = The inverse of sin(), returns the arc sine of a value. This function expects the values in the range of -1 to 1 and values are returned in the range -PI/2 to PI/2 if the angleMode is RADIANS or -90 to 90 if the angle mode is DEGREES. -asin__returns = Number: the arc sine of the given value -asin__params__value = Number: the value whose arc sine is to be returned -atan__description__0 = The inverse of tan(), returns the arc tangent of a value. This function expects the values in the range of -Infinity to Infinity (exclusive) and values are returned in the range -PI/2 to PI/2 if the angleMode is RADIANS or -90 to 90 if the angle mode is DEGREES. -atan__returns = Number: the arc tangent of the given value -atan__params__value = Number: the value whose arc tangent is to be returned -atan2__description__0 = Calculates the angle (in radians) from a specified point to the coordinate origin as measured from the positive x-axis. Values are returned as a float in the range from PI to -PI if the angleMode is RADIANS or 180 to -180 if the angleMode is DEGREES. The atan2() function is most often used for orienting geometry to the position of the cursor. -atan2__description__1 = Note: The y-coordinate of the point is the first parameter, and the x-coordinate is the second parameter, due the the structure of calculating the tangent. -atan2__returns = Number: the arc tangent of the given point -atan2__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of the point -atan2__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of the point -cos__description__0 = Calculates the cosine of an angle. This function takes into account the current angleMode. Values are returned in the range -1 to 1. -cos__returns = Number: the cosine of the angle -cos__params__angle = Number: the angle -sin__description__0 = Calculates the sine of an angle. This function takes into account the current angleMode. Values are returned in the range -1 to 1. -sin__returns = Number: the sine of the angle -sin__params__angle = Number: the angle -tan__description__0 = Calculates the tangent of an angle. This function takes into account the current angleMode. Values are returned in the range of all real numbers. -tan__returns = Number: the tangent of the angle -tan__params__angle = Number: the angle -degrees__description__0 = Converts a radian measurement to its corresponding value in degrees. Radians and degrees are two ways of measuring the same thing. There are 360 degrees in a circle and 2*PI radians in a circle. For example, 90° = PI/2 = 1.5707964. This function does not take into account the current angleMode. -degrees__returns = Number: the converted angle -degrees__params__radians = Number: the radians value to convert to degrees -radians__description__0 = Converts a degree measurement to its corresponding value in radians. Radians and degrees are two ways of measuring the same thing. There are 360 degrees in a circle and 2*PI radians in a circle. For example, 90° = PI/2 = 1.5707964. This function does not take into account the current angleMode. -radians__returns = Number: the converted angle -radians__params__degrees = Number: the degree value to convert to radians -angleMode__description__0 = Sets the current mode of p5 to given mode. Default mode is RADIANS. -angleMode__params__mode = Constant: either RADIANS or DEGREES -textAlign__description__0 = Sets the current alignment for drawing text. Accepts two arguments: horizAlign (LEFT, CENTER, or RIGHT) and vertAlign (TOP, BOTTOM, CENTER, or BASELINE). -textAlign__description__1 = The horizAlign parameter is in reference to the x value of the text() function, while the vertAlign parameter is in reference to the y value. -textAlign__description__2 = So if you write textAlign(LEFT), you are aligning the left edge of your text to the x value you give in text(). If you write textAlign(RIGHT, TOP), you are aligning the right edge of your text to the x value and the top of edge of the text to the y value. -textAlign__params__horizAlign = Constant: horizontal alignment, either LEFT, CENTER, or RIGHT -textAlign__params__vertAlign = Constant: (Optional) vertical alignment, either TOP, BOTTOM, CENTER, or BASELINE -textLeading__description__0 = Sets/gets the spacing, in pixels, between lines of text. This setting will be used in all subsequent calls to the text() function. -textLeading__params__leading = Number: the size in pixels for spacing between lines -textSize__description__0 = Sets/gets the current font size. This size will be used in all subsequent calls to the text() function. Font size is measured in pixels. -textSize__params__theSize = Number: the size of the letters in units of pixels -textStyle__description__0 = Sets/gets the style of the text for system fonts to NORMAL, ITALIC, BOLD or BOLDITALIC. Note: this may be is overridden by CSS styling. For non-system fonts (opentype, truetype, etc.) please load styled fonts instead. -textStyle__params__theStyle = Constant: styling for text, either NORMAL, ITALIC, BOLD or BOLDITALIC -textWidth__description__0 = Calculates and returns the width of any character or text string. -textWidth__returns = Number: the calculated width -textWidth__params__theText = String: the String of characters to measure -textAscent__description__0 = Returns the ascent of the current font at its current size. The ascent represents the distance, in pixels, of the tallest character above the baseline. -textAscent__returns = Number: -textDescent__description__0 = Returns the descent of the current font at its current size. The descent represents the distance, in pixels, of the character with the longest descender below the baseline. -textDescent__returns = Number: -textWrap__description__0 = Specifies how lines of text are wrapped within a text box. This requires a max-width set on the text area, specified in text() as parameter
x2.
-textWrap__description__1 = WORD wrap style only breaks lines at spaces. A single string without spaces that exceeds the boundaries of the canvas or text area is not truncated, and will overflow the desired area, disappearing at the canvas edge.
-textWrap__description__2 = CHAR wrap style breaks lines wherever needed to stay within the text box.
-textWrap__description__3 = WORD is the default wrap style, and both styles will still break lines at any line breaks (\n) specified in the original text. The text area max-height parameter (y2) also still applies to wrapped text in both styles, lines of text that do not fit within the text area will not be drawn to the screen.
-textWrap__returns = String: wrapStyle
-textWrap__params__wrapStyle = Constant: text wrapping style, either WORD or CHAR
-loadFont__description__0 = Loads an opentype font file (.otf, .ttf) from a file or a URL, and returns a PFont Object. This method is asynchronous, meaning it may not finish before the next line in your sketch is executed.
-loadFont__description__1 = The path to the font should be relative to the HTML file that links in your sketch. Loading fonts from a URL or other remote location may be blocked due to your browser's built-in security.
-loadFont__returns = p5.Font: p5.Font object
-loadFont__params__path = String: name of the file or url to load
-loadFont__params__callback = Function: (Optional) function to be executed after loadFont() completes
-loadFont__params__onError = Function: (Optional) function to be executed if an error occurs
-text__description__0 = Draws text to the screen. Displays the information specified in the first parameter on the screen in the position specified by the additional parameters. A default font will be used unless a font is set with the textFont() function and a default size will be used unless a font is set with textSize(). Change the color of the text with the fill() function. Change the outline of the text with the stroke() and strokeWeight() functions.
-text__description__1 = The text displays in relation to the textAlign() function, which gives the option to draw to the left, right, and center of the coordinates.
-text__description__2 = The x2 and y2 parameters define a rectangular area to display within and may only be used with string data. When these parameters are specified, they are interpreted based on the current rectMode() setting. Text that does not fit completely within the rectangle specified will not be drawn to the screen. If x2 and y2 are not specified, the baseline alignment is the default, which means that the text will be drawn upwards from x and y.
-text__description__3 = WEBGL: Only opentype/truetype fonts are supported. You must load a font using the loadFont() method (see the example above). stroke() currently has no effect in webgl mode. Learn more about working with text in webgl mode on the wiki.
-text__params__str = String|Object|Array|Number|Boolean: the alphanumeric symbols to be displayed
-text__params__x = Number: x-coordinate of text
-text__params__y = Number: y-coordinate of text
-text__params__x2 = Number: (Optional) by default, the width of the text box, see rectMode() for more info
-text__params__y2 = Number: (Optional) by default, the height of the text box, see rectMode() for more info
-textFont__description__0 = Sets the current font that will be drawn with the text() function. If textFont() is called without any argument, it will return the current font if one has been set already. If not, it will return the name of the default font as a string. If textFont() is called with a font to use, it will return the p5 object.
-textFont__description__1 = WEBGL: Only fonts loaded via loadFont() are supported.
-textFont__returns = Object: the current font / p5 Object
-textFont__params__font = Object|String: a font loaded via loadFont(), or a String representing a web safe font (a font that is generally available across all systems)
-textFont__params__size = Number: (Optional) the font size to use
-append__description__0 = Adds a value to the end of an array. Extends the length of the array by one. Maps to Array.push().
-append__returns = Array: the array that was appended to
-append__params__array = Array: Array to append
-append__params__value = Any: to be added to the Array
-arrayCopy__description__0 = Copies an array (or part of an array) to another array. The src array is copied to the dst array, beginning at the position specified by srcPosition and into the position specified by dstPosition. The number of elements to copy is determined by length. Note that copying values overwrites existing values in the destination array. To append values instead of overwriting them, use concat().
-arrayCopy__description__1 = The simplified version with only two arguments, arrayCopy(src, dst), copies an entire array to another of the same size. It is equivalent to arrayCopy(src, 0, dst, 0, src.length).
-arrayCopy__description__2 = Using this function is far more efficient for copying array data than iterating through a for() loop and copying each element individually.
-arrayCopy__params__src = Array: the source Array
-arrayCopy__params__srcPosition = Integer: starting position in the source Array
-arrayCopy__params__dst = Array: the destination Array
-arrayCopy__params__dstPosition = Integer: starting position in the destination Array
-arrayCopy__params__length = Integer: number of Array elements to be copied
-concat__description__0 = Concatenates two arrays, maps to Array.concat(). Does not modify the input arrays.
-concat__returns = Array: concatenated array
-concat__params__a = Array: first Array to concatenate
-concat__params__b = Array: second Array to concatenate
-reverse__description__0 = Reverses the order of an array, maps to Array.reverse()
-reverse__returns = Array: the reversed list
-reverse__params__list = Array: Array to reverse
-shorten__description__0 = Decreases an array by one element and returns the shortened array, maps to Array.pop().
-shorten__returns = Array: shortened Array
-shorten__params__list = Array: Array to shorten
-shuffle__description__0 = Randomizes the order of the elements of an array. Implements Fisher-Yates Shuffle Algorithm.
-shuffle__returns = Array: shuffled Array
-shuffle__params__array = Array: Array to shuffle
-shuffle__params__bool = Boolean: (Optional) modify passed array
-sort__description__0 = Sorts an array of numbers from smallest to largest, or puts an array of words in alphabetical order. The original array is not modified; a re-ordered array is returned. The count parameter states the number of elements to sort. For example, if there are 12 elements in an array and count is set to 5, only the first 5 elements in the array will be sorted.
-sort__returns = Array: the sorted list
-sort__params__list = Array: Array to sort
-sort__params__count = Integer: (Optional) number of elements to sort, starting from 0
-splice__description__0 = Inserts a value or an array of values into an existing array. The first parameter specifies the initial array to be modified, and the second parameter defines the data to be inserted. The third parameter is an index value which specifies the array position from which to insert data. (Remember that array index numbering starts at zero, so the first position is 0, the second position is 1, and so on.)
-splice__returns = Array: the list
-splice__params__list = Array: Array to splice into
-splice__params__value = Any: value to be spliced in
-splice__params__position = Integer: in the array from which to insert data
-subset__description__0 = Extracts an array of elements from an existing array. The list parameter defines the array from which the elements will be copied, and the start and count parameters specify which elements to extract. If no count is given, elements will be extracted from the start to the end of the array. When specifying the start, remember that the first array element is 0. This function does not change the source array.
-subset__returns = Array: Array of extracted elements
-subset__params__list = Array: Array to extract from
-subset__params__start = Integer: position to begin
-subset__params__count = Integer: (Optional) number of values to extract
-float__description__0 = Converts a string to its floating point representation. The contents of a string must resemble a number, or NaN (not a number) will be returned. For example, float("1234.56") evaluates to 1234.56, but float("giraffe") will return NaN.
-float__description__1 = When an array of values is passed in, then an array of floats of the same length is returned.
-float__returns = Number: floating point representation of string
-float__params__str = String: float string to parse
-int__description__0 = Converts a boolean, string, or float to its integer representation. When an array of values is passed in, then an int array of the same length is returned.
-int__returns = Number: integer representation of value
-int__params__n = String|Boolean|Number: value to parse
-int__params__radix = Integer: (Optional) the radix to convert to (default: 10)
-int__params__ns = Array: values to parse
-str__description__0 = Converts a boolean, string or number to its string representation. When an array of values is passed in, then an array of strings of the same length is returned.
-str__returns = String: string representation of value
-str__params__n = String|Boolean|Number|Array: value to parse
-byte__description__0 = Converts a number, string representation of a number, or boolean to its byte representation. A byte can be only a whole number between -128 and 127, so when a value outside of this range is converted, it wraps around to the corresponding byte representation. When an array of number, string or boolean values is passed in, then an array of bytes the same length is returned.
-byte__returns = Number: byte representation of value
-byte__params__n = String|Boolean|Number: value to parse
-byte__params__ns = Array: values to parse
-char__description__0 = Converts a number or string to its corresponding single-character string representation. If a string parameter is provided, it is first parsed as an integer and then translated into a single-character string. When an array of number or string values is passed in, then an array of single-character strings of the same length is returned.
-char__returns = String: string representation of value
-char__params__n = String|Number: value to parse
-char__params__ns = Array: values to parse
-unchar__description__0 = Converts a single-character string to its corresponding integer representation. When an array of single-character string values is passed in, then an array of integers of the same length is returned.
-unchar__returns = Number: integer representation of value
-unchar__params__n = String: value to parse
-unchar__params__ns = Array: values to parse
-hex__description__0 = Converts a number to a string in its equivalent hexadecimal notation. If a second parameter is passed, it is used to set the number of characters to generate in the hexadecimal notation. When an array is passed in, an array of strings in hexadecimal notation of the same length is returned.
-hex__returns = String: hexadecimal string representation of value
-hex__params__n = Number: value to parse
-hex__params__digits = Number (Optional)
-hex__params__ns = Number[]: array of values to parse
-unhex__description__0 = Converts a string representation of a hexadecimal number to its equivalent integer value. When an array of strings in hexadecimal notation is passed in, an array of integers of the same length is returned.
-unhex__returns = Number: integer representation of hexadecimal value
-unhex__params__n = String: value to parse
-unhex__params__ns = Array: values to parse
-join__description__0 = Combines an array of Strings into one String, each separated by the character(s) used for the separator parameter. To join arrays of ints or floats, it's necessary to first convert them to Strings using nf() or nfs().
-join__returns = String: joined String
-join__params__list = Array: array of Strings to be joined
-join__params__separator = String: String to be placed between each item
-match__description__0 = This function is used to apply a regular expression to a piece of text, and return matching groups (elements found inside parentheses) as a String array. If there are no matches, a null value will be returned. If no groups are specified in the regular expression, but the sequence matches, an array of length 1 (with the matched text as the first element of the array) will be returned.
-match__description__1 = To use the function, first check to see if the result is null. If the result is null, then the sequence did not match at all. If the sequence did match, an array is returned.
-match__description__2 = If there are groups (specified by sets of parentheses) in the regular expression, then the contents of each will be returned in the array. Element [0] of a regular expression match returns the entire matching string, and the match groups start at element [1] (the first group is [1], the second [2], and so on).
-match__returns = String[]: Array of Strings found
-match__params__str = String: the String to be searched
-match__params__regexp = String: the regexp to be used for matching
-matchAll__description__0 = This function is used to apply a regular expression to a piece of text, and return a list of matching groups (elements found inside parentheses) as a two-dimensional String array. If there are no matches, a null value will be returned. If no groups are specified in the regular expression, but the sequence matches, a two dimensional array is still returned, but the second dimension is only of length one.
-matchAll__description__1 = To use the function, first check to see if the result is null. If the result is null, then the sequence did not match at all. If the sequence did match, a 2D array is returned.
-matchAll__description__2 = If there are groups (specified by sets of parentheses) in the regular expression, then the contents of each will be returned in the array. Assuming a loop with counter variable i, element [i][0] of a regular expression match returns the entire matching string, and the match groups start at element [i][1] (the first group is [i][1], the second [i][2], and so on).
-matchAll__returns = String[]: 2d Array of Strings found
-matchAll__params__str = String: the String to be searched
-matchAll__params__regexp = String: the regexp to be used for matching
-nf__description__0 = Utility function for formatting numbers into strings. There are two versions: one for formatting floats, and one for formatting ints.
-nf__description__1 = The values for the digits, left, and right parameters should always be positive integers.
-nf__description__2 = (NOTE): Be cautious when using left and right parameters as it prepends numbers of 0's if the parameter if greater than the current length of the number.
-nf__description__3 = For example if number is 123.2 and left parameter passed is 4 which is greater than length of 123 (integer part) i.e 3 than result will be 0123.2. Same case for right parameter i.e. if right is 3 than the result will be 123.200.
-nf__returns = String: formatted String
-nf__params__num = Number|String: the Number to format
-nf__params__left = Integer|String: (Optional) number of digits to the left of the decimal point
-nf__params__right = Integer|String: (Optional) number of digits to the right of the decimal point
-nf__params__nums = Array: the Numbers to format
-nfc__description__0 = Utility function for formatting numbers into strings and placing appropriate commas to mark units of 1000. There are two versions: one for formatting ints, and one for formatting an array of ints. The value for the right parameter should always be a positive integer.
-nfc__returns = String: formatted String
-nfc__params__num = Number|String: the Number to format
-nfc__params__right = Integer|String: (Optional) number of digits to the right of the decimal point
-nfc__params__nums = Array: the Numbers to format
-nfp__description__0 = Utility function for formatting numbers into strings. Similar to nf() but puts a "+" in front of positive numbers and a "-" in front of negative numbers. There are two versions: one for formatting floats, and one for formatting ints. The values for left, and right parameters should always be positive integers.
-nfp__returns = String: formatted String
-nfp__params__num = Number: the Number to format
-nfp__params__left = Integer: (Optional) number of digits to the left of the decimal point
-nfp__params__right = Integer: (Optional) number of digits to the right of the decimal point
-nfp__params__nums = Number[]: the Numbers to format
-nfs__description__0 = Utility function for formatting numbers into strings. Similar to nf() but puts an additional "_" (space) in front of positive numbers just in case to align it with negative numbers which includes "-" (minus) sign.
-nfs__description__1 = The main usecase of nfs() can be seen when one wants to align the digits (place values) of a non-negative number with some negative number (See the example to get a clear picture). There are two versions: one for formatting float, and one for formatting int.
-nfs__description__2 = The values for the digits, left, and right parameters should always be positive integers.
-nfs__description__3 = (IMP): The result on the canvas basically the expected alignment can vary based on the typeface you are using.
-nfs__description__4 = (NOTE): Be cautious when using left and right parameters as it prepends numbers of 0's if the parameter if greater than the current length of the number.
-nfs__description__5 = For example if number is 123.2 and left parameter passed is 4 which is greater than length of 123 (integer part) i.e 3 than result will be 0123.2. Same case for right parameter i.e. if right is 3 than the result will be 123.200.
-nfs__returns = String: formatted String
-nfs__params__num = Number: the Number to format
-nfs__params__left = Integer: (Optional) number of digits to the left of the decimal point
-nfs__params__right = Integer: (Optional) number of digits to the right of the decimal point
-nfs__params__nums = Array: the Numbers to format
-split__description__0 = The split() function maps to String.split(), it breaks a String into pieces using a character or string as the delimiter. The delim parameter specifies the character or characters that mark the boundaries between each piece. A String[] array is returned that contains each of the pieces.
-split__description__1 = The splitTokens() function works in a similar fashion, except that it splits using a range of characters instead of a specific character or sequence.
-split__returns = String[]: Array of Strings
-split__params__value = String: the String to be split
-split__params__delim = String: the String used to separate the data
-splitTokens__description__0 = The splitTokens() function splits a String at one or many character delimiters or "tokens." The delim parameter specifies the character or characters to be used as a boundary.
-splitTokens__description__1 = If no delim characters are specified, any whitespace character is used to split. Whitespace characters include tab (\t), line feed (\n), carriage return (\r), form feed (\f), and space.
-splitTokens__returns = String[]: Array of Strings
-splitTokens__params__value = String: the String to be split
-splitTokens__params__delim = String: (Optional) list of individual Strings that will be used as separators
-trim__description__0 = Removes whitespace characters from the beginning and end of a String. In addition to standard whitespace characters such as space, carriage return, and tab, this function also removes the Unicode "nbsp" character.
-trim__returns = String: a trimmed String
-trim__params__str = String: a String to be trimmed
-trim__params__strs = Array: an Array of Strings to be trimmed
-day__description__0 = p5.js communicates with the clock on your computer. The day() function returns the current day as a value from 1 - 31.
-day__returns = Integer: the current day
-hour__description__0 = p5.js communicates with the clock on your computer. The hour() function returns the current hour as a value from 0 - 23.
-hour__returns = Integer: the current hour
-minute__description__0 = p5.js communicates with the clock on your computer. The minute() function returns the current minute as a value from 0 - 59.
-minute__returns = Integer: the current minute
-millis__description__0 = Returns the number of milliseconds (thousandths of a second) since starting the sketch (when setup() is called). This information is often used for timing events and animation sequences.
-millis__returns = Number: the number of milliseconds since starting the sketch
-month__description__0 = p5.js communicates with the clock on your computer. The month() function returns the current month as a value from 1 - 12.
-month__returns = Integer: the current month
-second__description__0 = p5.js communicates with the clock on your computer. The second() function returns the current second as a value from 0 - 59.
-second__returns = Integer: the current second
-year__description__0 = p5.js communicates with the clock on your computer. The year() function returns the current year as an integer (2014, 2015, 2016, etc).
-year__returns = Integer: the current year
-plane__description__0 = Draw a plane with given a width and height
-plane__params__width = Number: (Optional) width of the plane
-plane__params__height = Number: (Optional) height of the plane
-plane__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) Optional number of triangle subdivisions in x-dimension
-plane__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) Optional number of triangle subdivisions in y-dimension
-box__description__0 = Draw a box with given width, height and depth
-box__params__width = Number: (Optional) width of the box
-box__params__Height = Number: (Optional) height of the box
-box__params__depth = Number: (Optional) depth of the box
-box__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) Optional number of triangle subdivisions in x-dimension
-box__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) Optional number of triangle subdivisions in y-dimension
-sphere__description__0 = Draw a sphere with given radius.
-sphere__description__1 = DetailX and detailY determines the number of subdivisions in the x-dimension and the y-dimension of a sphere. More subdivisions make the sphere seem smoother. The recommended maximum values are both 24. Using a value greater than 24 may cause a warning or slow down the browser.
-sphere__params__radius = Number: (Optional) radius of circle
-sphere__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) optional number of subdivisions in x-dimension
-sphere__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) optional number of subdivisions in y-dimension
-cylinder__description__0 = Draw a cylinder with given radius and height
-cylinder__description__1 = DetailX and detailY determines the number of subdivisions in the x-dimension and the y-dimension of a cylinder. More subdivisions make the cylinder seem smoother. The recommended maximum value for detailX is 24. Using a value greater than 24 may cause a warning or slow down the browser.
-cylinder__params__radius = Number: (Optional) radius of the surface
-cylinder__params__height = Number: (Optional) height of the cylinder
-cylinder__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) number of subdivisions in x-dimension; default is 24
-cylinder__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) number of subdivisions in y-dimension; default is 1
-cylinder__params__bottomCap = Boolean: (Optional) whether to draw the bottom of the cylinder
-cylinder__params__topCap = Boolean: (Optional) whether to draw the top of the cylinder
-cone__description__0 = Draw a cone with given radius and height
-cone__description__1 = DetailX and detailY determine the number of subdivisions in the x-dimension and the y-dimension of a cone. More subdivisions make the cone seem smoother. The recommended maximum value for detailX is 24. Using a value greater than 24 may cause a warning or slow down the browser.
-cone__params__radius = Number: (Optional) radius of the bottom surface
-cone__params__height = Number: (Optional) height of the cone
-cone__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) number of segments, the more segments the smoother geometry default is 24
-cone__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) number of segments, the more segments the smoother geometry default is 1
-cone__params__cap = Boolean: (Optional) whether to draw the base of the cone
-ellipsoid__description__0 = Draw an ellipsoid with given radius
-ellipsoid__description__1 = DetailX and detailY determine the number of subdivisions in the x-dimension and the y-dimension of a cone. More subdivisions make the ellipsoid appear to be smoother. Avoid detail number above 150, it may crash the browser.
-ellipsoid__params__radiusx = Number: (Optional) x-radius of ellipsoid
-ellipsoid__params__radiusy = Number: (Optional) y-radius of ellipsoid
-ellipsoid__params__radiusz = Number: (Optional) z-radius of ellipsoid
-ellipsoid__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) number of segments, the more segments the smoother geometry default is 24. Avoid detail number above 150, it may crash the browser.
-ellipsoid__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) number of segments, the more segments the smoother geometry default is 16. Avoid detail number above 150, it may crash the browser.
-torus__description__0 = Draw a torus with given radius and tube radius
-torus__description__1 = DetailX and detailY determine the number of subdivisions in the x-dimension and the y-dimension of a torus. More subdivisions make the torus appear to be smoother. The default and maximum values for detailX and detailY are 24 and 16, respectively. Setting them to relatively small values like 4 and 6 allows you to create new shapes other than a torus.
-torus__params__radius = Number: (Optional) radius of the whole ring
-torus__params__tubeRadius = Number: (Optional) radius of the tube
-torus__params__detailX = Integer: (Optional) number of segments in x-dimension, the more segments the smoother geometry default is 24
-torus__params__detailY = Integer: (Optional) number of segments in y-dimension, the more segments the smoother geometry default is 16
-orbitControl__description__0 = Allows movement around a 3D sketch using a mouse or trackpad. Left-clicking and dragging will rotate the camera position about the center of the sketch, right-clicking and dragging will pan the camera position without rotation, and using the mouse wheel (scrolling) will move the camera closer or further from the center of the sketch. This function can be called with parameters dictating sensitivity to mouse movement along the X and Y axes. Calling this function without parameters is equivalent to calling orbitControl(1,1). To reverse direction of movement in either axis, enter a negative number for sensitivity.
-orbitControl__params__sensitivityX = Number: (Optional) sensitivity to mouse movement along X axis
-orbitControl__params__sensitivityY = Number: (Optional) sensitivity to mouse movement along Y axis
-orbitControl__params__sensitivityZ = Number: (Optional) sensitivity to scroll movement along Z axis
-debugMode__description__0 = debugMode() helps visualize 3D space by adding a grid to indicate where the ‘ground’ is in a sketch and an axes icon which indicates the +X, +Y, and +Z directions. This function can be called without parameters to create a default grid and axes icon, or it can be called according to the examples above to customize the size and position of the grid and/or axes icon. The grid is drawn using the most recently set stroke color and weight. To specify these parameters, add a call to stroke() and strokeWeight() just before the end of the draw() loop.
-debugMode__description__1 = By default, the grid will run through the origin (0,0,0) of the sketch along the XZ plane and the axes icon will be offset from the origin. Both the grid and axes icon will be sized according to the current canvas size. Note that because the grid runs parallel to the default camera view, it is often helpful to use debugMode along with orbitControl to allow full view of the grid.
-debugMode__params__mode = Constant: either GRID or AXES
-debugMode__params__gridSize = Number: (Optional) size of one side of the grid
-debugMode__params__gridDivisions = Number: (Optional) number of divisions in the grid
-debugMode__params__xOff = Number: (Optional) X axis offset from origin (0,0,0)
-debugMode__params__yOff = Number: (Optional) Y axis offset from origin (0,0,0)
-debugMode__params__zOff = Number: (Optional) Z axis offset from origin (0,0,0)
-debugMode__params__axesSize = Number: (Optional) size of axes icon
-debugMode__params__gridXOff = Number (Optional)
-debugMode__params__gridYOff = Number (Optional)
-debugMode__params__gridZOff = Number (Optional)
-debugMode__params__axesXOff = Number (Optional)
-debugMode__params__axesYOff = Number (Optional)
-debugMode__params__axesZOff = Number (Optional)
-noDebugMode__description__0 = Turns off debugMode() in a 3D sketch.
-ambientLight__description__0 = Creates an ambient light with a color. Ambient light is light that comes from everywhere on the canvas. It has no particular source.
-ambientLight__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value relative to the current color range
-ambientLight__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value relative to the current color range
-ambientLight__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value relative to the current color range
-ambientLight__params__alpha = Number: (Optional) the alpha value
-ambientLight__params__value = String: a color string
-ambientLight__params__gray = Number: a gray value
-ambientLight__params__values = Number[]: an array containing the red,green,blue & and alpha components of the color
-ambientLight__params__color = p5.Color: the ambient light color
-specularColor__description__0 = Set's the color of the specular highlight when using a specular material and specular light.
-specularColor__description__1 = This method can be combined with specularMaterial() and shininess() functions to set specular highlights. The default color is white, ie (255, 255, 255), which is used if this method is not called before specularMaterial(). If this method is called without specularMaterial(), There will be no effect.
-specularColor__description__2 = Note: specularColor is equivalent to the processing function lightSpecular.
-specularColor__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value relative to the current color range
-specularColor__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value relative to the current color range
-specularColor__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value relative to the current color range
-specularColor__params__value = String: a color string
-specularColor__params__gray = Number: a gray value
-specularColor__params__values = Number[]: an array containing the red,green,blue & and alpha components of the color
-specularColor__params__color = p5.Color: the ambient light color
-directionalLight__description__0 = Creates a directional light with a color and a direction
-directionalLight__description__1 = A maximum of 5 directionalLight can be active at one time
-directionalLight__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value (depending on the current color mode),
-directionalLight__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value
-directionalLight__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value
-directionalLight__params__position = p5.Vector: the direction of the light
-directionalLight__params__color = Number[]|String|p5.Color: color Array, CSS color string, or p5.Color value
-directionalLight__params__x = Number: x axis direction
-directionalLight__params__y = Number: y axis direction
-directionalLight__params__z = Number: z axis direction
-pointLight__description__0 = Creates a point light with a color and a light position
-pointLight__description__1 = A maximum of 5 pointLight can be active at one time
-pointLight__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value (depending on the current color mode),
-pointLight__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value
-pointLight__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value
-pointLight__params__x = Number: x axis position
-pointLight__params__y = Number: y axis position
-pointLight__params__z = Number: z axis position
-pointLight__params__position = p5.Vector: the position of the light
-pointLight__params__color = Number[]|String|p5.Color: color Array, CSS color string, or p5.Color value
-lights__description__0 = Sets the default ambient and directional light. The defaults are ambientLight(128, 128, 128) and directionalLight(128, 128, 128, 0, 0, -1). Lights need to be included in the draw() to remain persistent in a looping program. Placing them in the setup() of a looping program will cause them to only have an effect the first time through the loop.
-lightFalloff__description__0 = Sets the falloff rates for point lights. It affects only the elements which are created after it in the code. The default value is lightFalloff(1.0, 0.0, 0.0), and the parameters are used to calculate the falloff with the following equation:
-lightFalloff__description__1 = d = distance from light position to vertex position
-lightFalloff__description__2 = falloff = 1 / (CONSTANT + d * LINEAR + ( d * d ) * QUADRATIC)
-lightFalloff__params__constant = Number: constant value for determining falloff
-lightFalloff__params__linear = Number: linear value for determining falloff
-lightFalloff__params__quadratic = Number: quadratic value for determining falloff
-spotLight__description__0 = Creates a spotlight with a given color, position, direction of light, angle and concentration. Here, angle refers to the opening or aperture of the cone of the spotlight, and concentration is used to focus the light towards the center. Both angle and concentration are optional, but if you want to provide concentration, you will also have to specify the angle.
-spotLight__description__1 = A maximum of 5 spotLight can be active at one time
-spotLight__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value (depending on the current color mode),
-spotLight__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value
-spotLight__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value
-spotLight__params__x = Number: x axis position
-spotLight__params__y = Number: y axis position
-spotLight__params__z = Number: z axis position
-spotLight__params__rx = Number: x axis direction of light
-spotLight__params__ry = Number: y axis direction of light
-spotLight__params__rz = Number: z axis direction of light
-spotLight__params__angle = Number: (Optional) optional parameter for angle. Defaults to PI/3
-spotLight__params__conc = Number: (Optional) optional parameter for concentration. Defaults to 100
-spotLight__params__color = Number[]|String|p5.Color: color Array, CSS color string, or p5.Color value
-spotLight__params__position = p5.Vector: the position of the light
-spotLight__params__direction = p5.Vector: the direction of the light
-noLights__description__0 = This function will remove all the lights from the sketch for the subsequent materials rendered. It affects all the subsequent methods. Calls to lighting methods made after noLights() will re-enable lights in the sketch.
-loadModel__description__0 = Load a 3d model from an OBJ or STL file.
-loadModel__description__1 = loadModel() should be placed inside of preload(). This allows the model to load fully before the rest of your code is run.
-loadModel__description__2 = One of the limitations of the OBJ and STL format is that it doesn't have a built-in sense of scale. This means that models exported from different programs might be very different sizes. If your model isn't displaying, try calling loadModel() with the normalized parameter set to true. This will resize the model to a scale appropriate for p5. You can also make additional changes to the final size of your model with the scale() function.
-loadModel__description__3 = Also, the support for colored STL files is not present. STL files with color will be rendered without color properties.
-loadModel__returns = p5.Geometry: the p5.Geometry object
-loadModel__params__path = String: Path of the model to be loaded
-loadModel__params__normalize = Boolean: If true, scale the model to a standardized size when loading
-loadModel__params__successCallback = function(p5.Geometry): (Optional) Function to be called once the model is loaded. Will be passed the 3D model object.
-loadModel__params__failureCallback = Function(Event): (Optional) called with event error if the model fails to load.
-loadModel__params__fileType = String: (Optional) The file extension of the model (.stl, .obj).
-model__description__0 = Render a 3d model to the screen.
-model__params__model = p5.Geometry: Loaded 3d model to be rendered
-loadShader__description__0 = Creates a new p5.Shader object from the provided vertex and fragment shader files.
-loadShader__description__1 = The shader files are loaded asynchronously in the background, so this method should be used in preload().
-loadShader__description__2 = Note, shaders can only be used in WEBGL mode.
-loadShader__returns = p5.Shader: a shader object created from the provided vertex and fragment shader files.
-loadShader__params__vertFilename = String: path to file containing vertex shader source code
-loadShader__params__fragFilename = String: path to file containing fragment shader source code
-loadShader__params__callback = Function: (Optional) callback to be executed after loadShader completes. On success, the p5.Shader object is passed as the first argument.
-loadShader__params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) callback to be executed when an error occurs inside loadShader. On error, the error is passed as the first argument.
-createShader__description__0 = Creates a new p5.Shader object from the provided vertex and fragment shader code.
-createShader__description__1 = Note, shaders can only be used in WEBGL mode.
-createShader__returns = p5.Shader: a shader object created from the provided vertex and fragment shaders.
-createShader__params__vertSrc = String: source code for the vertex shader
-createShader__params__fragSrc = String: source code for the fragment shader
-shader__description__0 = Sets the p5.Shader object to be used to render subsequent shapes.
-shader__description__1 = Custom shaders can be created using the createShader() and loadShader() functions.
-shader__description__2 = Use resetShader() to restore the default shaders.
-shader__description__3 = Note, shaders can only be used in WEBGL mode.
-shader__params__s = p5.Shader: the p5.Shader object to use for rendering shapes.
-resetShader__description__0 = Restores the default shaders. Code that runs after resetShader() will not be affected by the shader previously set by shader()
-texture__description__0 = Sets the texture that will be used to render subsequent shapes.
-texture__description__1 = A texture is like a "skin" that wraps around a 3D geometry. Currently supported textures are images, video, and offscreen renders.
-texture__description__2 = To texture a geometry created with beginShape(), you will need to specify uv coordinates in vertex().
-texture__description__3 = Note, texture() can only be used in WEBGL mode.
-texture__description__4 = You can view more materials in this example.
-texture__params__tex = p5.Image|p5.MediaElement|p5.Graphics|p5.Texture: image to use as texture
-textureMode__description__0 = Sets the coordinate space for texture mapping. The default mode is IMAGE which refers to the actual coordinates of the image. NORMAL refers to a normalized space of values ranging from 0 to 1.
-textureMode__description__1 = With IMAGE, if an image is 100×200 pixels, mapping the image onto the entire size of a quad would require the points (0,0) (100, 0) (100,200) (0,200). The same mapping in NORMAL is (0,0) (1,0) (1,1) (0,1).
-textureMode__params__mode = Constant: either IMAGE or NORMAL
-textureWrap__description__0 = Sets the global texture wrapping mode. This controls how textures behave when their uv's go outside of the 0 to 1 range. There are three options: CLAMP, REPEAT, and MIRROR.
-textureWrap__description__1 = CLAMP causes the pixels at the edge of the texture to extend to the bounds. REPEAT causes the texture to tile repeatedly until reaching the bounds. MIRROR works similarly to REPEAT but it flips the texture with every new tile.
-textureWrap__description__2 = REPEAT & MIRROR are only available if the texture is a power of two size (128, 256, 512, 1024, etc.).
-textureWrap__description__3 = This method will affect all textures in your sketch until a subsequent textureWrap() call is made.
-textureWrap__description__4 = If only one argument is provided, it will be applied to both the horizontal and vertical axes.
-textureWrap__params__wrapX = Constant: either CLAMP, REPEAT, or MIRROR
-textureWrap__params__wrapY = Constant: (Optional) either CLAMP, REPEAT, or MIRROR
-normalMaterial__description__0 = Normal material for geometry is a material that is not affected by light. It is not reflective and is a placeholder material often used for debugging. Surfaces facing the X-axis, become red, those facing the Y-axis, become green and those facing the Z-axis, become blue. You can view all possible materials in this example.
-ambientMaterial__description__0 = Ambient material for geometry with a given color. Ambient material defines the color the object reflects under any lighting. For example, if the ambient material of an object is pure red, but the ambient lighting only contains green, the object will not reflect any light. Here's an example containing all possible materials.
-ambientMaterial__params__v1 = Number: gray value, red or hue value (depending on the current color mode),
-ambientMaterial__params__v2 = Number: (Optional) green or saturation value
-ambientMaterial__params__v3 = Number: (Optional) blue or brightness value
-ambientMaterial__params__color = Number[]|String|p5.Color: color, color Array, or CSS color string
-emissiveMaterial__description__0 = Sets the emissive color of the material used for geometry drawn to the screen. This is a misnomer in the sense that the material does not actually emit light that effects surrounding polygons. Instead, it gives the appearance that the object is glowing. An emissive material will display at full strength even if there is no light for it to reflect.
-emissiveMaterial__params__v1 = Number: gray value, red or hue value (depending on the current color mode),
-emissiveMaterial__params__v2 = Number: (Optional) green or saturation value
-emissiveMaterial__params__v3 = Number: (Optional) blue or brightness value
-emissiveMaterial__params__a = Number: (Optional) opacity
-emissiveMaterial__params__color = Number[]|String|p5.Color: color, color Array, or CSS color string
-specularMaterial__description__0 = Specular material for geometry with a given color. Specular material is a shiny reflective material. Like ambient material it also defines the color the object reflects under ambient lighting. For example, if the specular material of an object is pure red, but the ambient lighting only contains green, the object will not reflect any light. For all other types of light like point and directional light, a specular material will reflect the color of the light source to the viewer. Here's an example containing all possible materials.
-specularMaterial__params__gray = Number: number specifying value between white and black.
-specularMaterial__params__alpha = Number: (Optional) alpha value relative to current color range (default is 0-255)
-specularMaterial__params__v1 = Number: red or hue value relative to the current color range
-specularMaterial__params__v2 = Number: green or saturation value relative to the current color range
-specularMaterial__params__v3 = Number: blue or brightness value relative to the current color range
-specularMaterial__params__color = Number[]|String|p5.Color: color Array, or CSS color string
-shininess__description__0 = Sets the amount of gloss in the surface of shapes. Used in combination with specularMaterial() in setting the material properties of shapes. The default and minimum value is 1.
-shininess__params__shine = Number: Degree of Shininess. Defaults to 1.
-camera__description__0 = Sets the position of the current camera in a 3D sketch. Parameters for this function define the camera's position, the center of the sketch (where the camera is pointing), and an up direction (the orientation of the camera).
-camera__description__1 = This function simulates the movements of the camera, allowing objects to be viewed from various angles. Remember, it does not move the objects themselves but the camera instead. For example when the centerX value is positive, and the camera is rotating to the right side of the sketch, the object will seem like it's moving to the left.
-camera__description__2 = See this example to view the position of your camera.
-camera__description__3 = If no parameters are given, the following default is used: camera(0, 0, (height/2) / tan(PI/6), 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0)
-camera__params__x = Number: (Optional) camera position value on x axis
-camera__params__y = Number: (Optional) camera position value on y axis
-camera__params__z = Number: (Optional) camera position value on z axis
-camera__params__centerX = Number: (Optional) x coordinate representing center of the sketch
-camera__params__centerY = Number: (Optional) y coordinate representing center of the sketch
-camera__params__centerZ = Number: (Optional) z coordinate representing center of the sketch
-camera__params__upX = Number: (Optional) x component of direction 'up' from camera
-camera__params__upY = Number: (Optional) y component of direction 'up' from camera
-camera__params__upZ = Number: (Optional) z component of direction 'up' from camera
-perspective__description__0 = Sets a perspective projection for the current camera in a 3D sketch. This projection represents depth through foreshortening: objects that are close to the camera appear their actual size while those that are further away from the camera appear smaller.
-perspective__description__1 = The parameters to this function define the viewing frustum (the truncated pyramid within which objects are seen by the camera) through vertical field of view, aspect ratio (usually width/height), and near and far clipping planes.
-perspective__description__2 = If no parameters are given, the following default is used: perspective(PI/3, width/height, eyeZ/10, eyeZ*10), where eyeZ is equal to ((height/2) / tan(PI/6)).
-perspective__params__fovy = Number: (Optional) camera frustum vertical field of view, from bottom to top of view, in angleMode units
-perspective__params__aspect = Number: (Optional) camera frustum aspect ratio
-perspective__params__near = Number: (Optional) frustum near plane length
-perspective__params__far = Number: (Optional) frustum far plane length
-ortho__description__0 = Sets an orthographic projection for the current camera in a 3D sketch and defines a box-shaped viewing frustum within which objects are seen. In this projection, all objects with the same dimension appear the same size, regardless of whether they are near or far from the camera.
-ortho__description__1 = The parameters to this function specify the viewing frustum where left and right are the minimum and maximum x values, top and bottom are the minimum and maximum y values, and near and far are the minimum and maximum z values.
-ortho__description__2 = If no parameters are given, the following default is used: ortho(-width/2, width/2, -height/2, height/2).
-ortho__params__left = Number: (Optional) camera frustum left plane
-ortho__params__right = Number: (Optional) camera frustum right plane
-ortho__params__bottom = Number: (Optional) camera frustum bottom plane
-ortho__params__top = Number: (Optional) camera frustum top plane
-ortho__params__near = Number: (Optional) camera frustum near plane
-ortho__params__far = Number: (Optional) camera frustum far plane
-frustum__description__0 = Sets the frustum of the current camera as defined by the parameters.
-frustum__description__1 = A frustum is a geometric form: a pyramid with its top cut off. With the viewer's eye at the imaginary top of the pyramid, the six planes of the frustum act as clipping planes when rendering a 3D view. Thus, any form inside the clipping planes is visible; anything outside those planes is not visible.
-frustum__description__2 = Setting the frustum changes the perspective of the scene being rendered. This can be achieved more simply in many cases by using perspective().
-frustum__description__3 = If no parameters are given, the following default is used: frustum(-width/2, width/2, -height/2, height/2, 0, max(width, height)).
-frustum__params__left = Number: (Optional) camera frustum left plane
-frustum__params__right = Number: (Optional) camera frustum right plane
-frustum__params__bottom = Number: (Optional) camera frustum bottom plane
-frustum__params__top = Number: (Optional) camera frustum top plane
-frustum__params__near = Number: (Optional) camera frustum near plane
-frustum__params__far = Number: (Optional) camera frustum far plane
-createCamera__description__0 = Creates a new p5.Camera object and sets it as the current (active) camera.
-createCamera__description__1 = The new camera is initialized with a default position (see camera()) and a default perspective projection (see perspective()). Its properties can be controlled with the p5.Camera methods.
-createCamera__description__2 = Note: Every 3D sketch starts with a default camera initialized. This camera can be controlled with the global methods camera(), perspective(), ortho(), and frustum() if it is the only camera in the scene.
-createCamera__returns = p5.Camera: The newly created camera object.
-setCamera__description__0 = Sets the current (active) camera of a 3D sketch. Allows for switching between multiple cameras.
-setCamera__params__cam = p5.Camera: p5.Camera object
-setAttributes__description__0 = Set attributes for the WebGL Drawing context. This is a way of adjusting how the WebGL renderer works to fine-tune the display and performance.
-setAttributes__description__1 = Note that this will reinitialize the drawing context if called after the WebGL canvas is made.
-setAttributes__description__2 = If an object is passed as the parameter, all attributes not declared in the object will be set to defaults.
-setAttributes__description__3 = The available attributes are: alpha - indicates if the canvas contains an alpha buffer default is false
-setAttributes__description__4 = depth - indicates whether the drawing buffer has a depth buffer of at least 16 bits - default is true
-setAttributes__description__5 = stencil - indicates whether the drawing buffer has a stencil buffer of at least 8 bits
-setAttributes__description__6 = antialias - indicates whether or not to perform anti-aliasing default is false (true in Safari)
-setAttributes__description__7 = premultipliedAlpha - indicates that the page compositor will assume the drawing buffer contains colors with pre-multiplied alpha default is false
-setAttributes__description__8 = preserveDrawingBuffer - if true the buffers will not be cleared and and will preserve their values until cleared or overwritten by author (note that p5 clears automatically on draw loop) default is true
-setAttributes__description__9 = perPixelLighting - if true, per-pixel lighting will be used in the lighting shader otherwise per-vertex lighting is used. default is true.
-setAttributes__params__key = String: Name of attribute
-setAttributes__params__value = Boolean: New value of named attribute
-setAttributes__params__obj = Object: object with key-value pairs
-getAudioContext__description__0 = Returns the Audio Context for this sketch. Useful for users who would like to dig deeper into the Web Audio API .
-getAudioContext__description__1 = Some browsers require users to startAudioContext with a user gesture, such as touchStarted in the example below.
-getAudioContext__returns = Object: AudioContext for this sketch
-userStartAudio__description__0 = It is not only a good practice to give users control over starting audio. This policy is enforced by many web browsers, including iOS and Google Chrome, which create the Web Audio API's Audio Context in a suspended state.
-userStartAudio__description__1 = In these browser-specific policies, sound will not play until a user interaction event (i.e. mousePressed()) explicitly resumes the AudioContext, or starts an audio node. This can be accomplished by calling start() on a p5.Oscillator, play() on a p5.SoundFile, or simply userStartAudio().
-userStartAudio__description__2 = userStartAudio() starts the AudioContext on a user gesture. The default behavior will enable audio on any mouseUp or touchEnd event. It can also be placed in a specific interaction function, such as mousePressed() as in the example below. This method utilizes StartAudioContext , a library by Yotam Mann (MIT Licence, 2016).
-userStartAudio__returns = Promise: Returns a Promise that resolves when the AudioContext state is 'running'
-userStartAudio__params__element-_leftBracket_-s-_rightBracket_- = Element|Array: (Optional) This argument can be an Element, Selector String, NodeList, p5.Element, jQuery Element, or an Array of any of those.
-userStartAudio__params__callback = Function: (Optional) Callback to invoke when the AudioContext has started
-getOutputVolume__description__0 = Returns a number representing the output volume for sound in this sketch.
-getOutputVolume__returns = Number: Output volume for sound in this sketch. Should be between 0.0 (silence) and 1.0.
-outputVolume__description__0 = Scale the output of all sound in this sketch Scaled between 0.0 (silence) and 1.0 (full volume). 1.0 is the maximum amplitude of a digital sound, so multiplying by greater than 1.0 may cause digital distortion. To fade, provide a rampTime parameter. For more complex fades, see the Envelope class.
-outputVolume__description__1 = Alternately, you can pass in a signal source such as an oscillator to modulate the amplitude with an audio signal.
-outputVolume__description__2 = How This Works: When you load the p5.sound module, it creates a single instance of p5sound. All sound objects in this module output to p5sound before reaching your computer's output. So if you change the amplitude of p5sound, it impacts all of the sound in this module.
-outputVolume__description__3 = If no value is provided, returns a Web Audio API Gain Node
-outputVolume__params__volume = Number|Object: Volume (amplitude) between 0.0 and 1.0 or modulating signal/oscillator
-outputVolume__params__rampTime = Number: (Optional) Fade for t seconds
-outputVolume__params__timeFromNow = Number: (Optional) Schedule this event to happen at t seconds in the future
-soundOut__description__0 = p5.soundOut is the p5.sound final output bus. It sends output to the destination of this window's web audio context. It contains Web Audio API nodes including a dyanmicsCompressor (.limiter), and Gain Nodes for .input and .output.
-sampleRate__description__0 = Returns a number representing the sample rate, in samples per second, of all sound objects in this audio context. It is determined by the sampling rate of your operating system's sound card, and it is not currently possile to change. It is often 44100, or twice the range of human hearing.
-sampleRate__returns = Number: samplerate samples per second
-freqToMidi__description__0 = Returns the closest MIDI note value for a given frequency.
-freqToMidi__returns = Number: MIDI note value
-freqToMidi__params__frequency = Number: A freqeuncy, for example, the "A" above Middle C is 440Hz
-midiToFreq__description__0 = Returns the frequency value of a MIDI note value. General MIDI treats notes as integers where middle C is 60, C# is 61, D is 62 etc. Useful for generating musical frequencies with oscillators.
-midiToFreq__returns = Number: Frequency value of the given MIDI note
-midiToFreq__params__midiNote = Number: The number of a MIDI note
-soundFormats__description__0 = List the SoundFile formats that you will include. LoadSound will search your directory for these extensions, and will pick a format that is compatable with the client's web browser. Here is a free online file converter.
-soundFormats__params__formats = String: (Optional) i.e. 'mp3', 'wav', 'ogg'
-saveSound__description__0 = Save a p5.SoundFile as a .wav file. The browser will prompt the user to download the file to their device. For uploading audio to a server, use p5.SoundFile.saveBlob.
-saveSound__params__soundFile = p5.SoundFile: p5.SoundFile that you wish to save
-saveSound__params__fileName = String: name of the resulting .wav file.
-loadSound__description__0 = loadSound() returns a new p5.SoundFile from a specified path. If called during preload(), the p5.SoundFile will be ready to play in time for setup() and draw(). If called outside of preload, the p5.SoundFile will not be ready immediately, so loadSound accepts a callback as the second parameter. Using a local server is recommended when loading external files.
-loadSound__returns = SoundFile: Returns a p5.SoundFile
-loadSound__params__path = String|Array: Path to the sound file, or an array with paths to soundfiles in multiple formats i.e. ['sound.ogg', 'sound.mp3']. Alternately, accepts an object: either from the HTML5 File API, or a p5.File.
-loadSound__params__successCallback = Function: (Optional) Name of a function to call once file loads
-loadSound__params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) Name of a function to call if there is an error loading the file.
-loadSound__params__whileLoading = Function: (Optional) Name of a function to call while file is loading. This function will receive the percentage loaded so far, from 0.0 to 1.0.
-createConvolver__description__0 = Create a p5.Convolver. Accepts a path to a soundfile that will be used to generate an impulse response.
-createConvolver__returns = p5.Convolver:
-createConvolver__params__path = String: path to a sound file
-createConvolver__params__callback = Function: (Optional) function to call if loading is successful. The object will be passed in as the argument to the callback function.
-createConvolver__params__errorCallback = Function: (Optional) function to call if loading is not successful. A custom error will be passed in as the argument to the callback function.
-setBPM__description__0 = Set the global tempo, in beats per minute, for all p5.Parts. This method will impact all active p5.Parts.
-setBPM__params__BPM = Number: Beats Per Minute
-setBPM__params__rampTime = Number: Seconds from now
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/p5.sound.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/p5.sound.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/en/root.ftl b/src/data/localization/en/root.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 76c9ab6237..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/en/root.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-h1 = Reference
-reference-search = Search reference
-reference-description1 = Can't find what you're looking for? You may want to check out
-reference-description3 = You can also download an offline version of the reference.
-reference-contribute2 = Please let us know.
-reference-error1 = Notice any errors or typos?
-reference-error3 = Please feel free to edit
-reference-error5 = and issue a pull request!
-reference-example = Example
-reference-description = Description
-reference-extends = Extends
-reference-parameters = Parameters
-reference-syntax = Syntax
-reference-returns = Returns
-Environment = Environment
-Color = Color
-Color Conversion = Color Conversion
-Creating & Reading = Creating & Reading
-Setting = Setting
-Shape = Shape
-2D Primitives = 2D Primitives
-Attributes = Attributes
-Curves = Curves
-Vertex = Vertex
-Constants = Constants
-Structure = Structure
-DOM = DOM
-Rendering = Rendering
-Foundation = Foundation
-Transform = Transform
-Data = Data
-LocalStorage = LocalStorage
-Dictionary = Dictionary
-Events = Events
-Acceleration = Acceleration
-Keyboard = Keyboard
-Mouse = Mouse
-Touch = Touch
-Image = Image
-Loading & Displaying = Loading & Displaying
-Pixels = Pixels
-IO = IO
-Input = Input
-Output = Output
-Table = Table
-Math = Math
-Calculation = Calculation
-Vector = Vector
-Noise = Noise
-Random = Random
-Trigonometry = Trigonometry
-Typography = Typography
-Array Functions = Array Functions
-Conversion = Conversion
-String Functions = String Functions
-Time & Date = Time & Date
-3D Primitives = 3D Primitives
-3D = 3D
-Interaction = Interaction
-Lights = Lights
-3D Models = 3D Models
-Material = Material
-Camera = Camera
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/JSON.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/JSON.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/console.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/console.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Amplitude.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Amplitude.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.AudioIn.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.AudioIn.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.AudioVoice.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.AudioVoice.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.BandPass.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.BandPass.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Camera.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Camera.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Color.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Color.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e0050de46a..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Color.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Cada color almacena el modo de color y los niveles máximos que se aplicaron en el momento de su construcción. Estos se utilizan para interpretar los argumentos de entrada (en la construcción y más tarde para esa instancia de color) y para formatear el output, p. ej. cuando se solicita la saturation().
-description__1 = Internamente almacenamos una matriz que representa los valores ideales de RGBA en forma de coma flotante, normalizada de 0 a 1. A partir de esto, calculamos el color de pantalla más cercano (niveles de RGBA de 0 a 255) y lo exponemos al renderizador.
-description__2 = También almacenamos en caché normalizado, componentes de coma flotante de color flotante del color en varias representaciones a medida que se calculan. Esto se hace para evitar repetir una conversión que ya se ha realizado.
-setRed__description__0 = La función setRed establece el componente rojo de un color. El rango depende de su modo de color, en el modo RGB predeterminado está entre 0 y 255.
-setRed__params__red = Number: the new red value
-setGreen__description__0 = La función setGreen establece el componente verde de un color. El rango depende de su modo de color, en el modo RGB predeterminado está entre 0 y 255.
-setGreen__params__green = Number: the new green value
-setBlue__description__0 = La función setBlue establece el componente azul de un color. El rango depende de su modo de color, en el modo RGB predeterminado está entre 0 y 255.
-setBlue__params__blue = Number: the new blue value
-setAlpha__description__0 = La función setAlpha establece el valor de transparencia (alfa) de un color. El rango depende de su modo de color, en el modo RGB predeterminado está entre 0 y 255.
-setAlpha__params__alpha = Number: the new alpha value
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Compressor.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Compressor.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Convolver.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Convolver.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Delay.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Delay.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Distortion.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Distortion.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.EQ.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.EQ.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Effect.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Effect.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Element.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Element.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d01163ee3..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Element.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Clase base para todos los elementos añadidos al bosuqejo, incluyendo lienzo, buffers de gráficas, y otros elementos HTML. Los métodos en azul están incluidos en la funcionalidad base, los métodos en marrón son añadidos con la biblioteca p5.dom. No se ejecutan directamente, pero los objetos p5.Element son creados llamando a las funciones createCanvas(), createGraphics(), o en la biblioteca p5.dom, createDiv, createImg, createInput, etc.
-params__elt = String: node DOM envolvente.
-params__pInst = Objeto: puntero a instancia p5.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Envelope.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Envelope.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.FFT.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.FFT.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.File.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.File.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Filter.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Filter.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Font.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Font.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index ff926a3318..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Font.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Clase base para manipulación de tipografía
-params__pInst = Objeto: puntero a la instancia p5
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Gain.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Gain.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Geometry.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Geometry.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Graphics.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Graphics.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 04da39ad9c..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Graphics.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Contenedor fino alrededor de un renderizador, que se utilizará para crear un objeto de búfer de gráficos. Use esta clase si necesita dibujar en un búfer de gráficos fuera de la pantalla. Los dos parámetros definen el ancho y el alto en píxeles. Los campos y métodos para esta clase son extensos, pero reflejan la API de dibujo normal para p5.
-params__w = Número: ancho
-params__h = Número: altura
-params__renderer = Constant: renderer el renderizador a utilizar, ya sea P2D o WEBGL
-params__pInst = P5: pointer a una instancia p5 (Opcional)
-reset__description__0 = Restablece ciertos valores, como los modificados por funciones en la categoría Transformar y en la categoría Luces que no se restablecen automáticamente con objetos gráficos de búfer. Llamando a esto en draw() copiará el comportamiento del canvas estándar.
-remove__description__0 = Elimina un objeto Graphics de la página y libera todos los recursos asociados con él.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.HighPass.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.HighPass.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Image.ftl b/src/data/localization/es/p5.Image.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a0cdf827a..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/es/p5.Image.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = Crea un nuevo p5.Image. Un p5.Image es una representación de una imagen respaldada por un canvas.
-description__1 = p5 puede mostrar imágenes .gif, .jpg y .png. Las imágenes pueden mostrarse en espacio 2D y 3D. Antes de usar una imagen, debe cargarse con la función loadImage(). La clase p5.Image contiene campos para el ancho y alto de la imagen, así como una matriz llamada pixels[] que contiene los valores para cada píxel en la imagen.
-description__2 = Los métodos descritos a continuación permiten un fácil acceso a los píxeles de la imagen y al canal alfa y simplifican el proceso de composición.
-description__3 = Antes de usar la matriz de pixels[], asegúrese de usar el método loadPixels() en la imagen para asegurarse de que los datos de píxeles estén cargados correctamente.
-params__width = Número de ancho:
-params__height = Número de altura:
-width__description__0 = Ancho de la imagen.
-height__description__0 = Altura de imagen.
-pixels__description__0 = Matriz que contiene los valores para todos los píxeles en la ventana de visualización. Estos valores son números. Esta matriz es el tamaño (incluya un factor apropiado para la densidad de píxeles) de la ventana de visualización x4, que representa los valores R, G, B, A en orden para cada píxel, moviéndose de izquierda a derecha a través de cada fila, luego hacia abajo en cada columna. La retina y otras pantallas de alta densidad pueden tener más píxeles (por un factor de densidad de píxeles ^ 2). Por ejemplo, si la imagen es de 100x100 píxeles, habrá 40,000. Con pixelDensity = 2, habrá 160,000. Los primeros cuatro valores (índices 0-3) en la matriz serán los valores R, G, B, A del píxel en (0, 0). Los segundos cuatro valores (índices 4-7) contendrán los valores R, G, B, A del píxel en (1, 0). Más generalmente, para establecer valores para un píxel en (x, y): let d = pixelDensity(); for (let i = 0; i < d; i++) {"{"} for (let j = 0; j < d; j++) {"{"} // loop over index = 4 * ((y * d + j) * width * d + (x * d + i)); pixels[index] = r; pixels[index+1] = g; pixels[index+2] = b; pixels[index+3] = a; {"}"} {"}"}curve() कार्यों की श्रृंखला को एक साथ रखकर या curveVertex()। एक अतिरिक्त फ़ंक्शन जिसे curveTightness() कहा जाता है, की दृश्य गुणवत्ता के लिए नियंत्रण प्रदान करता है वक्र। curve() फ़ंक्शन Catmull-Rom splines का कार्यान्वयन है। -curvePoint__returns = p5 ऑब्जेक्ट -curveTangent__returns = स्थिति में स्पर्शरेखा t -beginContour__description__0 = नकारात्मक बनाने के लिए beginContour() और endContour() फ़ंक्शन का उपयोग करें अक्षर 'O' के केंद्र जैसे आकार के भीतर आकार। beginContour() आकृति के लिए शीर्षों को रिकॉर्ड करना शुरू करता है और endContour() रिकॉर्डिंग बंद कर देता है। ऋणात्मक आकार को परिभाषित करने वाले शीर्षों को बाहरी आकार से विपरीत दिशा में "wind" होना चाहिए। पहले बाहरी दक्षिणावर्त क्रम के लिए शीर्ष बनाएं, फिर आंतरिक के लिए आकृतियाँ, वामावर्त में शीर्ष आकृतियाँ बनाएँ। -beginContour__description__1 = इन कार्यों का उपयोग केवल beginShape()/endShape() में किया जा सकता है। जोड़ी और रूपांतरण जैसे translate(), rotate() , और scale() एक beginContour()/ के भीतर काम नहीं करते हैं endContour() जोड़ी। अन्य आकृतियों का उपयोग करना भी संभव नहीं है, जैसे कि ellipse () या rect() भीतर। -beginShape__description__0 = beginShape() और endShape() फ़ंक्शन का उपयोग करने से और अधिक निर्माण करने की अनुमति मिलती है जटिल रूप। beginShape() एक आकृति के लिए शीर्षों को रिकॉर्ड करना शुरू करता है और endShape() रिकॉर्डिंग बंद कर देता है। प्रकार के पैरामीटर का मान यह बताता है कि दिए गए शीर्षों से किस प्रकार की आकृतियाँ बनानी हैं। बिना किसी विधा के निर्दिष्ट किए, आकार कोई भी अनियमित बहुभुज हो सकता है। -beginShape__description__1 = beginShape() के लिए उपलब्ध पैरामीटर POINTS, LINES, TRIANGLES, TRIANGLE_FAN, TRIANGLE_STRIP, QUADS, QUAD_STRIP, और TESS (केवल WebGL) हैं। कॉल करने के बाद beginShape() फ़ंक्शन, vertex() कमांड की एक श्रृंखला होनी चाहिए अनुसरण करें। आकृति बनाना बंद करने के लिए, endShape() पर कॉल करें। प्रत्येक आकृति को वर्तमान स्ट्रोक रंग से रेखांकित किया जाएगा और भरण रंग से भरा जाएगा। -beginShape__description__2 = रूपांतरण जैसे translate(), rotate(), और scale() beginShape() के भीतर काम नहीं करते। यह भी नहीं है अन्य आकृतियों का उपयोग करना संभव है, जैसे कि ellipse() या rect() के भीतर beginShape()। -bezierVertex__description__0 = बेज़ियर कर्व्स के लिए वर्टेक्स निर्देशांक निर्दिष्ट करता है। bezierVertex() के लिए प्रत्येक कॉल दो नियंत्रण बिंदुओं की स्थिति और एक बेज़ियर वक्र के एक एंकर पॉइंट को परिभाषित करता है, एक लाइन या आकार में एक नया सेगमेंट जोड़ता है। वेबजीएल मोड के लिए bezierVertex() में इस्तेमाल किया जा सकता है 2डी और साथ ही 3डी मोड। 2डी मोड 6 पैरामीटर की अपेक्षा करता है, जबकि 3डी मोड 9 पैरामीटर (जेड निर्देशांक सहित) की अपेक्षा करता है। -bezierVertex__description__1 = पहली बार bezierVertex() का उपयोग beginShape() कॉल के भीतर किया जाता है, इसे vertex()। इस फ़ंक्शन का उपयोग beginShape() और endShape() और केवल तभी जब beginShape()। -curveVertex__description__0 = वक्र के लिए शीर्ष निर्देशांक निर्दिष्ट करता है। इस फ़ंक्शन का उपयोग केवल beginShape() और endShape()के बीच किया जा सकता है और केवल तभी जब beginShape() के लिए निर्दिष्ट कोई मोड पैरामीटर न हो। WebGL मोड के लिए curveVertex() का उपयोग 2D में किया जा सकता है साथ ही 3D मोड। 2D मोड 2 पैरामीटर की अपेक्षा करता है, जबकि 3D मोड 3 पैरामीटर की अपेक्षा करता है। -curveVertex__description__1 = वक्र की शुरुआत और अंत को निर्देशित करने के लिए curveVertex() लाइनों की एक श्रृंखला में पहले और अंतिम बिंदुओं का उपयोग किया जाएगा। दूसरे और तीसरे बिंदुओं के बीच एक छोटा वक्र खींचने के लिए न्यूनतम चार बिंदुओं की आवश्यकता होती है। पांचवां जोड़ना curveVertex() के साथ बिंदु दूसरे, तीसरे और चौथे बिंदुओं के बीच वक्र खींचेगा। curveVertex() फ़ंक्शन कैटमुल-रोम स्प्लिन का कार्यान्वयन है। -endContour__description__0 = ऋण बनाने के लिए beginContour() और endContour() फ़ंक्शन का उपयोग करें अक्षर 'O' के केंद्र जैसे आकार के भीतर आकार। beginContour() आकृति के लिए शीर्षों को रिकॉर्ड करना शुरू करता है और endContour() रिकॉर्डिंग बंद कर देता है। ऋणात्मक आकार को परिभाषित करने वाले शीर्षों को बाहरी आकार से विपरीत दिशा में "wind" होना चाहिए। पहले बाहरी दक्षिणावर्त क्रम के लिए कोने बनाएं, फिर आंतरिक के लिए आकृतियाँ, वामावर्त में शीर्ष आकृतियाँ बनाएँ। -endContour__description__1 = इन कार्यों का उपयोग केवल beginShape()/endShape() में किया जा सकता है। जोड़ी और रूपांतरण जैसे translate(), rotate() , और scale() एक beginContour()/ के भीतर काम नहीं करते हैं endContour() जोड़ी। अन्य आकृतियों का उपयोग करना भी संभव नहीं है, जैसे कि ellipse () या rect() भीतर। -endShape__description__0 = endShape() फ़ंक्शन beginShape() का सहयोगी है और beginShape() के बाद ही कॉल किया जा सकता है। जब endShape() है कहा जाता है, पिछली कॉल के बाद से परिभाषित सभी छवि डेटा beginShape() को छवि बफर में लिखा जाता है। मोड पैरामीटर के मान के रूप में स्थिर बंद करें आकृति को बंद करने के लिए (शुरुआत और अंत को जोड़ने के लिए)। -quadraticVertex__description__0 = द्विघात बेज़ियर वक्रों के लिए शीर्ष निर्देशांक निर्दिष्ट करता है। quadraticVertex() के लिए प्रत्येक कॉल एक नियंत्रण बिंदु और एक Bezier वक्र के एक एंकर बिंदु की स्थिति को परिभाषित करता है, एक रेखा या आकार में एक नया खंड जोड़ता है। पहली बार quadraticVertex() का उपयोग किया जाता है एक beginShape() कॉल, इसे vertex()पर कॉल के साथ पहले से तैयार किया जाना चाहिए पहला एंकर पॉइंट सेट करने के लिए। WebGL मोड के लिए quadraticVertex() का उपयोग 2D के साथ-साथ 3D मोड में भी किया जा सकता है। 2D मोड 4 पैरामीटर की अपेक्षा करता है, जबकि 3D मोड 6 पैरामीटर (z निर्देशांक सहित) की अपेक्षा करता है। -quadraticVertex__description__1 = इस फ़ंक्शन का उपयोग beginShape() और endShape() के बीच किया जाना चाहिए और केवल तभी जब beginShape() में निर्दिष्ट कोई मोड या POINTS पैरामीटर न हो। -vertex__description__0 = सभी आकृतियों का निर्माण शीर्षों की एक श्रृंखला को जोड़कर किया जाता है। vertex() का उपयोग बिंदुओं, रेखाओं, त्रिभुजों, चतुर्भुज और के लिए शीर्ष निर्देशांक निर्दिष्ट करने के लिए किया जाता है। बहुभुज। इसका उपयोग विशेष रूप से beginShape() और endShape() में किया जाता है कार्य। -frameRate__description__0 = प्रत्येक सेकंड में प्रदर्शित होने वाले फ़्रेमों की संख्या निर्दिष्ट करता है। उदाहरण के लिए, फ़ंक्शन कॉल frameRate(30) एक सेकंड में 30 बार ताज़ा करने का प्रयास करेगा। यदि प्रोसेसर निर्दिष्ट दर को बनाए रखने के लिए पर्याप्त तेज़ नहीं है, तो फ़्रेम दर नहीं होगी हासिल किया। फ्रेम दर को setup() के भीतर सेट करने की अनुशंसा की जाती है। डिफ़ॉल्ट फ्रेम दर प्रदर्शन की फ्रेम दर पर आधारित होती है (यहां इसे " भी कहा जाता है) ताज़ा दर"), जो अधिकांश कंप्यूटरों पर 60 फ़्रेम प्रति सेकंड पर सेट है। 24 फ़्रेम प्रति सेकंड (फ़िल्मों के लिए सामान्य) या इससे अधिक की फ़्रेम दर सुचारू एनिमेशन के लिए पर्याप्त होगी। यह setFrameRate(val) के समान है। -frameRate__description__1 = कॉलिंग frameRate() बिना किसी तर्क के वर्तमान फ्रैमरेट लौटाती है। ड्रा फ़ंक्शन को मान वापस करने से पहले कम से कम एक बार चलना चाहिए। यह वही है getFrameRate() के रूप में। -frameRate__description__2 = frameRate() को ऐसे तर्कों के साथ कॉल करना जो संख्याओं के प्रकार के नहीं हैं या जो सकारात्मक नहीं हैं, वर्तमान फ्रैमरेट भी लौटाते हैं। -displayWidth__description__0 = सिस्टम वैरिएबल जो डिफ़ॉल्ट pixelDensity के अनुसार स्क्रीन डिस्प्ले की चौड़ाई को स्टोर करता है। इसका उपयोग किसी भी डिस्प्ले साइज पर फुल-स्क्रीन प्रोग्राम चलाने के लिए किया जाता है। वास्तविक स्क्रीन आकार वापस करने के लिए, इसे पिक्सेल घनत्व से गुणा करें। -displayHeight__description__0 = सिस्टम वैरिएबल जो डिफ़ॉल्ट pixelDensity के अनुसार स्क्रीन डिस्प्ले की ऊंचाई को स्टोर करता है। इसका उपयोग किसी भी डिस्प्ले साइज पर फुल-स्क्रीन प्रोग्राम चलाने के लिए किया जाता है। वास्तविक स्क्रीन आकार वापस करने के लिए, इसे पिक्सेल घनत्व से गुणा करें। -windowResized__description__0 = windowResized() फ़ंक्शन हर बार ब्राउज़र विंडो का आकार बदलने पर एक बार कॉल किया जाता है। कैनवास का आकार बदलने या इसके लिए कोई अन्य समायोजन करने के लिए यह एक अच्छी जगह है नई विंडो के आकार को समायोजित करें। -width__description__0 = सिस्टम वैरिएबल जो ड्रॉइंग कैनवास की चौड़ाई को स्टोर करता है। यह मान createCanvas() फ़ंक्शन के पहले पैरामीटर द्वारा सेट किया गया है। उदाहरण के लिए, फ़ंक्शन कॉल createCanvas(320, 240) चौड़ाई चर को मान 320 पर सेट करता है। चौड़ाई का मान डिफ़ॉल्ट रूप से 100 हो जाता है यदि createCanvas() का उपयोग नहीं किया जाता है कार्यक्रम। -height__description__0 = सिस्टम वैरिएबल जो ड्राइंग कैनवास की ऊंचाई को स्टोर करता है। यह मान createCanvas() फ़ंक्शन के दूसरे पैरामीटर द्वारा सेट किया गया है। उदाहरण के लिए, फ़ंक्शन कॉल createCanvas(320, 240) ऊंचाई चर को 240 मान पर सेट करता है। ऊंचाई का मान डिफ़ॉल्ट रूप से 100 हो जाता है यदि createCanvas() का उपयोग नहीं किया जाता है कार्यक्रम। -fullscreen__description__0 = यदि तर्क दिया गया है, तो तर्क के मूल्य के आधार पर स्केच को पूर्णस्क्रीन पर सेट करता है या नहीं। यदि कोई तर्क नहीं दिया जाता है, तो वर्तमान पूर्णस्क्रीन स्थिति लौटाता है। ध्यान दें कि ब्राउज़र प्रतिबंधों के कारण इसे केवल उपयोगकर्ता इनपुट पर ही कॉल किया जा सकता है, उदाहरण के लिए , माउस प्रेस पर नीचे दिए गए उदाहरण की तरह। -fullscreen__returns = बूलियन: वर्तमान पूर्ण स्क्रीन स्थिति -pixelDensity__description__0 = उच्च पिक्सेल घनत्व डिस्प्ले के लिए पिक्सेल स्केलिंग सेट करता है। डिफ़ॉल्ट रूप से पिक्सेल घनत्व प्रदर्शन घनत्व से मेल खाने के लिए सेट होता है, इसे बंद करने के लिए पिक्सेल घनत्व (1) पर कॉल करें। pixelDensity() पर कॉल करना बिना किसी तर्क के स्केच का वर्तमान पिक्सेल घनत्व लौटाता है। -displayDensity__returns = संख्या: मॉनिटर की वर्तमान पिक्सेल घनत्व -getURL__returns = स्ट्रिंग: URL -getURLPath__returns = फिक्स: पते के घटक -getURLParams__returns = ऑब्जेक्ट: URL पैरामीटर -preload__description__0 = setup() से पहले सीधे कॉल किया जाता है, preload() फ़ंक्शन है अवरुद्ध तरीके से बाहरी फ़ाइलों के एसिंक्रोनस लोडिंग को संभालने के लिए उपयोग किया जाता है। यदि एक प्रीलोड फ़ंक्शन परिभाषित किया गया है, तो setup() तब तक प्रतीक्षा करेगा जब तक कि कोई भी लोड कॉल समाप्त न हो जाए . लोड कॉल के अलावा कुछ नहीं (loadImage, loadJSON, loadFont, loadStrings, आदि) प्रीलोड फ़ंक्शन के अंदर होना चाहिए। यदि एसिंक्रोनस लोडिंग है पसंदीदा, लोड विधियों को इसके बजाय setup() या कहीं भी कॉलबैक पैरामीटर के उपयोग के साथ कॉल किया जा सकता है। -preload__description__1 = डिफ़ॉल्ट रूप से पाठ "loading..." प्रदर्शित किया जाएगा। अपना स्वयं का लोडिंग पृष्ठ बनाने के लिए, अपने पृष्ठ में आईडी "p5_loading" के साथ एक HTML तत्व शामिल करें। अधिक जानकारी यहां। -setup__description__0 = setup() फ़ंक्शन को प्रोग्राम शुरू होने पर एक बार कॉल किया जाता है। इसका उपयोग प्रारंभिक पर्यावरण गुणों जैसे स्क्रीन आकार और पृष्ठभूमि रंग को परिभाषित करने और मीडिया लोड करने के लिए किया जाता है जैसे कि प्रोग्राम शुरू होने पर इमेज और फोंट। प्रत्येक प्रोग्राम के लिए केवल एक setup() फ़ंक्शन हो सकता है और इसे इसके बाद फिर से कॉल नहीं किया जाना चाहिए प्रारंभिक निष्पादन। -setup__description__1 = ध्यान दें: setup() के अंतर्गत घोषित वैरिएबल draw() सहित अन्य कार्यों में पहुंच योग्य नहीं हैं। -draw__description__0 = setup() के बाद सीधे कॉल किया जाता है, draw() लगातार काम करता है प्रोग्राम के बंद होने तक या noLoop() कॉल किए जाने तक अपने ब्लॉक के अंदर निहित कोड की पंक्तियों को निष्पादित करता है। नोट करें यदि noLoop() को setup(), draw() में कॉल किया जाता है। रुकने से पहले एक बार निष्पादित किया जाएगा। draw() स्वचालित रूप से कॉल किया जाता है और इसे स्पष्ट रूप से कभी नहीं कहा जाना चाहिए। -draw__description__1 = इसे हमेशा noLoop(), redraw() से नियंत्रित किया जाना चाहिए और loop()। noLoop() के बाद कोड को में बंद कर देता है। draw() क्रियान्वित होने से, redraw() कोड को draw() एक बार निष्पादित करने के लिए, और loop() कोड को अंदर कर देगा draw() लगातार क्रियान्वित करना फिर से शुरू करने के लिए। -draw__description__2 = प्रत्येक सेकंड में draw() निष्पादित होने की संख्या को frameRate() से नियंत्रित किया जा सकता है समारोह। -draw__description__3 = प्रत्येक स्केच के लिए केवल एक draw() फ़ंक्शन हो सकता है, और draw()हो सकता है। मौजूद होना चाहिए यदि आप चाहते हैं कि कोड लगातार चलता रहे, या mousePressed() जैसी घटनाओं को संसाधित करने के लिए। कभी-कभी, आपके पास एक खाली हो सकता है अपने प्रोग्राम में draw() पर कॉल करें, जैसा कि ऊपर दिए गए उदाहरण में दिखाया गया है। -draw__description__4 = यह ध्यान रखना महत्वपूर्ण है कि ड्रॉइंग कोऑर्डिनेट सिस्टम प्रत्येक -createCanvas__description__0 = दस्तावेज़ में एक कैनवास तत्व बनाता है, और इसके आयामों को पिक्सेल में सेट करता है। इस विधि को सेटअप के प्रारंभ में केवल एक बार कॉल किया जाना चाहिए। createCanvasको कॉल करना एक स्केच में एक से अधिक बार बहुत अप्रत्याशित व्यवहार होगा। यदि आप एक से अधिक ड्राइंग कैनवास चाहते हैं तो आप createGraphics का उपयोग कर सकते हैं (डिफ़ॉल्ट रूप से छिपा हुआ लेकिन यह दिखाया जा सकता है)। -createCanvas__description__1 = महत्वपूर्ण नोट: 2D मोड में (अर्थात जब
p5.Renderer सेट नहीं है) मूल (0,0) स्क्रीन के ऊपर बाईं ओर स्थित है। 3D मोड में (अर्थात जब p5.Renderer WEBGL पर सेट है), मूल कैनवास के केंद्र में स्थित है। this issue अधिक जानकारी के लिए।
-createCanvas__description__2 = सिस्टम चर की चौड़ाई और ऊंचाई इस फ़ंक्शन को दिए गए पैरामीटर द्वारा निर्धारित की जाती है। यदि createCanvas() का उपयोग नहीं किया जाता है, तो विंडो को एक डिफ़ॉल्ट दिया जाएगा 100x100 पिक्सेल का आकार।
-createCanvas__description__3 = कैनवास को स्थान देने के और तरीकों के लिए, कैनवस की स्थिति विकी पृष्ठ देखें।
-createCanvas__returns = ऑब्जेक्ट: उत्पन्न कैनवास
-createGraphics__returns = स्क्रीन पर ग्राफिक बफर
-blendMode__description__0 = डिस्प्ले विंडो में पिक्सल को परिभाषित मोड के अनुसार ब्लेंड करता है। सोर्स पिक्सल (ए) को डिस्प्ले विंडो में पहले से मौजूद पिक्सल के साथ ब्लेंड करने के लिए निम्नलिखित मोड का विकल्प है: -
BLEND- रंगों का रैखिक प्रक्षेप: C = A*factor + B. यह डिफ़ॉल्ट सम्मिश्रण मोड है। ADD- A और B का योगडार्केस्ट- केवल सबसे गहरा रंग सफल होता है: C = min(A*factor, B).सबसे हल्का- केवल सबसे हल्का रंग सफल होता है: C = max(A*factor, B).DIFFERENCE- अंतर्निहित छवि से रंगों को घटाएं। < li>
EXCLUSION - DIFFERENCE के समान, लेकिन कम चरम।MULTIPLY - रंगों को गुणा करें, परिणाम हमेशा होगा गहरा।SCREEN - विपरीत गुणा, रंगों के व्युत्क्रम मानों का उपयोग करता है।REPLACE - पिक्सल पूरी तरह से दूसरों की जगह लेते हैं और अल्फ़ा (पारदर्शिता) मानों का उपयोग न करें।REMOVE - A के अल्फा स्ट्रेंथ के साथ B से पिक्सेल निकालता है।Overlay - MULTIPLY का मिश्रण और <कोड>स्क्रीन । डार्क वैल्यू को गुणा करता है, और लाइट वैल्यू को स्क्रीन करता है। (2D)HARD_LIGHT - SCREEN जब ५०% से अधिक ग्रे, MULTIPLY जब निचला। (2D)SOFT_LIGHT - DARKEST और LIGHTEST का मिश्रण। OVERLAY की तरह काम करता है, लेकिन उतना कठोर नहीं। (2D) DODGE - हल्के टोन को हल्का करता है और कंट्रास्ट को बढ़ाता है, अंधेरे को नज़रअंदाज़ करता है। (2D)BURN - गहरे रंग के क्षेत्र लगाए जाते हैं, कंट्रास्ट को बढ़ाते हुए, रोशनी को नज़रअंदाज़ किया जाता है। (2D)सबट्रैक्ट - A और B के शेष (3D)온라인 p5 에디터에서는 콘솔이 코트 에디터 바로 밑에 고정되어 있습니다. -log__params__message = 문자열|Expression|객체: 콘솔에 프린트하고 싶은 메세지 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Amplitude.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Amplitude.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.AudioIn.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.AudioIn.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.AudioVoice.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.AudioVoice.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.BandPass.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.BandPass.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Camera.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Camera.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index 9807f74b68..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Camera.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = p5의 WebGL 모드용 카메라를 위한 클래스입니다. 3D씬 렌더링에 필요한 카메라 위치, 방향, 투영 정보 등을 포함합니다. -description__1 = createCamera()로 새로운 p5.Camera 객체를 생성하고, 아래의 메소드들을 통해 이를 제어할 수 있습니다. 이러한 방식으로 생성된 카메라는, 여타 메소드들을 통해 변경하지 않는 한, 화면에 기본값으로 설정된 위치 및 투시 투영법을 사용합니다. 여러 대의 카메라 생성 또한 가능한데, 이 경우 setCamera() 메소드로 현재 카메라를 설정할 수 있습니다. -description__2 = 참고: 아래의 메소드들은 다음 2개의 좌표계에서 작동합니다: 월드 좌표계는 X,Y,Z축 상의 원점에 대한 위치를 나타내는 반면, 로컬 좌표계는 카메라 시점에서의 위치(좌-우, 위-아래, 앞-뒤)를 나타냅니다. move() 메소드는 카메라의 자체 축을 따라 움직이는 반면, setPosition()은 월드 공간에서의 카메라의 위치를 설정합니다. -description__3 = 카메라 객체의 속성인
eyeX, eyeY, eyeZ, centerX, centerY, centerZ, upX, upY, upZ 은 카메라 위치, 화면방향, 투영을 지정하며, createCamera() 함수를 통해 형성된 카메라 객체에도 찾을 수 있습니다.
-params__rendererGL = RendererGL: WebGL 렌더러의 인스턴스
-eyeX__description__0 = x 축에 있는 카메라 위치 값
-eyeY__description__0 = y 축에 있는 카메라 위치 값
-eyeZ__description__0 = z 축에 있는 카메라 위치 값
-centerX__description__0 = 스케치의 중심을 표시하는 x 좌표
-centerY__description__0 = 스케치의 중심을 표시하는 y 좌표
-centerZ__description__0 = 스케치의 중심을 표시하는 z 좌표
-upX__description__0 = 카메라의 '위' 방향을 표시하는 x 구성요소
-upY__description__0 = 카메라의 '위' 방향을 표시하는 y 구성요소
-upZ__description__0 = 카메라의 '위' 방향을 표시하는 z 구성요소
-perspective__description__0 = p5.Camera 객체의 투시 투영법을 설정하고, perspective() 구문에 따라 해당 투영법의 매개변수를 설정합니다.
-ortho__description__0 = p5.Camera 객체의 직교 투영법을 설정하고, ortho() 구문에 따라 해당 투영법의 매개변수를 설정합니다.
-frustum__description__0 = 주어진 매개변수로 퍼스펙티브 매트릭스 (perspective matrix)를 만듧니다.
-frustum__description__1 = frustum은 피라미드 모양의 상단을 바닥과 평행한 면에서 잘라낸 기하학적 모양입니다. 이 피라미드의 위에 보는 사람의 눈이 있다 가정하면서 여섯 면은 장면의 특정 부분만 렌더링하는데에 쓰이는 가상의 면인 clipping plane입니다. 3D로 렌더링 할 시, 이 여섯 면 안에 있는 물체는 보이며, 그 바깥에 있는 물체는 보이지 않습니다. 이 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-doubleClicked__description__0 = .doubleClicked() 함수는 요소 위에서 마우스 버튼을 빠르게 두 번 클릭할 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 행동 특정적 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-doubleClicked__returns = p5.Element:
-doubleClicked__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 마우스를 요소 위에서 더블클릭 할 때 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-mouseWheel__description__0 = .mouseWheel() 함수는 요소 위에서 마우스 휠을 스크롤 할 때마다 한 번싹 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-mouseWheel__description__1 = 이 함수에서는 콜백 함수를 인수로서 사용할 수 있습니다. 그 경우, 요소 위에서 휠 이벤트가 발생할 때마다 콜백 함수가 하나의 event 인수로서 전달됩니다. event.deltaY 속성은 마우스 휠이 위쪽으로 회전하거나 사용자로부터 멀어지면 음수값을 반환하고, 그 반대 방향에선 양수값을 반환합니다. event.deltaX 속성은 마우스 가로 휠 스크롤을 읽는다는 점을 제외하고 event.deltaY와 동일하게 작동합니다.
-mouseWheel__description__2 =
-mouseWheel__description__3 =
-mouseWheel__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 마우스를 요소 위에서 스크롤 할 때 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-mouseReleased__description__0 = .mouseReleased() 함수는 요소 위에서 마우스 버튼을 놓을 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 터치 스크린 기반의 모바일 브라우저에서는 손가락 탭을 통해 이벤트가 발생합니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-mouseReleased__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 마우스를 요소 위에서 버튼이 놓일 때 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-mouseClicked__description__0 = .mouseClicked() 함수는 요소 위에서 마우스 버튼을 클릭한 뒤 놓을 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 터치 스크린 기반의 모바일 브라우저에서는 손가락 탭을 통해 이벤트가 발생합니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-mouseClicked__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 마우스를 요소 위에서 클릭 할 때 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-mouseMoved__description__0 = .mouseMoved() 함수는 마우스가 요소 위에서 움직일 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-mouseMoved__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 마우스를 요소 위에서 움직일 때 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-mouseOver__description__0 = .mouseOver() 함수는 마우스가 요소 위에 올라올 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-mouseOver__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 마우스를 요소 위로 움직일 때 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-mouseOut__description__0 = .mouseOut() 함수는 마우스가 요소 위에서 벗어날 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-mouseOut__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 마우스를 요소 위에서부터 다른 곳으로 움직일 때 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-touchStarted__description__0 = .touchStarted() 함수는 터치가 등록될 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-touchStarted__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 터치가 등록될 때마다 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-touchMoved__description__0 = .touchMoved() 함수는 터치 움직임이 등록될 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-touchMoved__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 터치 움직임이 등록될 때마다 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-touchEnded__description__0 = .touchEnded() 함수는 터치의 끝이 등록될 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-touchEnded__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 터치의 끝이 등록될 때마다 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-dragOver__description__0 = .dragOver() 함수는 요소 위에 파일을 드래그할 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-dragOver__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 요소 위에 파일을 드래그할 때마다 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-dragLeave__description__0 = .dragLeave() 함수는 드래그된 파일이 요소 영역을 벗어날 때마다 한 번씩 호출됩니다. 요소에 이벤트 리스너를 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다.
-dragLeave__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 드래그된 파일이 요소 영역을 벗어날 때마다 호출 될 함수. 대신 false을 사용할 시, 함수호출은 중지됩니다.
-addClass__description__0 = 요소에 특정 클래스를 추가합니다.
-addClass__params__class = 문자열: 추가할 클래스의 이름
-removeClass__description__0 = 요소로부터 특정 클래스를 제거합니다.
-removeClass__params__class = 문자열: 삭제할 클래스의 이름
-hasClass__description__0 = 요소에 이미 클래스가 설정되어 있는지 확인합니다.
-hasClass__returns = 불리언: 요소가 클래스가 있는 여부
-hasClass__params__c = 문자열: 확인할 클래스의 이름
-toggleClass__description__0 = 요소 클래스를 토글합니다.
-toggleClass__params__c = 문자열: 토글할 클래스의 이름
-child__description__0 = 지정된 부모 클래스에 요소를 자식으로서 연결합니다. 문자열 ID, DOM 노드, 또는 p5.Element를 허용합니다. 별도의 인수가 지정되지 않을 경우, 자식 DOM 노드 배열이 반환됩니다.
-child__returns = 노드 배열[]: 자식 노드의 배열
-child__params__child = 문자열|p5.Element: (선택 사항) 본 객체애 연결할 객체의 ID, 문서 객체 모델 (DOM) 노드, 또는 p5.Element
-center__description__0 = p5 Element를 수직으로, 수평으로, 또는 수직 및 수평으로 가운데 정렬합니다. 별도로 지정한 부모가 있는 경우 부모를 기준으로, 부모가 없는 경우 그 자신을 기준으로 합니다. 별도로 지정한 인수가 없으면 요소는 수직 및 수평으로 정렬됩니다.
-center__params__align = 문자열: (선택 사항) 'vertical' 또는 'horizontal'로 요소를 수직 또는 수평적으로 정렬합니다
-html__description__0 = 사용자가 별도로 지정한 인수로서 요소의 내부 HTML을 설정하며, 기존의 모든 HTML를 대체합니다. 참(true)이 그 2번째 인수로서 포함된 경우, 기존의 모든 HTML을 대체하는 대신 새로운 HTML을 추가(append)합니다. 별도로 지정한 인수가 없으면 요소의 내부 HTML을 반환합니다.
-html__returns = 문자열: 요소의 내부 HTML 요소
-html__params__html = 문자열: (선택 사항) 요소 안에 설정할 HTML
-html__params__append = 불리언: (선택 사항) 새로 입력한 HTML을 추가 (false의 경우 기존 HTML을 덮어 씁니다)
-position__description__0 = 요소의 위치를 설정합니다. 별도로 지정한 위치 유형 인수가 없는 경우, 화면창의 (0,0)을 기준으로 합니다. 기본적으로, 이 메소드를 통해 position:absolute와 left 및 top 스타일 속성을 설정합니다. 선택적으로, 3번째 인수를 통해 x 및 y 좌표의 위치 지정 체계를 설정할 수 있습니다. 별도로 지정한 인수가 없으면 함수는 요소의 x와 y의 위치를 반환합니다.
-position__returns = 객체: 요소의 위치를 나타내는 {"{"} x: 0, y: 0 {"}"} 형식의 객체
-position__params__x = 숫자: (선택 사항) 윈도우 왼쪽 위 기준으로한 x 위치
-position__params__y = 숫자: (선택 사항) 윈도우 왼쪽 위 기준으로한 y 위치
-position__params__positionType = 문자열: static, fixed, relative, sticky, initial 또는 inherit
-style__description__0 = 별도 지정한 값(2번째 인수)으로 CSS 스타일 속성(1번째 인수)을 설정합니다. 1개의 인수만 지정할 경우, .style()은 주어진 속성의 값을 반환합니다. 그러나 이 인수를 CSS 구문('text-align:center')으로 작성할 경우, .style()은 CSS를 설정합니다.
-style__returns = 문자열: 속성의 값
-style__params__property = 문자열: 설정할 속성
-style__params__value = 문자열|p5.Color: 속성에 설정할 값
-attribute__description__0 = 사용자가 지정한 요소에 새 속성을 추가하거나, 요소의 기존 속성값을 변경합니다. 별도로 지정한 값이 없는 경우 주어진 속성의 값을 반환하고, 속성이 설정되지 않은 경우 null을 반환합니다.
-attribute__returns = 문자열: 속성의 값
-attribute__params__attr = 문자열: 설정할 속성
-attribute__params__value = 문자열: 설정할 속성값
-removeAttribute__description__0 = 요소로부터 속성을 제거합니다.
-removeAttribute__params__attr = 문자열: 삭제할 속성
-value__description__0 = 별도로 지정한 인수가 없는 경우, 요소의 값을 반환하거나 설정합니다.
-value__returns = 문자열|숫자: 요소의 값
-value__params__value = 문자열|숫자
-show__description__0 = 현재 요소를 보여줍니다. display:block로 스타일을 설정합니다.
-hide__description__0 = 현재 요소를 숨깁니다. display:none으로 스타일을 설정합니다.
-size__description__0 = 요소의 너비와 높이를 설정합니다. AUTO는 한 번에 한 개의 수치를 조정하는 데에 쓰입니다. 별도로 지정한 인수가 없는 경우, 객체 속 요소의 너비와 높이를 반환합니다. 이미지 파일과 같이 불러오기가 필요한 요소의 경우, 불러오기가 완료된 후 함수를 호출하는 것을 권장합니다.
-size__returns = 객체: 객체 안 요소의 너비와 높이
-size__params__w = 숫자|상수: 요소의 너비 - AUTO, 또는 숫자
-size__params__h = 숫자|상수: (선택 사항) 요소의 높이 - AUTO, 또는 숫자
-remove__description__0 = 요소를 제거하고, 모든 미디어 스트림을 중지하며, 모든 리스너를 해제합니다.
-drop__description__0 = 요소에 드롭된 파일이 로드될 때마다 호출되는 콜백을 등록합니다. p5는 메모리에 드롭된 모든 파일을 로드하고 이를 p5.File 객체로서 콜백에 전달합니다. 동시에 여러 파일을 드롭할 경우, 콜백이 여러 번 호출됩니다. 선택적으로, raw 드롭 이벤트에 등록될 2번째 콜백을 전달할 수 있습니다.
-drop__description__1 = 이 경우, 콜백에 본래 DragEvent도 제공됩니다. 동시에 여러 파일을 드롭하면 2번째 콜백이 드롭당 한 번씩 발생하며, 1번째 콜백은 로드된 파일당 한 번씩 발생합니다.
-drop__params__callback = 함수: 로딩된 파일을 사용할 콜백 함수. 파일이 드롭될 때마다 호출됩니다.
-drop__params__fxn = 함수: (선택 사항) 파일들이 드롭될 경우 단 한번만 호출될 콜백 함수.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Envelope.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Envelope.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.FFT.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.FFT.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.File.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.File.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 5dcab1a7d6..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.File.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = 파일을 위한 기본 클래스입니다. Element.drop()과 createFileInput()에 사용됩니다.
-params__file = 파일: 래핑된 파일
-file__description__0 = 기본 파일 객체. 모든 일반 File 메소드를 호출할 수 있습니다.
-type__description__0 = 파일 유형 (이미지, 텍스트 등)
-subtype__description__0 = 파일 하위 유형 (주로 jpg, png, xml 등의 파일 확장자)
-name__description__0 = 파일명
-size__description__0 = 파일 크기
-data__description__0 = 이미지 데이터를 담는 URL 문자열
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Filter.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Filter.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Font.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Font.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e41680804d..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Font.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = 폰트 조정을 위한 기본 클래스
-params__pInst = P5: (선택 사항) p5 인스턴스 포인터
-font__description__0 = 기본 개방형 글꼴 구현
-textBounds__description__0 = 이 폰트로 지정된 텍스트 문자열에 대한 바운딩 박스를 반환합니다. (현재 텍스트 한 줄씩만 지원합니다.)
-textBounds__returns = 객체: x, y, w, h의 속성을 가진 직사각형의 객체
-textBounds__params__line = 문자열: 텍스트 한 줄
-textBounds__params__x = 숫자: x 위치
-textBounds__params__y = 숫자: y 위치
-textBounds__params__fontSize = 숫자: (선택 사항) 사용할 폰트의 크기. 기본값은 12.
-textBounds__params__options = 객체: (선택 사항) OTF (OpenType Font) 파일의 설정 옵션. OpenType 폰트는 정렬과 기준 선 (baseline) 옵션이 있습니다. 기본값은 'LEFT'와 'alphabetic'입니다.
-textToPoints__description__0 = 지정된 텍스트 경로를 따르는 점들의 배열을 계산합니다.
-textToPoints__params__txt = 문자열: 텍스트 한 줄
-textToPoints__params__x = 숫자: x 위치
-textToPoints__params__y = 숫자: y 위치
-textToPoints__params__fontSize = 숫자: (선택 사항) 사용할 폰트의 크기. 기본값은 12.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Gain.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Gain.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Geometry.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Geometry.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index ec54fb4665..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Geometry.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = p5 기하 클래스
-params__detailX = 정수: (선택 사항) 수평 표면 위의 꼭짓점 개수
-params__detailY = 정수: (선택 사항) 수직 표면 위의 꼭짓점 개수
-params__callback = 함수: 객체를 인스턴스화할 때 호출할 함수
-computeFaces__description__0 = 꼭짓점 기준으로 도형의 면들을 생성합니다.
-computeNormals__description__0 = 꼭짓점 당 부드러운 법선을 각 면의 평균으로서 만듧니다.
-averageNormals__description__0 = 꼭짓점 법선의 평균을 구합니다. 곡면에 사용됩니다.
-averagePoleNormals__description__0 = 극점 법선의 평균을 구합니다. 구형의 기초 조형에 사용됩니다.
-normalize__description__0 = 모든 꼭짓점이 -100부터 100사이의 중심에 오도록 수정합니다.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Graphics.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Graphics.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 7136c9328d..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Graphics.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = 렌더러을 둘러싼 얇은 래퍼(wrapper)로, 그래픽 버퍼 객체를 생성하는 데에 사용합니다. 화면 밖 그래픽 버퍼에 그리려면 이 클래스를 사용합니다. 2개의 매개변수는 너비와 높이를 픽셀 단위로 지정합니다. 이 클래스의 필드와 메소드는 확장성이 있으나, p5를 위한 일반적인 그리기 API를 반영합니다. p5.Element를 확장합니다.
-params__w = 숫자: 너비값
-params__h = 숫자: 높이값
-params__renderer = 상수: 사용할 렌더러, P2D 또는 WEBGL
-params__pInst = P5: (선택 사항) p5 인스턴스에 대한 포인터
-reset__description__0 = 그래픽 버퍼 객체로 자동 재설정되지 않은 특정값들(예: 레퍼런스 중 변형(Transform) 또는 조명(Light) 항목에 해당하는 함수들로서 지정된 값들). 이 메소드를 draw() 함수 안에서 호출하면, 기본 캔버스의 행위를 복제합니다.
-remove__description__0 = 페이지에서 그래픽 객체를 제거하고 이 객체에 연결된 모든 소스들을 연결 해제합니다.
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.HighPass.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.HighPass.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Image.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Image.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.LowPass.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.LowPass.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.MediaElement.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.MediaElement.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index 5dd76fd98f..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.MediaElement.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = 오디오/비디오 처리를 위해 p5.Element를 확장합니다. p5.Element의 메소드 뿐 아니라, 미디어 제어를 위한 메소드도 포함합니다. p5.MediaElements는 직접 호출되지 않지만, createVideo, createAudio, CreateCapture 호출을 통해 생성됩니다.
-params__elt = 문자열: 래핑된 DOM 노드
-src__description__0 = 미디어 요소 소스 경로
-src__returns = 문자열: 소스
-play__description__0 = HTML5 미디어 요소를 재생합니다.
-stop__description__0 = HTML5 미디어 요소를 중지합니다. (현재 시간을 0으로 설정)
-pause__description__0 = HTML5 미디어 요소를 일시정지합니다.
-loop__description__0 = HTML5 미디어 요소의 반복을 참(true)로 설정하고, 재생 시작합니다.
-noLoop__description__0 = HTML5 미디어 요소의 반복을 거짓(false)으로 설정합니다. 종료 시점에 도달하면 요소가 중지합니다.
-autoplay__description__0 = HTML5 미디어 요소 자동재생 여부 설정
-autoplay__params__shouldAutoplay = 불리언: 요소의 자동재생 여부
-volume__description__0 = HTML5 미디어 요소의 볼륨을 설정합니다. 별도로 지정한 인수가 없으면, 현재 볼륨을 반환합니다.
-volume__returns = 숫자: 현재 볼륨
-volume__params__val = 숫자: 0.0과 1.0 사이의 볼륨
-speed__description__0 = 별도로 지정한 인수가 없으면, 요소의 현재 재생 속도를 반환하빈다. 속도 매개변수는 2.0일 때 2배속으로, 0.5일 때 0.5배속으로, -1일 때 정상 속도로 역재생합니다. (모든 브라우저가 역재생을 지원하지 않으며, 일부 지원 브라우저에서도 부드럽게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다.)
-speed__returns = 숫자: 요소의 현재 재생 속도
-speed__params__speed = 숫자: 배속도 매개변수
-time__description__0 = 별도로 지정한 인수가 없을 경우, 요소의 현재 시간을 반환합니다. 인수가 지정될 경우, 요소의 현재 시간이 해당 인수로 설정됩니다.
-time__returns = 숫자: 현재 시간 (초)
-time__params__time = 숫자: 설정할 시간 (초)
-duration__description__0 = HTML5 미디어 요소의 지속 시간을 반환합니다.
-duration__returns = 숫자: 지속 시간
-onended__description__0 = 오디오/비디오 요소가 종료 시점에 도달할 때 호출할 이벤트를 예약합니다. 요소가 반복하는 경우 호출되지 않습니다. 요소는 oneded 콜백에 인수로 전달됩니다.
-onended__params__callback = 함수: 오디오/비디오 요소가 끝났을 때 호출될 함수. 요소는 콜백 함수의 인자값으로 지정됩니다.
-connect__description__0 = 요소가 출력한 오디오를 특정 audioNode나 p5.sound 객체로 보냅니다. 요소가 없는 경우, p5의 마스터 출력에 연결합니다. 모든 연결은 .disconnect() 메소드로 제거할 수 있습니다.
-connect__description__1 = p5.sound.js 추가적 라이브러리로 이러한 방법을 사용할 수 있습니다.
-connect__params__audioNode = AudioNode|객체: 웹 오디오 API의 AudioNode, 또는 p5.sound 라이브러리의 객체
-disconnect__description__0 = 마스터 출력을 비롯하여 모든 웹 오디오 라우팅을 분리합니다. 사용 예: 오디오 효과를 통해 출력을 다시 라우팅할 때
-showControls__description__0 = 웹 브라우저가 지정한 기본 미디어 요소(MediaElement) 컨트롤을 나타냅니다.
-hideControls__description__0 = 기본 미디어 요소(MediaElement) 컨트롤을 숨깁니다.
-addCue__description__0 = 오디오/비디오와 같은 미디어 요소(MediaElement)가 재생 큐 지점에 도달할 때 발생할 이벤트를 예약합니다.
-addCue__description__1 = 콜백 함수, 콜백이 발생할 시간(초 단위), 콜백에 대한 선택적 매개변수를 허용합니다.
-addCue__description__2 = 첫 번째 매개변수는 시간(time)을, 두 번째 매개변수는 param을 콜백 함수에 전달합니다.
-addCue__returns = 숫자: 큐의 ID. removeCue(id) 함수에 유용함.
-addCue__params__time = 숫자: 요소에 대한 초 단위의 시산. 예를 들어, 2초마다 이벤트를 발생시킬 시, 숫자 '2'를 인자값으로 합니다. 이 숫자는 콜백 함수의 첫 매개변수로 전달됩니다.
-addCue__params__callback = 함수: 호출될 함수. 콜백 함수는 매개변수로 'time'과 'param'을 받습니다.
-addCue__params__value = 객체: (선택 사항) 콜백 함수에 전달될 객체.
-removeCue__description__0 = ID를 기반으로 콜백을 제거합니다. ID는 addCue 메소드로 반환됩니다.
-removeCue__params__id = 숫자: addCue에서 반환되는 cue의 ID
-clearCues__description__0 = addCue 메소드로 예약된 모든 콜백을 제거합니다.
-clearCues__params__id = 숫자: addCue에서 반환되는 cue의 ID
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.MonoSynth.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.MonoSynth.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Noise.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Noise.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29bb2..0000000000
diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.NumberDict.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.NumberDict.ftl
deleted file mode 100644
index b75d08c5ec..0000000000
--- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.NumberDict.ftl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-description__0 = 숫자를 위한 간단한 사전 클래스p5.TypedDict를 확장합니다. -add__description__0 = 특정 키에 현재 저장된 값에 사용자가 지정한 숫자를 더하고, 그 결과값은 사전 안에 저장되어있던 기존값을 대체합니다. -add__params__Key = 숫자: 숫자를 더하고 싶은 키 -add__params__Number = 숫자: 값에 더할 숫자 -sub__description__0 = 특정 키에 현재 저장된 값에서 사용자가 지정한 숫자를 빼고, 그 결과값은 사전 안에 저장되어있던 기존값을 대체합니다. -sub__params__Key = 숫자: 숫자를 뻬고 싶은 키 -sub__params__Number = 숫자: 값에서 뺄 숫자 -mult__description__0 = 특정 키에 현재 저장된 값에 사용자가 지정한 숫자를 곱하고, 그 결과값은 사전 안에 저장되어있던 기존값을 대체합니다. -mult__params__Key = 숫자: 숫자를 곱하고 싶은 키 -mult__params__Amount = 숫자: 값에 곱할 숫자 -div__description__0 = 특정 키에 현재 저장된 값을 사용자가 지정한 숫자로 나누고, 그 몫은 사전 안에 저장되어있던 기존값을 대체합니다. -div__params__Key = 숫자: 숫자로 나누고 싶은 키 -div__params__Amount = 숫자: 값으로부터 나눌 숫자 -minValue__description__0 = 사전 안에 현재 저장된 값들 중 가장 낮은 숫자를 반환합니다. -minValue__returns = 숫자: 가장 낮은 숫자 -maxValue__description__0 = 사전 안에 현재 저장된 값들 중 가장 높은 숫자를 반환합니다. -maxValue__returns = 숫자: 가장 높은 숫자 -minKey__description__0 = 사전에서 사용된 키들 중 가장 낮은 키를 반환합니다. -minKey__returns = 숫자: 가장 낮은 키 -maxKey__description__0 = 사전에서 사용된 키들 중 가장 높은 키를 반환합니다. -maxKey__returns = 숫자: 가장 높은 키 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.OnsetDetect.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.OnsetDetect.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Oscillator.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Oscillator.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Panner3D.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Panner3D.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Part.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Part.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.PeakDetect.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.PeakDetect.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Phrase.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Phrase.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.PolySynth.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.PolySynth.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.PrintWriter.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.PrintWriter.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index 28e3e50f25..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.PrintWriter.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -params__filename = 문자열: -params__extension = 문자열: (선택 사항) -write__description__0 = PrintWriter 스트림에 데이터를 작성합니다. -write__params__data = 배열: PrintWriter가 작성할 모든 데이터 -print__description__0 = PrintWriter 스트림에 데이터를 작성하고, 마지막에 새로운 한 줄을 추가합니다. -print__params__data = 배열: PrintWriter가 프린트 할 모든 데이터 -clear__description__0 = PrintWriter 객체에 이미 작성된 데이터를 제거합니다. -close__description__0 = PrintWriter를 종료합니다. diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Pulse.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Pulse.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Renderer.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Renderer.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index 00ac1c4516..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Renderer.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = 그래픽과 렌더링의 기초되는 클래스이며, p5.js의 코어 (core)에 사용되는 기초적 API입니다. Render2D와 Renderer3D 클래스들의 부모클래스로 사용됩니다. -params__elt = 문자열: DOM 노드 -params__pInst = P5: (선택 사항) p5 인스턴스에 향한 포인터 -params__isMainCanvas = 불리언: (선택 사항) 메인 캔버스임의 여부 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Reverb.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Reverb.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SawOsc.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SawOsc.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Score.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Score.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Shader.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Shader.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index 43f80690be..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Shader.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = WebGL 모드를 위한 셰이더 클래스 -params__renderer = p5.RendererGL: 새로운 p5.Shader에 GL 문맥을 제공하는 p5.RendererGL 인스턴스 -params__vertSrc = 문자열: 버텍스 셰이더의 소스 코드 (문자열 형식) -params__fragSrc = 문자열: 프래그먼트 셰이더의 소스 코드 (문자열 형식) -setUniform__description__0 = gl.uniform 함수들을 감싸는 래퍼. uniform (셰이더의 변수)의 데이터를 셰이더에 저장하면서 타입 검증을 한 후 알맞은 함수를 호출합니다. -setUniform__params__uniformName = 문자열: 셰이더 프로그램에 있는 uniform 속성의 이름 -setUniform__params__data = 객체|숫자|불리언|숫자 배열[]: 선택한 uniform과 연관시킬 데이터; 타입은 다양합니다 (숫자 하나, 배열, 매트릭스, 또는 텍스쳐/샘플러 참고자료). diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SinOsc.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SinOsc.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SoundFile.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SoundFile.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SoundLoop.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SoundLoop.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SoundRecorder.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SoundRecorder.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SqrOsc.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.SqrOsc.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.StringDict.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.StringDict.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index 3156eab9d0..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.StringDict.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = 문자열을 위한 간단한 사전. diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Table.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Table.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index 7f9f7686e2..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Table.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = 테이블 객체는 기존의 스프레트 시트처럼 복수의 행과 열에 데이터를 저장합니다. 동적으로 새로운 테이블을 생성하거나, 기존 파일 데이터를 사용하여 생성할 수 있습니다. -params__rows = p5.TableRow 배열[]: (선택 사항) p5.TableRow 객체의 배열 -columns__description__0 = 테이블의 행명을 담는 배열. 테이블의 헤더(header)를 함께 불러올 경우, header 매개변수. -rows__description__0 = 테이블의 행을 채우는 p5.TableRow 객체의 배열. getRows() 호출과 동일한 결과를 갖습니다. -addRow__description__0 = addRow()를 사용하여 p5.Table 객체에 새로운 행 데이터를 추가할 수 있습니다. 기본값으로 빈 행이 생성됩니다. 일반적으로, TableRow 객체에 있는 새로운 행에 레퍼런스를 저장하고 (위의 예제 중 newRow 참고), set()을 사용하여 각각의 개별값을 설정합니다. p5.TableRow 객체를 매개변수로 지정할 경우, 행을 복제하여 테이블에 추가합니다. -addRow__returns = p5.TableRow: 추가된 행 -addRow__params__row = p5.TableRow: (선택 사항) 추가될 행 -removeRow__description__0 = 테이블 객체에서 행을 제거합니다. -removeRow__params__id = 정수: 제거할 행의 ID -getRow__description__0 = 지정된 p5.TableRow에 레퍼런스를 반환합니다. 반환된 레퍼런스는 지정된 행의 값을 받아오거나 설정할 때 사용할 수 있습니다. -getRow__returns = p5.TableRow: p5.TableRow 객체 -getRow__params__rowID = 정수: 찾을 행의 ID -getRows__description__0 = 테이블의 모든 행을 받아옵니다. p5.TableRow 배열들을 반환합니다. -getRows__returns = p5.TableRow 배열[]: p5.TableRow의 배열 -findRow__description__0 = 지정된 값을 포함하는 테이블 행 중 1번째 행을 검색하고, 해당 행의 레퍼런스를 반환합니다. 여러 개의 행들이 지정된 값을 포함하더라도, 오직 1번째 행만 반환됩니다. ID 또는 제목(title) 설정을 통해 검색할 열도 지정가능합니다. -findRow__returns = p5.TableRow: -findRow__params__value = 문자열: 검색할 값 -findRow__params__column = 정수|문자열: 검색할 열의 ID 또는 제목 -findRows__description__0 = 지정된 값을 포함하는 테이블 행들을 검색하고, 해당 행들의 레퍼런스를 반환합니다. 반환된 배열은 위의 예제처럼 모든 행을 반복 처리하는 데에 사용됩니다.ID 또는 제목(title) 설정을 통해 검색할 열도 지정가능합니다. -findRows__returns = p5.TableRow 배열[]: p5.TableRow의 배열 -findRows__params__value = 문자열: 검색할 값 -findRows__params__column = 정수|문자열: 검색할 열의 ID 또는 제목 -matchRow__description__0 = 지정된 정규표현식과 매칭하는 테이블 행 중 1번째 행을 검색하고, 해당 행의 레퍼런스를 반환합니다. 반환된 배열은 모든 행을 반복 처리하는 데에 사용됩니다. ID 또는 제목(title) 설정을 통해 검색할 열도 지정가능합니다. -matchRow__returns = p5.TableRow: p5.TableRow 객체 -matchRow__params__regexp = 문자열|RegExp: 검색할 정규표현식 -matchRow__params__column = 문자열|정수: 검색할 열의 ID 또는 제목 -matchRows__description__0 = 지정된 정규표현식과 매칭하는 테이블 행들을 검색하고, 해당 행들의 배열을 반환합니다. 반환된 배열은 모든 행을 반복 처리하는 데에 사용됩니다. ID 또는 제목(title) 설정을 통해 검색할 열도 지정가능합니다. -matchRows__returns = p5.TableRow[]: p5.TableRow의 배열 -matchRows__params__regexp = 문자열: 검색할 정규표현식 -matchRows__params__column = 문자열|정수: (선택 사항) 검색할 열의 ID 또는 제목 -getColumn__description__0 = 특정 열의 모든 값들을 가져와 배열로 반환합니다. 열은 그 ID 또는 제목(title)으로 지정가능합니다. -getColumn__returns = 배열: 열 값들의 배열 -getColumn__params__column = 문자열|숫자: 반환할 열의 ID 또는 제목 -clearRows__description__0 = 테이블로부터 모든 행을 제거합니다. 모든 행들이 제거되어도 열과 열 제목은 유지됩니다. -addColumn__description__0 = addColumn()을 사용하여 p5.Table 객체에 새로운 열 데이터를 추가할 수 있습니다. 일반적으로 열 제목을 설정하여 이후 쉽게 참조되도록 합니다. (별도의 제목을 지정하지 않는 경우, 새로운 열의 제목은 null이 됩니다.) -addColumn__params__title = 문자열: (선택 사항) 해당 열의 제목 -getColumnCount__description__0 = 테이블의 전체 열 개수를 반환합니다. -getColumnCount__returns = 정수: 테이블의 열 개수 -getRowCount__description__0 = 테이블의 전체 행 개수를 반환합니다. -getRowCount__returns = 정수: 테이블의 행 개수 -removeTokens__description__0 = 지정된 문자(또는 '토큰')을 제거합니다. 별도의 열을 지정하지 않는 경우, 모든 행과 열 속 값들이 처리됩니다. 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 참조가능합니다. -removeTokens__params__chars = 문자열: 제거할 문자들의 문자열 -removeTokens__params__column = 문자열|정수: (선택 사항) 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -trim__description__0 = 문자열 테이블 값에서 스페이스나 탭과 같은 선행 및 후행 공백을 자릅니다. 별도의 열을 지정하지 않는 경우, 모든 행과 열 속 값들이 처리됩니다. 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 참조가능합니다. -trim__params__column = 문자열|정수: (선택 사항) 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -removeColumn__description__0 = removeColumn()을 사용하여 테이블 객체로부터 특정 열을 제거합니다. 제거될 열은 그 제목(문자열) 또는 인덱스 값(정수)로 식별할 수 있습니다. removeColumn(0)은 1번째 열을, removeColumn(1)은 2번째 열을 제거합니다. -removeColumn__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -set__description__0 = 테이블 중 지정된 행과 열에 값을 저장합니다. 행은 ID로, 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -set__params__row = 정수: row ID -set__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -set__params__value = 문자열|숫자: 저장할 값 -setNum__description__0 = 테이블 중 지정된 행과 열에 실수(float)값을 저장합니다. 행은 ID로, 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -setNum__params__row = 정수: row ID -setNum__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -setNum__params__value = 숫자: 저장할 값 -setString__description__0 = 테이블 중 지정된 행과 열에 문자열 값을 저장합니다. 행은 ID로, 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -setString__params__row = 정수: row ID -setString__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -setString__params__value = 문자열: 저장할 값 -get__description__0 = 테이블 중 지정된 행과 열에 값을 받아옵니다. 행은 ID로, 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -get__returns = 문자열|숫자: 지정된 행과 열에 값 -get__params__row = 정수: 행 ID -get__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -getNum__description__0 = 이블 중 지정된 행과 열에 실수(float)값을 받아옵니다. 행은 ID로, 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -getNum__returns = 숫자: 실수값 -getNum__params__row = 정수: 행 ID -getNum__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -getString__description__0 = 테이블 중 지정된 행과 열에 문자열 값을 받아옵니다. 행은 ID로, 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -getString__returns = 문자열: 문자열 값 -getString__params__row = 정수: 행 ID -getString__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -getObject__description__0 = 모든 테이블 데이터를 받아와 객체로 반환합니다. 열 이름이 전달될 경우, 각 행 객체는 해당 속성을 제목으로 저장합니다. -getObject__returns = 객체: 테이블 객체 -getObject__params__headerColumn = 문자열: (선택 사항) 행의 제목을 정할 열의 제목/이름 -getArray__description__0 = 모든 테이블 데이터를 받아와 다차원 배열로 반환합니다. -getArray__returns = 배열: 다차원 배열 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.TableRow.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.TableRow.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index 411cef4104..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.TableRow.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = TableRow 객체는 테이블 중 열에 저장된 데이터 값들의 단일 행을 표현합니다. -description__1 = 테이블 행은 정렬된 배열과 정렬되지 않은 JSON 객체를 모두 포함합니다. -description__2 = -params__str = 문자열: (선택 사항) 구분 기호로 분리된 문자열값으로 행 채우기 -params__separator = 문자열: (선택 사항) 기본값은 쉼표 단위 구분(csv) -set__description__0 = TableRow의 지정된 열에 값을 저장합니다. 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -set__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -set__params__value = 문자열|숫자: 저장될 값 -setNum__description__0 = TableRow의 지정된 열에 실수(float)값을 저장합니다. 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -setNum__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -setNum__params__value = 숫자|문자열: 저장될 값 as a Float -setString__description__0 = TableRow의 지정된 열에 문자열 값을 저장합니다. 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -setString__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -setString__params__value = 문자열|숫자|불리언|객체: 저장될 값 -get__description__0 = TableRow의 지정된 열로부터 값을 받습니다. 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -get__returns = 문자열|숫자: -get__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -getNum__description__0 = TableRow의 지정된 열로부터 실수(float)값을 받습니다. 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -getNum__returns = 숫자: 실수 -getNum__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) -getString__description__0 = TableRow의 지정된 열로부터 문자열 값을 받습니다. 열은 ID 또는 제목으로 지정가능합니다. -getString__returns = 문자열: String -getString__params__column = 문자열|정수: 열 ID (숫자) 또는 제목 (문자열) diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.TriOsc.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.TriOsc.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index e69de29bb2..0000000000 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.TypedDict.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.TypedDict.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index c7925ad602..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.TypedDict.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,11 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = 모든 p5.Dictionary 유형을 위한 기본 클래스 입니다. 사용자가 지정한 사전(Dictionary) 클래스는 이 클래스를 상속할 수 있습니다. -size__description__0 = 사전 안에 현재 저장된 키-값(key-value) 쌍의 개수를 반환합니다. -hasKey__description__0 = 지정된 키(key)가 사전 안에 존재할 경우 참(true)을, 그렇지 않으면 거짓(false)를 반환합니다. -get__description__0 = 지정된 키에 저장된 값을 반환합니다. -set__description__0 = 지정된 키가 사전 안에 존재할 경우 연관된 값을 반환합니다. 그렇지 않으면 새로운 키-값 쌍이 추가됩니다. -create__description__0 = 새로운 키-값 쌍을 사전 안에 생성합니다. -clear__description__0 = 기존에 저장된 모든 키-값 쌍들을 사전으로부터 제거합니다. -remove__description__0 = 특정 키에 저장된 키-값 쌍을 사전으로부터 제거합니다. -print__description__0 = Dictionary에 현재 저장된 항목들의 로그를 콘솔창에 출력합니다. -saveTable__description__0 = 로컬 다운로드를 위해 사전을 CSV 파일로 변환합니다. -saveJSON__description__0 = 로컬 다운로드를 위해 사전을 JSON 파일로 변환합니다. diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Vector.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Vector.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index c9028d1e79..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.Vector.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = 2차원 및 3차원 벡터, 특히 유클리드 (기하학) 벡터를 설명하는 클래스입니다. 벡터는 크기와 방향을 모두 지닌 개체입니다. 하지만, 그 데이터 유형은 벡터의 성분(2D의 경우 x와 y, 3D의 경우 x, y, z)을 저장합니다. 크기와 방향은 각각 mag() 및 heading() 메소드를 통해 접근할 수 있습니다. -description__1 = p5.Vector는 위치, 속도, 가속을 다루는 수많은 p5.js 예제에서 사용됩니다. 예를 들어, 화면을 가로질러 움직이는 직사각형을 만들려면, 이 물체의 위치(원점에서 그 위치를 가리키는 벡터), 속도(단위 시간당 객체의 위치가 변하는 속도, 벡터로 표시), 그리고 가속도(단위 시간당 객체의 속도가 변하는 속도, 벡터로 표시)를 반드시 고려해야 합니다. -description__2 = 벡터는 그룹화된 값들을 나타냅니다. 따라서, 전통적인 덧셈/곱셈 대신, p5.Vector 클래스 내부의 벡터 수학 메소드를 사용해서 계산해야 합니다. -params__x = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 x성분 -params__y = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 y성분 -params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 z성분 -x__description__0 = 벡터의 x성분 -y__description__0 = 벡터의 y성분 -z__description__0 = 벡터의 z성분 -set__description__0 = 두 세개의 개별 변수, p5.Vector 데이터, 또는 실수(float) 배열의 값들을 사용하여 벡터의 x, y, z 성분을 설정합니다. -set__params__x = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 x 성분 -set__params__y = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 x 성분 -set__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 z 성분 -set__params__value = p5.Vector|숫자 배열[]: 설정할 벡터 -copy__description__0 = 벡터의 복사본을 가져와 p5.Vector 객체를 반환합니다. -copy__returns = p5.Vector: p5.Vector 객체의 복사본 -add__description__0 = x, y, z 성분을 벡터에 더하거나, 한 벡터를 다른 벡터에 더하거나, 또는 2개의 독립 벡터를 더합니다. 2개의 독립 벡터를 더하는 메소드는 정적 메소드에 해당하며, p5.Vector를 반환합니다. 다른 메소드들은 벡터에 직접 작용합니다. 자세한 내용을 위해서 예제를 참고할 수 있습니다. -add__params__x = 숫자: 추가할 벡터의 x 성분 -add__params__y = 숫자: (선택 사항) 추가할 벡터의 y 성분 -add__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 추가할 벡터의 z 성분 -add__params__value = p5.Vector|숫자 배열[]: 추가할 벡터 -add__params__v1 = p5.Vector: 추가할 p5.Vector -add__params__v2 = p5.Vector: 추가할 p5.Vector -add__params__target = p5.Vector: (선택 사항) 결과를 받을 벡터 -rem__description__0 = 한 벡터를 다른 벡터로 나눌 때의 나머지(remainder)를 구합니다. 자세한 내용을 위해서 예제를 참고할 수 있습니다. -rem__params__x = 숫자: 나누는 벡터의 x 성분 -rem__params__y = 숫자: 나누는 벡터의 y 성분 -rem__params__z = 숫자: 나누는 벡터의 z 성분 -rem__params__value = p5.Vector | 숫자 배열[]: 나누는 벡터 -rem__params__v1 = p5.Vector: 나누어지는 p5.Vector -rem__params__v2 = p5.Vector: 나누는 p5.Vector -sub__description__0 = x, y, z성분을 벡터에서 빼거나, 한 벡터에서 다른 벡터를 빼거나, 또는 2개의 독립 벡터를 뺍니다. 2개의 독립 벡터를 빼는 메소드는 정적 메소드에 해당하며, p5.Vector를 반환합니다. 다른 메소드들은 벡터에 직접 작용합니다. 자세한 내용은 예제를 참고할 수 있습니다. -sub__params__x = 숫자: 뺄샘할 벡터의 x 성분 -sub__params__y = 숫자: (선택 사항) 뺄샘할 벡터의 y 성분 -sub__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 뺄샘할 벡터의 z 성분 -sub__params__value = p5.Vector|숫자 배열[]: 뺄샘할 벡터 -sub__params__v1 = p5.Vector: 뺄샘할 p5.Vector -sub__params__v2 = p5.Vector: 뺄샘할 p5.Vector -sub__params__target = p5.Vector: (선택 사항) 결과를 받을 벡터 -mult__description__0 = 벡터에 스칼라를 곱합니다. 정적 메소드인 경우 새로운 p5.Vector를 생성하는 반면, 정적 메소드가 아닌 경우 벡터에 직접 작용합니다. 자세한 내용을 위해서 예제를 참고할 수 있습니다. -mult__params__n = 숫자: 벡터로 곱할 숫자 -mult__params__x = 숫자: 벡터의 x 성분에 곱할 숫자 -mult__params__y = 숫자: 벡터의 y 성분에 곱할 숫자 -mult__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 z 성분에 곱할 숫자 -mult__params__arr = 숫자 배열[]: 벡터의 성분들에 곱할 숫자 배열 -mult__params__v = p5.Vector: 원본 벡터의 성분들에 곱할 벡터 -mult__params__target = p5.Vector: (선택 사항) 결과를 받을 벡터 -mult__params__v0 = p5.Vector -mult__params__v1 = p5.Vector -div__description__0 = 벡터를 스칼라로 나눕니다. 정적 메소드인 경우 새로운 p5.Vector를 생성하는 반면, 정적 메소드가 아닌 경우 벡터에 직접 작용합니다. 자세한 내용을 위해서 예제를 참고할 수 있습니다. -div__params__n = 숫자: 벡터를 나눌 숫자 -div__params__x = 숫자: 벡터의 x 성분에 나눌 숫자 -div__params__y = 숫자: 벡터의 y 성분에 나눌 숫자 -div__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 z 성분에 나눌 숫자 -div__params__arr = 숫자 배열[]: 벡터의 성분들을 나눌 숫자 -div__params__v = p5.Vector: 원본 벡터의 성분들을 나눌 벡터 -div__params__target = p5.Vector: (선택 사항) 결과를 받을 벡터 -div__params__v0 = p5.Vector -div__params__v1 = p5.Vector -mag__description__0 = 벡터의 크기(길이)를 계산하고 그 결과를 실수(float)으로 반환합니다. (이는 수식 sqrt(x*x + y*y + z*z)과도 같습니다.) -mag__returns = 숫자: 벡터의 크기(길이) -mag__params__vecT = p5.Vector: 크기를 찾을 벡터 -magSq__description__0 = 벡터의 제곱 크기를 계산하고 그 결과를 실수(float)로 반환합니다. (이는 수식 sqrt(x*x + y*y + z*z)과도 같습니다.) 벡터를 비교하는 등의 경우에서 실제 길이를 포함하지 않으면 더 빠르게 계산됩니다. -magSq__returns = 숫자: 벡터 크기의 제곱 -dot__description__0 = 두 벡터의 내적을 계산합니다. 2개의 독립 벡터의 내적을 계산하는 메소드는 정적 메소드에 해당합니다. 자세한 내용을 위해서 예제를 참고할 수 있습니다. -dot__returns = 숫자: the dot product -dot__params__x = 숫자: 벡터의 x 성분 -dot__params__y = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 y 성분 -dot__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 z 성분 -dot__params__value = p5.Vector: 벡터의 내적 값 또는 p5.Vector 객체 -dot__params__v1 = p5.Vector: 첫 번째 p5.Vector 객체 -dot__params__v2 = p5.Vector: 두 번째 p5.Vector 객체 -cross__description__0 = 두 벡터의 외적으로 구성된 벡터를 계산하고 반환합니다. 정적 및 비정적 메소드 모두 새로운 p5.Vector를 반환합니다. 자세한 내용을 위해서 예제를 참고할 수 있습니다. -cross__returns = p5.Vector: 외적을 가진 p5.Vector 객체 -cross__params__v = p5.Vector: 외적을 구할 p5.Vector 객체 -cross__params__v1 = p5.Vector: 첫 번째 p5.Vector 객체 -cross__params__v2 = p5.Vector: 두 번째 p5.Vector 객체 -dist__description__0 = 두 점 사이의 유클리드 거리를 계산합니다 (점을 벡터 객체로 간주). -dist__returns = 숫자: 두 점 사이의 거리 -dist__params__v = p5.Vector: x, y, z 좌표를 가진 p5.Vector -dist__params__v1 = p5.Vector: 첫 번째 p5.Vector 객체 -dist__params__v2 = p5.Vector: 두 번째 p5.Vector 객체 -normalize__description__0 = 벡터를 길이 1로 정규화합니다. (단위 벡터로 만듭니다.) -normalize__returns = p5.Vector: 정규화된 p5.Vector 객체 -normalize__params__v = p5.Vector: 정규화할 벡터 -normalize__params__target = p5.Vector: (선택 사항) 결과를 받을 벡터 -limit__description__0 = 벡터의 크기를 매개변수 max의 값으로 제한합니다. -limit__params__max = 숫자: 벡터의 최댓값 -setMag__description__0 = 벡터의 크기를 매개변수 len의 값으로 제한합니다. -setMag__params__len = 숫자: 벡터의 새로운 크리 -heading__description__0 = 벡터의 회전 각도를 계산합니다. (2D 벡터만 해당) -heading__returns = 숫자: 회전 각도 -setHeading__description__0 = 벡터를 회전시킵니다 (2D 벡터만 해당. 벡터의 크기는 유지됩니다. -setHeading__params__angle = 숫자: 회전의 각도 -rotate__description__0 = 벡터를 특정 각도로 회전하되 (2D 벡터만 해당), 크기는 동일하게 유지합니다. -rotate__params__angle = 숫자: 회전의 각도 -rotate__params__v = p5.Vector -rotate__params__target = p5.Vector: (선택 사항) 결과를 받을 벡터 -angleBetween__description__0 = 두 벡터 사이의 각도 (라디안 단위)를 계산하고 반환합니다. -angleBetween__returns = 숫자: 벡터 사이의 각도 (라디안 단위) -angleBetween__params__value = p5.Vector: p5.Vector 객체의 x, y, z 성분 -lerp__description__0 = 한 벡터와 다른 벡터를 선형적으로 보간합니다. -lerp__params__x = 숫자: 벡터의 x 성분 -lerp__params__y = 숫자: 벡터의 y 성분 -lerp__params__z = 숫자: 벡터의 z 성분 -lerp__params__amt = 숫자: 보간의 정도; 0.0 (구 벡터)과 1.0 (신 벡터) 사이의 값. 0.9은 새로운 벡터에 가까운 값입니다. 0.5은 두 벡터의 정중앙입니다. -lerp__params__v = p5.Vector: 선형적 보간을 할 p5.Vector 객체 -lerp__params__v1 = p5.Vector -lerp__params__v2 = p5.Vector -lerp__params__target = p5.Vector: (선택 사항) 결과를 받을 벡터 -reflect__description__0 = 2D 선 또는 3D 평면의 법선에 들어오는 벡터를 반영합니다. 이 메소드는 벡터에 직접 작용합니다. -reflect__params__surfaceNormal = p5.Vector: 반영 법선이 될 p5.Vector 객체가 정규화됩니다. -array__description__0 = 벡터의 표현을 실수 배열로 반환합니다. 이는 일시적으로만 사용됩니다. 다른 경우에도, p5.Vector.copy() 메소드를 통해 배열에 내용을 복사해야 합니다. -array__returns = 숫자 배열[]: 3 가지 값을 가진 배열 -equals__description__0 = p5.Vector에 대한 평등 검사 -equals__returns = 불리언: 벡터의 평등함 여부 -equals__params__x = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 x 성분 -equals__params__y = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 y 성분 -equals__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 벡터의 z 성분 -equals__params__value = p5.Vector|배열: 비교할 벡터 -fromAngle__description__0 = 특정 각도에서 새로운 2D 벡터를 생성합니다. -fromAngle__returns = p5.Vector: 새로운 p5.Vector 객체 -fromAngle__params__angle = 숫자: 원하는 라디안 단위의 각도 (angleMode에 영향받지 않은 가도) -fromAngle__params__length = 숫자: (선택 사항) 새로운 벡터의 크리 (기본값은 1) -fromAngles__description__0 = 구면각 (spherical angle)의 쌍에서 새로운 3D 벡터를 생성합니다. -fromAngles__returns = p5.Vector: 새로운 p5.Vector 객체 -fromAngles__params__theta = 라디안 단위, 극각 (0는 위로 향함) -fromAngles__params__phi = 숫자: 라디안 단위, 방위각 (0은 화면 바깥에 있음) -fromAngles__params__length = 숫자: (선택 사항) 새로운 벡터의 크리 (기본값은 1) -random2D__description__0 = 임의의 각도에서 새로운 2D 단위 벡터를 생성합니다. -random2D__returns = p5.Vector: 새로운 p5.Vector 객체 -random3D__description__0 = 새로운 임의의 3D 단위 벡터를 생성합니다. -random3D__returns = p5.Vector: 새로운 p5.Vector 객체 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.XML.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.XML.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index b2c5fafe01..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.XML.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = XML은 XML 코드를 구문 분석할 수 있는 XML 객체의 표현입니다. loadXML()을 사용하여 외부 XML 파일을 불러와 XML 객체를 생성합니다. -getParent__description__0 = 요소 부모의 복사본을 가져와, 부모를 또다른 p5.XML 객체로 반환합니다. -getParent__returns = p5.XML: 부모 객체 -getName__description__0 = 요소의 전체 이름을 가져와 문자열로 반환합니다. -getName__returns = 문자열: 요소의 이름 -setName__description__0 = 문자열로 설정된 요소 이름을 지정합니다. -setName__params__the = 문자열: 요소의 새 이름 -hasChildren__description__0 = 요소의 자식 유무 여부를 확인하고, 그 결과를 불리언으로 반환합니다. -hasChildren__returns = 불리언: -listChildren__description__0 = 모든 요소의 자식 이름을 가져와 그 값들을 문자열 배열로 반환합니다. 이는 각 자식 요소마다 getName()을 호출하는 것과 동일한 효과를 갖습니다. -listChildren__returns = 문자열 배열[]: 요소의 자식요소의 배열 -getChildren__description__0 = 요소의 모든 자식을 p5.XML 객체 배열로 반환합니다. 이름 매개변수를 지정할 경우, 해당 변수명과 일치하는 모든 자식을 반환합니다. -getChildren__returns = p5.XML 배열[]: 요소의 자식 -getChildren__params__name = 문자열: (선택 사항) 요소의 이름 -getChild__description__0 = 이름 매개변수 또는 지정된 인덱스의 자식과 일치하는 요소의 1번째 자식을 반환합니다. 일치하는 자식을 찾지 못하는 경우, 'undefined'를 반환합니다. -getChild__returns = p5.XML: -getChild__params__name = 문자열|정수: 요소의 이름 또는 배열값 -addChild__description__0 = 요소에 새로운 자식을 추가합니다. 자식은 문자열로 지정될 수 있으며, 이는 새로운 태그명 또는 기존 p5.XML 객체에 대한 레퍼런스로서 사용할 수 있습니다. 새로 추가된 자식에 대한 레퍼런스는 p5.XML 객체로 반환됩니다. -addChild__params__node = p5.XML: a p5.XML 자식요소가 될 요소 또는 객체 -removeChild__description__0 = 이름 또는 인덱스로 지정된 요소를 제거합니다 -removeChild__params__name = 문자열|정수: 요소 이름 또는 배열값 -getAttributeCount__description__0 = 지정된 요소의 속성 개수를 숫자로 반환합니다. -getAttributeCount__returns = 정수: 요소의 속성 개수 -listAttributes__description__0 = 지정된 요소의 모든 속성을 가져와 문자열 배열로 반환합니다. -listAttributes__returns = 문자열 배열[]: 속성의 이름들을 담은 문자열 배열 -hasAttribute__description__0 = 요소가 지정된 속성을 갖는지 여부를 확인합니다. -hasAttribute__returns = 불리언: 속성이 있을 시 참, 없을 시 거짓 -hasAttribute__params__the = 문자열: 확인할 요소 -getNum__description__0 = 요소의 속성값을 숫자로 반환합니다. 매개변수 defaultValue가 지정되고 속성이 존재하지 않으면 defaultValue를 반환합니다. 매개변수 defaultValue가 지정되지 않고 속성이 존재하지 않으면 값 0을 반환합니다. -getNum__returns = 숫자: -getNum__params__name = 문자열: 속성의 부분적 이름 -getNum__params__defaultValue = 숫자: (선택 사항) 속성의 기본값 -getString__description__0 = 요소의 속성값을 문자열로 반환합니다. 매개변수 defaultValue가 지정되고 속성이 존재하지 않으면 'defaultValue'를 반환합니다. 매개변수 defaultValue가 지정되지 않고 속성이 존재하지 않으면 null을 반환합니다. -getString__returns = 문자열: -getString__params__name = 문자열: 속성의 부분적 이름 -getString__params__defaultValue = 숫자: (선택 사항) 속성의 기본값 -setAttribute__description__0 = 요소 속성의 내용을 설정합니다. 1번째 매개변수는 속성명을, 2번째 매개변수는 새로운 내용을 지정합니다. -setAttribute__params__name = 문자열: 속성의 부분적 이름 -setAttribute__params__value = 숫자|문자열|불리언: 속성의 값 -getContent__description__0 = 요소의 내용을 반환합니다. 매개변수 defaultValue가 지정되고 내용이 존재하지 않으면 'defaultValue'를 반환합니다. 매개변수 defaultValue가 지정되지 않고 내용이 존재하지 않으면 null을 반환합니다. -getContent__returns = 문자열: 요소의 내용 -getContent__params__defaultValue = 문자열: (선택 사항) 내용이 없을 시 반환될 문자열 -setContent__description__0 = 요소의 내용을 설정합니다. -setContent__params__text = 문자열: 새로운 내용 -serialize__description__0 = 요소를 문자열로 직렬화합니다. 요소의 내용을 http 요청으로 전송하거나 파일 저장을 준비할 때 사용됩니다. -serialize__returns = 문자열: 요소의 문자열 직렬화 diff --git a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.ftl b/src/data/localization/ko/p5.ftl deleted file mode 100644 index daa61d3023..0000000000 --- a/src/data/localization/ko/p5.ftl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1552 +0,0 @@ -description__0 = p5 인스턴스 생성자 입니다. -description__1 = p5 인스턴스는 p5 스케치와 관련된 모든 속성과 메소드(method)를 보유합니다. 도래할 스케치 클로저(closure)를 예상하고, 생성된 p5 캔버스를 노드에 연결하기 위해 선택적으로 노드 매개변수를 취할 수 있습니다. 스케치 클로저는 새로이 생성된 p5 인스턴스를 유일한 인수로 취하며, 또 선택적으로, 스케치 실행을 위해 preload(), setup(), 그리고/또는 draw() 속성을 담을 수 있습니다. -description__2 = p5 스케치는 "전역" 또는 "인스턴스" 모드에서 실행됩니다: "전역 모드" - 모든 속성과 메소드가 윈도우에 속함 "인스턴스 모드" - 모든 속성과 메소드가 특정 p5 객체에 구속됨 -returns = P5: p5 인스턴스 -params__sketch = 함수: 주어진 p5 인스턴스에 선택적으로 preload(), setup(), 그리고/또는 draw() 속성을 설정할 수 있는 클로저 -params__node = HTML Element: (선택 사항) 캔버스에 속할 요소 -describe__description__0 = 스크린리더 (Screen Reader)를 위한 캔버스의 전체적인 서술적 묘사를 설정합니다. 첫 번째 매개변수는 문자열이며, 설정할 묘사입니다. 두 번째 매개변수는 선택 사항이며, 묘사의 표시법을 지정합니다. -describe__description__1 =
describe(text, LABEL)은 설명을 모든 사용자에게 박물관 라벨/캡션을 캔버스 옆 describe(text, FALLBACK)는 설정된 묘사를 스크린리더 사용자들에게만 이용가능케 하며, 캔버스의 부가적 문서객체모델 (DOM)에 설정됩니다. 두번 째 매개변수가 없을 시, 기본적으로 묘사는 스크린리더 사용자들에게만 이용가능합니다.
-describe__params__text = 문자열: 켄버스의 설명
-describe__params__display = 상수: (선택 사항) LABEL 또는 FALLBACK
-describeElement__description__0 = 스크린리더 (Screen Reader)를 위한 캔버스의 요소(도형, 또는 도형의 모임)의 서술적 묘사를 설정합니다. 첫 번째 매개변수는 묘사할 요소의 이름입니다. 두 번째 매개변수는 문자열이며 설정할 묘사입니다. 세 번째 매개변수는 선택 사항이며, 묘사의 표시법을 지정합니다.
-describeElement__description__1 = describe(text, LABEL)은 설명을 모든 사용자에게 박물관 라벨/캡션을 캔버스 옆 칸 안에 나타냅니다. CSS를 통해서 스타일을 자유자재로 바꿀 수 있습니다.
-describeElement__description__2 = describeElement(name, text, FALLBACK)는 설정된 묘사를 스크린리더 사용자들에게만 이용가능케 하며, 캔버스의 부가적 문서객체모델 (DOM)에 설정됩니다. 두번 째 매개변수가 없을 시, 기본적으로 묘사는 스크린리더 사용자들에게만 이용가능합니다.
-describeElement__params__name = 문자열: 요소의 이름
-describeElement__params__text = 문자열: 요소의 설명 및 묘사
-describeElement__params__display = 상수: (선택 사항) LABEL 또는 FALLBACK
-textOutput__description__0 = textOutput() 함수는 스크린리더 (Screen Reader)를 위한 도형의 설명을 출력합니다. 이 설명은 자동적으로 만들어지며, 첫 부분은 캔버스의 높이 및 너비, 배경색, 그리고 캔버스상 요소 (도형, 또는 도형의 모임)의 개수를 출력합니다 (예: 'Your output is a, 400 by 400 pixels, lavender blue canvas containing the following 4 shapes:'). 다음은 각 요소의 색, 위치, 넓이 등의 정보를 출력합니다 (예: "orange ellipse at top left covering 1% of the canvas"). 각 요소에 대한 구체적 정보는 선택해서 볼 수 있습니다. 요소들의 목록이 제공됩니다. 이 목록에는 도형, 색, 위치, 좌표와 넓이가 묘사되어 있습니다 (예: "orange ellipse location=top left area=2").
-textOutput__description__1 = textOutput()과 texOutput(FALLBACK)은 출력물을 스크린리더 (Screen Reader)에 사용되는 캔버스의 부가적 문서객체모델 (DOM)에 제공합니다. textOutput(LABEL)은 캔버스 옆 추가적인 div요소를 만들고 그 안에 설명을 출력합니다. 이는 스크린리더를 사용하지 않지만 코딩하는 동안 출력물을 보면서 하고 싶어하는 유저들에게 유용합니다. 하지만 LABEL을 사용할 시 스크린리더 사용자들에게는 의미없는 중복성을 만들 수 있습니다. 그 이유로 LABEL은 스케치를 만드는 동안에만 사용하고 스케치를 출판하거나 스크린리더 사용자들에게 나누기 전에 지우는 것을 권장합니다.
-textOutput__params__display = 상수: (선택 사항) FALLBACK 또는 LABEL
-gridOutput__description__0 = gridOutput()은 캔버스의 내용물을 위치적에 따라 격자 (grid) 형식으로 나열합니다. 이 테이블을 출력하기 전에 컨버스의 전반적 설명을 출력합니다. 캔버스의 높이 및 너비, 배경색, 그리고 캔버스상 요소 (도형, 또는 도형의 모임)의 개수를 출력합니다 (예: 'Your output is a, 400 by 400 pixels, lavender blue canvas containing the following 4 shapes:'). 그리드는 내용물을 위치적으로 설명하며, 각 요소는 위치의 격자 위 셀 (cell)에 놓입니다. 각 셀에는 특정 요소의 색상과 모양이 저장되어 있습니다 (예: "orange ellipse"). 각 요소에 대한 구체적 정보는 선택해서 볼 수 있습니다. 각 요소의 모양, 색, 위치, 넓이 등의 정보가 표기되어 있는 목록 (예: "orange ellipse location=top left area=1%")도 사용 가능합니다.
-gridOutput__description__1 = gridOutput() and gridOutput(FALLBACK)은 출력물을 스크린리더 (Screen Reader)에 사용되는 캔버스의 부가적 문서객체모델 (DOM)에 제공합니다. gridOutput(LABEL)은 캔버스 옆 추가적인 div요소를 만들고 그 안에 설명을 출력합니다. 이는 스크린리더를 사용하지 않지만 코딩하는 동안 출력물을 보면서 하고 싶어하는 유저들에게 유용합니다. 하지만 LABEL을 사용할 시 스크린리더 사용자들에게는 의미없는 중복성을 만들 수 있습니다. 그 이유로 LABEL은 스케치를 만드는 동안에만 사용하고 스케치를 출판하거나 스크린리더 사용자들에게 나누기 전에 지우는 것을 권장합니다.
-gridOutput__params__display = 상수: (선택 사항) FALLBACK 또는 LABEL
-alpha__description__0 = 픽셀 배열로부터 알파값을 추출합니다.
-alpha__returns = 알파값
-alpha__params__color = p5.Color|숫자 배열[]| 문자열: p5.Color 객체, 색상 요소 또는 CSS 색상
-blue__description__0 = 색상 또는 픽셀 배열로부터 파랑값을 추출합니다.
-blue__returns = 파랑값
-blue__params__color = p5.Color 객체, 색상 요소, CSS 색상
-brightness__description__0 = 색상 또는 픽셀 배열로부터 HSB 밝기값을 추출합니다.
-brightness__returns = 밝기값
-brightness__params__color = p5.Color 객체, 색상 요소, CSS 색상
-color__description__0 = 색상 함수를 이용해 색상 데이터의 매개변수를 저장합니다. 이 때, 매개변수는 colorMode()의 설정에 따라 RGB 또는 HSB 값으로 처리됩니다. 기본 모드인 RGB값은 0부터 255까지이며, 따라서 color(255,204,0)와 같은 함수는 밝은 노랑색을 반환하게 됩니다.
-color__description__1 = 만약에 color() 함수에 매개변수가 1개만 적히면, 회색 음영(grayscale)값으로 처리됩니다. 여기에 추가되는 두번째 변수는 투명도를 설정할 수 있는 알파값으로서 처리됩니다. 세번째 변수가 추가되었을 때 비로소 RGB나 HSB값으로 처리됩니다. RGB나 HSB값을 정하는 3개의 변수가 존재할 때 추가되는 네번째 변수는 알파값으로 적용됩니다.
-color__description__2 = 나아가, p5는 RGB, RGBA, Hex CSS 색상 문자열과 모든 색상명 문자열 역시 지원합니다. 그 경우, 알파값은 괄호 내 2번째 매개변수 추가를 통해서가 아닌, RGBA 형식에 따라 지정될 수 있습니다.
-color__returns = 색상 결과
-color__params__gray = 숫자: 흑과 백 사이의 값 지정
-color__params__alpha = 숫자: 현재 색상 범위(기본값: 0-255)에 대한 알파값
-color__params__v1 = 숫자: 현재 색상 범위 내 빨강색(R) 또는 색조값 지정
-color__params__v2 = 숫자: green or saturation value relative to the current color range
-color__params__v3 = 숫자: 현재 색상 범위 내 파랑색(B) 또는 색조값 지정
-color__params__value = 문자열: 색상 문자열
-color__params__values = 숫자 배열[]: RGB 및 알파값을 포함한 숫자 배열
-color__params__color = p5.Color
-green__description__0 = 색상 또는 픽셀 배열로부터 초록값을 추출합니다.
-green__returns = 초록값
-green__params__color = p5.Color 객체, 색상 요소, CSS 색상
-hue__description__0 = 색상 또는 픽셀 배열로부터 색조를 추출합니다.
-hue__description__1 = 색조는 HSB와 HSL상 모두 존재합니다. 이 함수는 HSB 색상 객체를 사용할 경우(또는 HSB 색상 모드로 지정된 픽셀 배열을 사용할 경우) HSB로 표준화된 색조 값을 반환합니다. 기본값으로는 HSL로 표준화된 색조를 반환합니다. (단, 최대 색조를 별도 지정한 경우 다른 값을 반환합니다.)
-hue__returns = 색조
-hue__params__color = 객체, 색상 요소 또는 CSS 색상
-lerpColor__description__0 = 두 가지 색상을 혼합하고, 그 사이에 존재하는 제 3의 색상을 찾습니다. 여기서 매개변수 amt는 두 개의 값 사이를 선형적으로 보간합니다. 예를 들어, 0.0은 첫 번째 값과 동일한 색상값을, 0.1은 첫 번째 값에 매우 가까운 색상값을, 0.5는 두 값 사이의 중간 색상값을 나타내는 식입니다. 이 때, 0 미만의 값은 0으로, 1이상의 값은 1로 자동 변환됩니다. 이 점에서 lerpColor()는 lerp()와 다르게 작동하는 셈인데, 이처럼 lerpColor()는 색상값을 0과 1사이로 조정하여 지정된 범위를 벗어난 색상 생성을 방지합니다.
-lerpColor__description__1 = 색상이 보간되는 방식은 현재 지정된 색상 모드에 따라 달라집니다.
-lerpColor__returns = p5.Color: 선형적으로 보간된 색상
-lerpColor__params__c1 = 이 색상으로부터 선형 보간
-lerpColor__params__c2 = 이 색상을 향해 선형 보간
-lerpColor__params__amt = 숫자: 0과 1 사이의 숫자
-lightness__description__0 = 색상 또는 픽셀 배열로부터 HSL 명도를 추출합니다.
-lightness__returns = 숫자: 명도
-lightness__params__color = p5.Color|숫자 배열[]|문자열: p5.Color 객체, 색상 요소 또는 CSS 색상
-red__description__0 = 색상 또는 픽셀 배열로부터 빨강값을 추출합니다.
-red__returns = 숫자: 빨강값
-red__params__color = p5.Color|숫자 배열[]|문자열: p5.Color 객체, 색상 요소 또는 CSS 색상
-saturation__description__0 = 색상 또는 픽셀 배열로부터 채도값을 추출합니다. 채도값은 HSB와 HSL에서 각각 다르게 측정됩니다. 이 함수는 HSL 채도를 기본값으로 제공합니다. 하지만, HSB 색상 객체가 제공 될 때 (또는 색상 모드가 HSB이면서 픽셀 배열이 제공될 때) HSB 채도값을 반환합니다.
-saturation__description__1 = Saturation is scaled differently in HSB and HSL. This function will return the HSB saturation when supplied with an HSB color object (or when supplied with a pixel array while the color mode is HSB), but will default to the HSL saturation otherwise.
-saturation__returns = 숫자: 채도값
-saturation__params__color = p5.Color|숫자 배열[]|문자열: p5.Color 객체, 색상 요소 또는 CSS 색상
-background__description__0 = background() 함수는 p5.js 캔버스의 배경색을 설정합니다. 배경색의 기본값은 투명입니다. 이 함수는 주로 draw() 함수 안에 위치하며, 매 프레임마다 캔버스 화면을 초기화하기 위해 사용됩니다. 하지만, 애니메이션의 첫 프레임 배경을 지정하거나 배경색을 최초 한번만 지정할 경우, setup() 함수 안에 쓰이기도 합니다.
-background__description__1 = 색상은 현재 색상 모드(colorMode)에 따라 RGB, HSB, 또는 HSL값으로 지정됩니다. (기본값으로 제공되는 색상 모드는 RGB이고, 그 색상 범위는 0부터 255까지 해당합니다.) 알파값의 기본 제공 범위 역시 0부터 255까지입니다.
-background__description__2 = 단일한 문자열 인수에 대해 RGB, RGBA, Hex CSS 색상 문자열과 더불어 명명된 모든 색상 문자열이 지원됩니다. 단, 투명도인 알파값을 설정하기 위해서는 반드시 RGBA를 사용해야 합니다.
-background__description__3 = p5.Color 객체를 통해 배경색을 설정할 수 있습니다.
-background__description__4 = p5.Image를 통해 배경 이미지를 설정할 수 있습니다.
-background__params__color = p5.Color: color() 함수로 생성된 모든 값
-background__params__colorstring = 문자열, 지원되는 문자열 형식: 색상 문자열, 정수의 rgb()나 rgba(), 백분율의 rgb()나 rgba(), 3자리 숫자의 hex, 6자리 숫자의 hex
-background__params__a = 숫자: (선택 사항) 현재 색상 범위에 따른 배경색 투명도 (기본값은 0-255)
-background__params__gray = 숫자: 흑과 백 사이의 값 지정
-background__params__v1 = 숫자: 빨강값 또는 색조값 (현재 색상 모드에 따라 상이)
-background__params__v2 = 숫자: 초록값 또는 채도값 (현재 색상 모드에 따라 상이)
-background__params__v3 = 숫자: 파랑값 또는 밝기값 (현재 색상 모드에 따라 상이)
-background__params__values = 숫자 배열[]: 빨강값, 초록값, 파랑값, 알파값을 포함한 배열
-background__params__image = p5.Image: loadImage()나 createImage()로 생성된 이미지를 배경 이미지로 설정하는 경우 (스케치 화면과 반드시 동일한 사이즈일 것)
-clear__description__0 = 버퍼에 있는 픽셀들을 지우는 함수로, 오직 캔버스만 비게 됩니다. createVideo()나 createDiv()와 같은, createX()류의 메소드로 지정된 객체들을 제거하진 않습니다. 메인 그래픽이 아닌, createGraphics()로 생성된 부가적인 그래픽의 경우, 그 전체 또는 일부를 투명하게 처리할 수 있습니다. 이 함수는 모든 픽셀을 100% 투명하게 만듭니다.
-colorMode__description__0 = colorMode()는 p5.js가 색상 데이터를 해석하는 방식을 결정합니다. 기본값으로, fill(), stroke(), background(), color()의 매개변수는 RGB 색상 모드에서 처리되며, 그 범위는 0부터 255까지입니다. 이 기본값은 colorMode(RGB, 255)와 동일한 효과를 지닙니다. colorMode(HSB)로 설정을 변경하면 HSB 색상 시스템을 사용할 수 있습니다. HSB 색상 시스템은 그 기본값으로 colorMode(HSB, 360, 100, 100, 1)와 같이 설정됩니다. 색상 모드는 HSL로도 설정가능합니다.
-colorMode__description__1 = 참고: 모든 색상 객체들은 생성 당시에 지정된 색상 모드를 반영합니다. 따라서, 이미 생성된 색상 객체 중 일부에만 적용되는 색상 모드를 지정할 수도 있습니다.
-colorMode__params__mode = 상수: RGB(빨강Red/초록Green/파랑색Blue), HSB(색조Hue/채도Saturation/밝기Brightness), HSL(색조Hue/채도Saturation/명도Lightness) 중 하나
-colorMode__params__max = 숫자: (선택 사항) 모든 값들의 범위
-colorMode__params__max1 = 숫자: (선택 사항) 모든 값들의 범위
-colorMode__params__max2 = 숫자: 현재 지정된 색상 모드의 색상 범위에 따른 빨강값 또는 색조값
-colorMode__params__max3 = 숫자: 현재 지정된 색상 모드의 색상 범위에 따른 초록값 또는 채도값
-colorMode__params__maxA = 숫자: (선택 사항) 알파값의 범위
-fill__description__0 = 도형의 면을 채울 색상을 지정합니다. 예를 들어, fill(204, 102, 0) 함수를 실행하면, 이 명령어 다음에 그려진 모든 도형들이 주황색으로 칠해집니다. 이 때, 색상값은 colorMode()로 지정된 현재의 색상 모드에 따라 RGB 또는 HSB로 지정됩니다. (기본값으로 제공되는 색상 모드는 RGB이고, 그 색상 범위는 0부터 255까지 해당합니다.) 알파값의 기본 제공 범위 역시 0부터 255까지입니다.
-fill__description__1 = 단일한 문자열 인수에 대해 RGB, RGBA, Hex CSS 색상 문자열과 더불어 명명된 모든 색상 문자열이 지원됩니다. 단, 투명도인 알파값을 설정하기 위해서는 반드시 RGBA를 사용해야 합니다.
-fill__description__2 = Color 객체로도 색상을 지정할 수 있습니다.
-fill__params__v1 = 숫자: 현재 지정된 색상 모드의 색상 범위에 따른 빨강값 또는 색조값
-fill__params__v2 = 숫자: 현재 지정된 색상 모드의 색상 범위에 따른 초록값 또는 채도값
-fill__params__v3 = 숫자:현재 지정된 색상 모드의 색상 범위에 따른 파랑값 또는 밝기값
-fill__params__alpha = 숫자: (선택사항)
-fill__params__value = 문자열: 색상 문자열
-fill__params__gray = 숫자: 회색값
-fill__params__values = 숫자 배열[]: 색상의 빨강값, 초록값, 파랑값, 그리고 알파값을 포함한 배열
-fill__params__color = p5.Color: 면채우기 색상
-noFill__description__0 = 도형에 색을 채우지 않도록 설정합니다. noStroke()과 noFill()을 동시에 사용하면, 화면에 아무것도 나타나지 않습니다.
-noStroke__description__0 = 선이나 윤곽선을 그리지 않도록 설정합니다. noStroke()과 noFill()을 동시에 사용하면, 화면에 아무것도 나타나지 않습니다.
-stroke__description__0 = 그려질 선 또는 도형 윤곽선의 색상을 설정합니다. 이 때, 색상값은 colorMode()로 지정된 현재의 색상 모드에 따라 RGB 또는 HSB로 지정됩니다. (기본값으로 제공되는 색상 모드는 RGB이고, 그 색상 범위는 0부터 255까지 해당합니다.)
-stroke__description__1 = 단일한 문자열 인수에 대해 RGB, RGBA, Hex CSS 색상 문자열과 더불어 명명된 모든 색상 문자열이 지원됩니다. 단, 투명도인 알파값을 설정하기 위해서는 반드시 RGBA를 사용해야 합니다.
-stroke__description__2 = p5.Color 객체를 통해 선의 색상을 설정할 수 있습니다.
-stroke__params__v1 = 숫자: 현재 지정된 색상 모드의 색상 범위에 따른 빨강값 또는 색조값
-stroke__params__v2 = 숫자: 현재 지정된 색상 모드의 색상 범위에 따른 초록값 또는 채도값
-stroke__params__v3 = 숫자:현재 지정된 색상 모드의 색상 범위에 따른 파랑값 또는 밝기값
-stroke__params__alpha = 숫자: (선택사항)
-stroke__params__value = 문자열: 색상 문자열
-stroke__params__gray = 숫자: 회색값
-stroke__params__values = 숫자 배열[]: 색상의 빨강값, 초록값, 파랑값, 그리고 알파값을 포함한 배열
-stroke__params__color = p5.Color: 선의 색상
-erase__description__0 = erase() 함수의 영향을 받는 모든 드로잉을 캔버스로부터 지웁니다. 지워진 영역은 캔버스 이면의 웹 페이지 화면을 드러냅니다. 이러한 지우기 행위는 noErase()로 취소할 수 있습니다.
-erase__description__1 = erase() 함수와 noErase() 함수 사이에서 image()나 background()로 그려진 드로잉은 캔버스에서 지워지지 않습니다.
-erase__params__strengthFill = 숫자: (선택 사항) 도형의 면을 지우는 강도로서의 (0부터 255사이) 숫자. 별도 지정한 숫자가 없는 경우, 최고 강도인 255가 기본값으로 적용
-erase__params__strengthStroke = 숫자: (선택 사항) 도형의 테두리를 지우는 강도로서의 (0부터 255사이) 숫자. 별도 지정한 숫자가 없는 경우, 최고 강도인 255가 기본값으로 적용
-noErase__description__0 = erase()의 지우기 행위를 중단합니다. fill(), stroke(), 그리고 blendMode() 함수로 설정된 사항들은 erase() 함수가 호출되기 전의 상태로 돌아갑니다.
-arc__description__0 = 화면에 호, 즉 아치형 선을 그립니다. x좌표, y좌표, w(너비), h(높이), 시작점, 끝점을 지정하면 호는 열린 파이 조각의 형태로 그려집니다. 모드 변수를 설정하기에 따라, 호는 각각 반원(OPEN), 닫힌 반원(CHORD), 닫힌 파이 조각(PIE) 형태로 그려집니다. ellipseMode() 함수를 이용하면 시작점을 변경할 수 있습니다.
-arc__description__1 = 호는 언제나 시계방향으로 시작점으로부터 끝점까지 그려집니다. 만약 원 하나를 그리기 위해 arc()의 시작점을 0으로, 끝점을 TWO_PI으로 설정할 경우, 시작점과 끝점이 동일하여 아무것도 그려지지 않습니다. 원을 그릴 때는 ellipse() 함수를, 원의 일부를 그릴 때는 arc() 함수를 이용할 수 있습니다.
-arc__params__x = 숫자: 호를 포함하는 원의 x좌표
-arc__params__y = 숫자: 호를 포함하는 원의 y좌표값
-arc__params__w = 숫자: 호를 포함하는 원의 너비값
-arc__params__h = 숫자: 호를 포함하는 원의 높이값
-arc__params__start = 숫자: 라디안 단위, 호의 시작점 각도값
-arc__params__stop = 숫자: 라디안 단위, 호의 끝점 각도값
-arc__params__mode = 상수: (선택 사항) 호를 그리는 방식들로, CHORD, PIEC, OPEN 중 선택 가능
-arc__params__detail = 숫자: (선택 사항) 호의 윤곽선을 구성하는 꼭짓점 개수를 지정. 기본값은 25. (WebGL 모드용)
-ellipse__description__0 = 화면에 타원을 그립니다. 너비와 높이가 동일한 값으로 지정될 경우, 원이 그려집니다. 처음 두 변수는 각각 타원의 x좌표와 y좌표를, 3번째와 4번째 변수는 각각 타원의 너비와 높이를 지정합니다. 높이값 입력을 생략할 경우, 너비값이 높이값으로 동일하게 적용됩니다. 너비나 높이에 음수로 입력해도 그 절대값이 반영됩니다.
-ellipse__description__1 = ellipseMode() 함수를 이용하면 타원의 시작점을 원의 중심으로 지정할 지의 여부를 결정할 수 있습니다.
-ellipse__params__x = 숫자: 타원의 x좌표
-ellipse__params__y = 숫자: 타원의 y좌표값
-ellipse__params__w = 숫자: 타원의 너비값
-ellipse__params__h = 숫자: (선택사항) 타원의 높이값
-ellipse__params__detail = 정수: (선택사항) 타원을 몇 개의 부분으로 나누어 그릴 것인지 지정 (WebGL 모드용)
-circle__description__0 = 화면에 원을 그립니다. 원은 닫힌 도형으로, 중심점으로부터 주어진 거리에있는 모든 점들의 집합입니다.이 함수는 높이와 너비가 다른 타원을 그려내는 ellipse() 함수와는 달리, 너비와 높이가 모두 동일한 원을 그립니다. 이 경우, 높이와 너비는 원의 지름과 같습니다. 기본값으로, 처음 두 매개변수는 원의 중심 위치를 설정하고, 세 번째 매개 변수는 원의 지름을 설정합니다.
-circle__params__x = 숫자: 원 중심점의 x좌표
-circle__params__y = 숫자: 원 중심점의 y좌표
-circle__params__d = 숫자: 원의 지름
-line__description__0 = 화면에 선분, 즉 두 점을 연결하는 곧은 선을 그립니다. line() 함수에 4개의 변수를 입력하여 이차원 평면에 선을 그릴 수 있습니다. stroke() 함수를 사용해 선의 색상을 지정할 수 있습니다. 선은 면을 갖지 않으므로, 면채우기 함수인 fill()은 적용되지 않습니다. 기본값으로 제공되는 선의 두께는 1픽셀이며, 이를 변경하기 위해 strokeWeight() 함수를 사용할 수 있습니다.
-line__params__x1 = 숫자: 1번째 점의 x좌표값
-line__params__y1 = 숫자: 1번째 점의 y좌표값
-line__params__x2 = 숫자: 2번째 점의 y좌표값
-line__params__y2 = 숫자: 1번째 점의 z좌표값
-line__params__z1 = 숫자: 2번째 점의 x좌표값
-line__params__z2 = 숫자: 2번째 점의 z좌표값
-point__description__0 = 화면 좌표에 해당하는, 1픽셀 크기의 점을 그립니다. 첫 번째 매개변수는 점의 x좌표값을, 두 번째 매개변수는 점의 y좌표값입니다. 점의 색상은 stroke() 함수로 변경할 수 있습니다. 점의 크기는 strokeWeight() 함수로 변경할 수 있습니다.
-point__params__x = 숫자: x좌표값
-point__params__y = 숫자: y좌표값
-point__params__z = 숫자: z좌표값 (WebGL 모드용)
-point__params__coordinate_vector = p5.Vector: 좌표 벡터
-quad__description__0 = 사각형을 그립니다. 사각형은 4개의 변을 가진 다각형으로, 얼핏 직사각형과 유사하게 들리나 직사각형과는 달리 변 사이의 각도가 90도로 고정되어 있지 않습니다. 처음 한 쌍의 변수는 최초의 꼭짓점을 설정하며, 뒤이은 다른 쌍들은 시계 방향이나 반시계 방향에 따라 나머지 3개의 꼭짓점 위치를 설정합니다. z 변수는 WebGL 모드에서 quad() 함수를 사용하는 경우에만 적용됩니다.
-quad__params__x1 = 숫자: 1번째 꼭짓점의 x좌표값
-quad__params__y1 = 숫자: 1번째 꼭짓점의 y좌표값
-quad__params__x2 = 숫자: 2번째 꼭짓점의 y좌표값
-quad__params__y2 = 숫자: 3번째 꼭짓점의 x좌표값
-quad__params__x3 = 숫자: 4번째 꼭짓점의 x좌표값
-quad__params__y3 = 숫자: 4번째 꼭짓점의 y좌표값
-quad__params__x4 = 숫자: 2번째 꼭짓점의 z좌표값
-quad__params__y4 = 숫자: 3번째 꼭짓점의 z좌표값
-quad__params__detailX = 숫자: (선택 사항) 가로축에 있는 세그멘트의 수
-quad__params__detailY = 숫자: (선택 사항) 세로축에 있는 세그멘트의 수
-quad__params__z1 = 숫자: 2번째 꼭짓점의 x좌표값
-quad__params__z2 = 숫자: 3번째 꼭짓점의 y좌표값
-quad__params__z3 = 숫자: 1번째 꼭짓점의 z좌표값
-quad__params__z4 = 숫자: 4번째 꼭짓점의 z좌표값
-rect__description__0 = 화면에 직사각형을 그립니다. 직사각형은 변이 4개이고 모든 변 사이의 각도가 90도인 도형을 뜻합니다. 처음 두 변수는 좌측 상단 꼭짓점의 좌표를, 3번째 변수는 사각형의 너비를, 4번째 변수는 그 높이를 설정합니다. rectMode() 함수로 사각형 그리기 모드를 변경하면, 모든 매개변수값들이 달리 해석됩니다.
-rect__description__1 = 5번째, 6번째, 7번째, 8번째 매개변수를 입력하면, 각각 좌측 상단, 우측 상단, 우측 하단, 좌측 하단 모퉁이들의 각도를 지정하게 됩니다. 이 때 특정 각도 변수가 누락되면, 직전에 입력된 변수와 동일한 값이 적용됩니다.
-rect__params__x = 숫자: 직사각형의 x좌표값
-rect__params__y = 숫자: 직사각형의 y좌표값
-rect__params__w = 숫자: 직사각형의 너비값
-rect__params__h = 숫자: 직사각형의 높이값
-rect__params__tl = 숫자: (선택 사항) 좌측 상단 모퉁이 각도값.
-rect__params__tr = 숫자: (선택 사항) 우측 상단 모퉁이 각도값.
-rect__params__br = 숫자: (선택 사항) 우측 하단 모퉁이 각도값.
-rect__params__bl = 숫자: (선택 사항) 좌측 하단 모퉁이 각도값.
-rect__params__detailX = 정수: (선택 사항) x축 방향의 선분 수 (WebGL 모드용)
-rect__params__detailY = 정수: (선택 사항) y축 방향의 선분 수 (WebGL 모드용)
-square__description__0 = 화면에 정사각형을 그립니다. 정사각형은 동일한 길이의 네 개의 변을 갖고, 모든 변 사이의 각도가 90도인 도형을 뜻합니다. 이 함수는 rect()함수의 특수한 사례와도 같은데, 너비와 높이가 같고 변의 길이를 라는 매개변수로 처리하게 됩니다. 기본값으로, 처음 두 변수는 처음 두 변수는 좌측 상단 꼭짓점의 좌표를, 3번째 변수는 변의 길이를 지정합니다. rectMode() 함수로 사각형 그리기 모드를 변경하면, 모든 매개변수값들이 달리 해석됩니다.
-square__description__1 = 5번째, 6번째, 7번째매개변수를 입력하면, 각각 좌측 상단, 우측 상단, 우측 하단, 좌측 하단 모퉁이들의 각도를 지정하게 됩니다. 이 때 특정 각도 변수가 누락되면, 직전에 입력된 변수와 동일한 값이 적용됩니다.
-square__params__x = 숫자: 정사각형의 x좌표값
-square__params__y = 숫자: 정사각형의 y좌표값
-square__params__s = 숫자: 정사각형의 너비 및 높이값
-square__params__tl = 숫자: (선택 사항) 좌측 상단 모퉁이 각도값.
-square__params__tr = 숫자: (선택 사항) 우측 상단 모퉁이 각도값.
-square__params__br = 숫자: (선택 사항) 우측 하단 모퉁이 각도값.
-square__params__bl = 숫자: (선택 사항) 좌측 하단 모퉁이 각도값.
-triangle__description__0 = 삼각형은 세 개의 점을 이어 만들어진 평면을 뜻합니다. 처음 두 인수는 1번째 꼭짓점을, 중간의 두 변수는 2번째 꼭짓점을, 마지막 두 인수는 3번째 꼭짓점을 지정합니다.
-triangle__params__x1 = 숫자：1번째 꼭짓점의 x좌표값
-triangle__params__y1 = 숫자：1번째 꼭짓점의 y좌표값
-triangle__params__x2 = 숫자：2번째 꼭짓점의 x좌표값
-triangle__params__y2 = 숫자：2번째 꼭짓점의 y좌표값
-triangle__params__x3 = 숫자：3번째 꼭짓점의 x좌표값
-triangle__params__y3 = 숫자：3번째 꼭짓점의 y좌표값
-ellipseMode__description__0 = ellipse(), circle(), 그리고 arc() 함수의 매개변수들이 해석되는 방식을 변경하여, 타원이 그려지는 시작점 위치를 변경합니다.
-ellipseMode__description__1 = 기본적으로 제공되는 모드는 ellipseMode(CENTER) 함수와도 같습니다. 이는 ellipse() 함수의 처음 두 매개변수를 타원의 중심점으로, 3번째와 4번째 변수를 각각 그 너비와 높이값으로서 해석합니다.
-ellipseMode__description__2 = ellipseMode(RADIUS) 역시 ellipse() 함수의 처음 두 매개변수를 타원의 중심점으로 해석하나, 3번째와 4번째 변수를 각각 너비와 높이의 중간 지점값으로 해석합니다.
-ellipseMode__description__3 = ellipseMode(CORNER)는 ellipse() 함수의 처음 두 매개변수를 도형의 좌측 상단을 기준으로 해석하고, 3번째와 4번째 변수를 각각 그 너비와 높이로 해석합니다.
-ellipseMode__description__4 = ellipseMode(CORNERS)는 ellipse() 함수의 처음 두 매개변수를 도형의 바운딩 박스 중 한 모퉁이의 위치값으로서 해석합니다. 그리고, 3번째와 4번째 변수는 그 정반대 모퉁이의 위치값으로 해석합니다.
-ellipseMode__description__5 = 이 함수의 모든 매개변수(CENTER, RADIUS, CORNER, CORNERS)들은 반드시 대문자로 작성되어야 합니다. 자바스크립트에서는 대소문자 구분이 매우 중요하답니다.
-ellipseMode__params__mode = 상수：CENTER, RADIUS, CORNER, 또는 CORNERS
-noSmooth__description__0 = 모든 그래픽의 가장자리를 울퉁불퉁하게 처리합니다. smooth() 함수는 2D 모드상 언제나 기본값으로 활성화되며, 그래픽을 부드럽게 처리합니다. 따라서, noSmooth() 함수를 호출해야만 도형, 이미지, 폰트 등의 부드러운 처리를 비활성화할 수 있습니다. 반면, 3D 모드에서는 noSmooth()가 기본값으로 활성화됩니다. 따라서, smooth() 함수를 호출해야만 부드러운 처리가 가능합니다.
-rectMode__description__0 = rect() 함수의 매개변수들이 해석되는 방식을 변경하여, 직사각형이 그려지는 시작점 위치를 변경합니다.
-rectMode__description__1 = 기본적으로 제공되는 모드는 rectMode(CORNER) 함수와도 같습니다. 이는 rect() 함수의 처음 두 매개변수를도형의 좌측 상단을 기준으로 해석하고, 3번째와 4번째 변수를 각각 그 너비와 높이값로서 해석합니다.
-rectMode__description__2 = rectMode(CORNERS)는 rect() 함수의 처음 두 매개변수를 한 모퉁이의 위치값으로 서 해석합니다. 그리고, 3번째와 4번째 변수는 그 정반대 모퉁이의 위치값으로 해석합니다.
-rectMode__description__3 = ellipseMode(CENTER)는 rect() 함수의 처음 두 매개변수를 타원의 중심점으로, 3번째와 4번째 변수를 각각 그 너비와 높이값으로서 해석합니다.
-rectMode__description__4 = rectMode(RADIUS) 역시 rect() 함수의 처음 두 매개변수를 타원의 중심점으로 해석하나, 3번째와 4번째 변수를 각각 너비와 높이의 중간 지점값으로 해석합니다.
-rectMode__description__5 = 이 함수의 모든 매개변수(CORNER, CORNERS, CENTER, RADIUS)들은 반드시 대문자로 작성되어야 합니다. 자바스크립트에서는 대소문자 구분이 매우 중요하답니다.
-rectMode__params__mode = 상수：CORNER, CORNERS, CENTER 또는 RADIUS
-smooth__description__0 = 모든 그래픽을 부드럽게 처리하며, 불러온 이미지 또는 크기가 재조정된 이미지의 화질을 향상합니다. smooth()는 2D 모드상 언제나 기본값으로 활성화되며. 따라서, noSmooth() 함수를 호출해야만 도형, 이미지, 폰트 등의 부드러운 그래픽 처리를 비활성화할 수 있습니다. 반면, 3D 모드에서는 noSmooth()가 기본값으로 활성화됩니다. 따라서, smooth() 함수를 호출해야만 부드러운 그래픽 처리가 가능합니다.
-strokeCap__description__0 = 선의 양끝에 대한 렌더링 스타일을 설정합니다. 선의 양끝은 매개변수 SQAURE로 각지게, PROJECT로 조금 더 길게, 그리고 ROUND로 둥글게 처리될 수 있습니다. 이 중에서 ROUND는 기본값으로 적용됩니다.
-strokeCap__description__1 = The parameter to this method must be written in ALL CAPS because they are predefined as constants in ALL CAPS and Javascript is a case-sensitive language.
-strokeCap__params__cap = 상수：SQUARE, PROJECT 또는 ROUND
-strokeJoin__description__0 = 두 선분 간의 이음새에 대한 스타일을 설정합니다. 이음새는 매개변수 MITER로 각지게, BEVEL로 베벨 처리되듯 비스듬히 깎인 형태로, ROUND로 둥글게 처리될 수 있습니다. 이 중에서 MITER는 기본값으로 적용됩니다.
-strokeJoin__description__1 = The parameter to this method must be written in ALL CAPS because they are predefined as constants in ALL CAPS and Javascript is a case-sensitive language.
-strokeJoin__params__join = 상수：MITER, BEVEL 또는 ROUND
-strokeWeight__description__0 = 선, 점, 그리고 도형 윤곽선을 그릴 때 쓰이는 함수인 stroke()의 결과값 두께를 설정합니다. 모든 두께는 픽셀 단위로 지정됩니다.
-strokeWeight__params__weight = 숫자：선의 두께 (픽셀 단위)
-bezier__description__0 = 화면에 3차 베지에 곡선을 그립니다. 베지에 곡선은 일련의 고정점 및 제어점들로 정의됩니다. 처음 두 매개변수는 1번째 고정점을, 마지막 두 매개변수는 마지막 고정점을 지정합니다. 중간의 두 매개변수는 두 개의 제어점을 지정하며, 이는 곧 곡선의 모양을 정의하게 됩니다. 여기서 제어점은 그 자신을 향해 곡선을 당기는 역할을 합니다.
-bezier__description__1 = 베지에 곡선은 프랑스 출신 자동차 엔지니어인 피에르 베지에(Pierre Bezier)가 개발하였으며, 컴퓨터 그래픽상 부드럽게 경사진 곡선을 정의하는 데에 주로 사용됩니다. curve() 함수와도 관련있습니다.
-bezier__params__x1 = 숫자: 1번째 고정점의 x좌표값
-bezier__params__y1 = 숫자: 1번째 고정점의 y좌표값
-bezier__params__x2 = 숫자: 1번째 제어점의 x좌표값
-bezier__params__y2 = 숫자: 1번째 제어점의 y좌표값
-bezier__params__x3 = 숫자: 2번째 제어점의 x좌표값
-bezier__params__y3 = 숫자: 2번째 제어점의 y좌표값
-bezier__params__x4 = 숫자: 2번째 고정점의 x좌표값
-bezier__params__y4 = 숫자: 2번째 고정점의 y좌표값
-bezier__params__z1 = 숫자: 1번째 고정점의 z좌표값
-bezier__params__z2 = 숫자: 1번째 제어점의 z좌표값
-bezier__params__z3 = 숫자: 2번째 제어점의 z좌표값
-bezier__params__z4 = 숫자: 2번째 고정점의 z좌표값
-bezierDetail__description__0 = 베지에 곡선들의 해상도를 설정합니다. 기본값은 20입니다.
-bezierDetail__description__1 = 이 함수는 WebGL 렌더러용으로만 사용되며, 기본 캔버스 렌더러에서는 이 함수를 사용하지 않습니다.
-bezierDetail__params__detail = 숫자: 곡선들의 해상도값
-bezierPoint__description__0 = 점 a, b, c, d로 정의된 베지에 곡선에서 위치 t를 계산합니다. 매개변수 a와 d는 각각 곡선의 1번째 점과 마지막 점에, b와 c는 제어점에 해당합니다. 마지막 매개변수인 t는 0과 1사이에서 표현됩니다. 함수는 먼저 x좌표를 호출한 다음, y좌표를 호출하여 위치 t를 찾게됩니다.
-bezierPoint__returns = 숫자: 위치 t에 해당하는 베지에 곡선의 값
-bezierPoint__params__a = 숫자: 곡선의 1번째 점 좌표값
-bezierPoint__params__b = 숫자: 1번째 제어점 좌표값
-bezierPoint__params__c = 숫자: 2번째 제어점 좌표값
-bezierPoint__params__d = 숫자: 곡선의 2번째 점 좌표값
-bezierPoint__params__t = 숫자: 0과 1 사이의 값
-bezierTangent__description__0 = 위치 t에서 곡선의 점 a, b, c, d에 대한 탄젠트를 계산합니다. 매개변수 a와 d는 각각 곡선의 1번째 점과 마지막 점에, b와 c는 제어점에 해당합니다. 마지막 매개변수인 t는 0과 1사이에서 표현됩니다.
-bezierTangent__returns = 숫자: 위치 t에 해당하는 탄젠트
-bezierTangent__params__a = 숫자: 곡선의 1번째 점 좌표값
-bezierTangent__params__b = 숫자: 1번째 제어점 좌표값
-bezierTangent__params__c = 숫자: 2번째 제어점 좌표값
-bezierTangent__params__d = 숫자: 곡선의 2번째 점 좌표값
-bezierTangent__params__t = 숫자: 0과 1 사이의 값
-curve__description__0 = 화면에 두 점 사이에 위치한 곡선을 그립니다. 이 때, 곡선의 형태는 함수의 매개변수들 중 가운데 네 개를 통해 정의됩니다. 처음 두 매개변수는 1번째 제어점의 좌표값을 지정하는데, 마치 이 제어점에서 곡선이 비롯된 것처럼 보이게 됩니다. 마지막 두 매개변수들은 마찬가지 원리로 또다른 제어점의 좌표를 지정합니다. curve() 함수를 조합하거나 curveVertex()를 사용하여 좀 더 긴 곡선을 만들 수 있습니다. 부가적으로, curveTightness()을 통해 곡선의 화질을 조절할 수 있습니다. curve() 함수는 캣멀롬 스플라인(Catmull-Rom Spline)을 구현합니다.
-curve__params__x1 = 숫자: 최초 제어점의 x좌표값
-curve__params__y1 = 숫자: 최초 제어점의 y좌표값
-curve__params__x2 = 숫자: 1번째 점의 y좌표값
-curve__params__y2 = 숫자: 2번째 점의 x좌표값
-curve__params__x3 = 숫자: 마지막 제어점의 x좌표값
-curve__params__y3 = 숫자: 마지막 제어점의 y좌표값
-curve__params__x4 = 숫자: 1번째 점의 z좌표값
-curve__params__y4 = 숫자: 2번째 점의 z좌표값
-curve__params__z1 = 숫자: 1번째 점의 x좌표값
-curve__params__z2 = 숫자: 2번째 점의 y좌표값
-curve__params__z3 = 숫자: 최초 제어점의 z좌표값
-curve__params__z4 = 숫자: 마지막 제어점의 z좌표값
-curveDetail__description__0 = 곡선들의 해상도를 설정합니다. 기본값은 20이고, 최소값은 3입니다. -curveDetail__description__1 = 이 함수는 WebGL 렌더러용으로만 사용되며, 기본 캔버스 렌더러에서는 이 함수를 사용하지 않습니다. -curveDetail__description__2 = -curveDetail__params__resolution = 숫자: 곡선들의 해상도값 -curveTightness__description__0 = curve()와 curveVertex() 함수를 사용하여 모양을 변경합니다. 곡선의 팽팽함(tightness)을 지정하는 매개변수 t는, 두 꼭짓점 사이에 곡선이 들어맞는 정도를 결정합니다. 값 0.0은 곡선의 팽팽함에 대한 기본값이며(이 값을 통해 곡선을 캣멀롬 스플라인으로 정의), 값 1.0은 모든 점을 직선 상태로 연결하게 됩니다. -5.0와 5.0 사이의 값들은 화면상 인식 가능한 범위 내에서 값의 크기에 비례하여 곡선을 변형합니다. -curveTightness__params__amount = 숫자: 원래 꼭짓점으로부터 변형된 정도의 양 -curvePoint__description__0 = 점 a, b, c, d로 정의된 곡선에서 위치 t를 계산합니다. 매개변수 a와 d는 곡선의 제어점에, b와 c는 각각 곡선의 시작점과 끝점에 해당합니다. 마지막 매개변수인 t는 0과 1사이에서 표현됩니다. 함수는 먼저 x좌표를 호출한 다음, y좌표를 호출하여 위치 t를 찾게됩니다. -curvePoint__returns = 숫자: 위치 t에 해당하는 베지어값 -curvePoint__params__a = 숫자: 곡선의 1번째 제어점 좌표값 -curvePoint__params__b = 숫자: 1번째 점 좌표값 -curvePoint__params__c = 숫자: 2번째 점 좌표값 -curvePoint__params__d = 숫자: 곡선의 2번째 제어점 좌표값 -curvePoint__params__t = 숫자: 0과 1 사이의 값 -curveTangent__description__0 = 위치 t에서 곡선의 점 a, b, c, d에 대한 탄젠트를 계산합니다. 매개변수 a와 d는 각각 곡선 위 점에, b와 c는 제어점에 해당합니다. 마지막 매개변수인 t는 0과 1사이에서 표현됩니다. -curveTangent__returns = 숫자: 위치 t에 해당하는 탄젠트 -curveTangent__params__a = 숫자: 곡선의 1번째 점 좌표값 -curveTangent__params__b = 숫자: 1번째 제어점 좌표값 -curveTangent__params__c = 숫자: 2번째 제어점 좌표값 -curveTangent__params__d = 숫자: 곡선의 2번째 점 좌표값 -curveTangent__params__t = 숫자: 0과 1 사이의 값 -beginContour__description__0 = beginContour()와 endContour() 함수를 사용하여 특정 도형 내부에 그 음수 좌표에 상응하는 동일한 도형 윤곽선을 그릴 수 있습니다. 예를 들어, 동그라미의 안쪽에 또다른 작은 동그라미를 그릴 수 있습니다. beginContour()는 도형의 꼭짓점을 기록하기 시작하고, endContour()는 그 기록을 중지합니다. 이 때, 안쪽의 도형을 정의하는 꼭짓점은 바깥쪽의 도형과 반대 순서로 그려져야 합니다. 먼저 바깥에 위치한 원래 도형의 꼭짓점을 시계 방향으로 그리고, 그 다음 내부의 도형을 시계 반대 방향으로 그립니다. -beginContour__description__1 = beginContour()/endContour() 함수는 반드시 beginShape()//Shape">endShape() 함수 사이에 작성되어야 합니다. 또한, beingContour()/endContour() 함수 사이에는 translate(), rotate(), scale()과 같은 변형 함수나 ellipse() 및 rect()와 같은 도형그리기 함수가 사용될 수 없습니다. -beginContour__description__2 = -beginShape__description__0 = beginShape()과 endShape()를 사용하여 좀 더 복잡한 모양을 만들 수 있습니다. beingShape()은 도형의 꼭짓점을 기록하기 시작하고, endShape()은 그 기록을 중지합니다. 함수의 매개변수를 통해 꼭짓점으로 어떤 도형을 그릴지 결정할 수 있습니다. 별도의 매개변수가 지정되지 않으면, 비정형의 다각형이 그려집니다. -beginShape__description__1 = beginShape()에 쓰이는 매개변수로는 POINTS, LINES, TRIANGLES, TRIANGLE_FAN, TRIANGLE_STRIP, QUADS, QUAD_STRIP, 그리고 TESS(WebGL 전용)가 있습니다. beginShape() 함수를 호출한 다음, 꼭짓점 지정을 위해 vertex() 명령문을 반드시 작성해야 합니다. 도형그리기를 멈추려면 endShape() 함수를 호출하면 됩니다. 각 도형은 현재 지정된 선그리기(stroke) 및 면채우기(fill) 색상으로 그려집니다. -beginShape__description__2 = beginShape()와 endShape() 함수들 사이에는 translate(), rotate(), scale()과 같은 변형 함수나 ellipse(), rect()와 같은 도형그리기 함수를 사용할 수 없습니다. -beginShape__description__3 = LINES - 여려 개의 분리 된 선들을 그립니다. -beginShape__description__4 = TRIANGLES - 여러 개의 분리 된 삼각형들을 그립니다. -beginShape__description__5 = TRIANGLE_FAN - 여러 개의 연결 된 삼각형들을 그립니다. 이 삼각형들은 첫 꼭짓점을 공통적으로 하며 부채 모양으로 그려집니다. -beginShape__description__6 = TRIANGLE_STRIP - 여러 개의 연결 된 삼각형들을 그립니다. 이 삼각형들은 한 줄로 그려집니다. -beginShape__description__7 = QUADS - 여러 개의 분리 된 사각형들을 그립니다. -beginShape__description__8 = QUAD_STRIP - 여러 개의 연결 된 사각형들을 한 줄로 그립니다. -beginShape__description__9 = TESS (WebGl만 가능) - 모자이크 세공 (tessellation)을 위한 불규칙적 도형을 그립니다. -beginShape__description__10 = beginShape() 함수는 호출할 시, 이후에 여러 개의 vertex() 명령들을 호출해야 합니다.그림 그리기를 멈추려면 endShape() 함수를 호출합니다. 각 도형은 현재의 윤곽선 색으로 그려지며, 면은 현재의 면 색으로 채워집니다. -beginShape__description__11 = translate(), rotate(), 또는 scale()와 같은 변형 함수들은 beginShape() 함수 안에서 사용할 수 없습니다. 또한, ellipse()와 rect() 같은 함수들을 beginShape() 함수 안에서 사용할 수 없습니다. -beginShape__params__kind = 상수: (선택 사항) POINTS, LINES, TRIANGLES, TRIANGLE_FAN, TRIANGLE_STRIP, QUADS 또는 QUAD_STRIP -bezierVertex__description__0 = 베지에 곡선의 꼭짓점 좌표를 지정합니다. bezierVertex()은 매 호출마다 베지에 곡선의 제어점 2개와 고정점 1개의 위치를 정의하고, 이 새로운 선분을 선 또는 도형에 더합니다. bezierVertex()는 WebGL상 2D 및 3D 모드 모두에 적용될 수 있습니다. 2D 모드에서는 6개의 매개변수가, 3D 모드에서는 9개의 매개변수(z좌표값 포함)가 필요합니다. -bezierVertex__description__1 = beginShape() 함수 안에 작성된 bezierVertex()를 호출하기에 앞서, vertex() 함수를 bezierVertex() 윗줄에 작성하여 곡선의 1번째 고정점을 설정해야 합니다. bezierVertex() 함수는 반드시 beginShape()//Shape">endShape() 함수 사이에 작성되어야하며, beginShape() 함수에 MODE나 POINTS 매개변수가 지정되지 않은 경우에만 사용가능 합니다. -bezierVertex__params__x2 = 숫자: 1번째 제어점의 x좌표값 -bezierVertex__params__y2 = 숫자: 1번째 제어점의 y좌표값 -bezierVertex__params__x3 = 숫자: 2번째 제어점의 x좌표값 -bezierVertex__params__y3 = 숫자: 2번째 제어점의 y좌표값 -bezierVertex__params__x4 = 숫자: 고정점의 x좌표값 -bezierVertex__params__y4 = 숫자: 고정점의 y좌표값 -bezierVertex__params__z2 = 숫자: 1번째 제어점의 z좌표값 (WebGL 모드용) -bezierVertex__params__z3 = 숫자: 2번째 제어점의 z좌표값 (WebGL 모드용) -bezierVertex__params__z4 = 숫자: 고정점의 z좌표값 (WebGL 모드용) -curveVertex__description__0 = 곡선의 꼭짓점 좌표를 지정합니다. 이 함수는 반드시 beginShape()//Shape">endShape() 함수 사이에 작성되어야하며, beginShape() 함수에 MODE나 POINTS 매개변수가 지정되지 않은 경우에만 사용가능 합니다. 또한, 이 함수는 WebGL상 2D 및 3D 모드 모두에 적용될 수 있습니다. 2D 모드에서는 2개의 매개변수가, 3D 모드에서는 3개의 매개변수가 필요합니다. -curveVertex__description__1 = curveVertex()로 그려진 일련의 선들 중 1번째 점과 마지막 점을 통해 각각 전체 곡선의 시작점과 끝점을 알 수 있습니다. 2번째와 3번째 사이에도 작은 곡선을 만들기 위해선 최소 4개의 점들이 필요합니다. curveVertex() 함수로 5번째 점을 추가하면 함수는 2번째, 3번째, 4번째 점들 사이에 곡선을 그립니다. curveVertex() 함수는 캣멀롬 스플라인(Catmull-Rom Spline)을 구현합니다. -curveVertex__params__x = 숫자: 꼭짓점의 x좌표값 -curveVertex__params__y = 숫자: 꼭짓점의 y좌표값 -curveVertex__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) 꼭짓점의 z좌표값 (WebGL 모드용) -endContour__description__0 = beginContour()와 endContour() 함수를 사용하여 특정 도형 내부에 그 음수 좌표에 상응하는 동일한 도형 윤곽선을 그릴 수 있습니다. 예를 들어, 동그라미의 안쪽에 또다른 작은 동그라미를 그릴 수 있습니다. beginContour()는 도형의 꼭짓점을 기록하기 시작하고, endContour()는 그 기록을 중지합니다. 이 때, 안쪽의 도형을 정의하는 꼭짓점은 바깥쪽의 도형과 반대 순서로 그려져야 합니다. 먼저 바깥에 위치한 원래 도형의 꼭짓점을 시계 방향으로 그리고, 그 다음 내부의 도형을 시계 반대 방향으로 그립니다. -endContour__description__1 = beginContour()/endContour() 함수는 반드시 beginShape()//Shape">endShape() 함수 사이에 작성되어야 합니다. 또한, beingContour()/endContour() 함수 사이에는 translate(), rotate(), scale()과 같은 변형 함수나 ellipse() 및 rect()와 같은 도형그리기 함수가 사용될 수 없습니다. -endShape__description__0 = endShape()은 beginShape()과 한 쌍을 이루는 함수로, 반드시 beginShape() 다음에 호출될 수 있습니다. endShape() 함수가 호출되면, beginShape() 함수가 호출된 이래로 정의된 모든 이미지 데이터가이미지 버퍼로서 처리됩니다. endShape()의 MODE 매개변수로는 상수 CLOSE를 씁니다. -endShape__params__mode = 상수: CLOSE로 도형 닫기 -quadraticVertex__description__0 = 2차 베지에 곡선의 꼭짓점 좌표를 지정합니다. quadraticVertex()은 매 호출마다 베지에 곡선의 제어점 1개와 고정점 1개의 위치를 정의하고, 이 새로운 선분을 선 또는 도형에 더합니다. beginShape() 함수 안에 작성된 quadraticVertex()를 호출하기에 앞서, vertex() 함수를 quadraticVertex() 윗줄에 작성하여 곡선의 1번째 고정점을 설정해야 합니다. quadraticVertex()는 WebGL상 2D 및 3D 모드 모두에 적용될 수 있습니다. 2D 모드에서는 6개의 매개변수가, 3D 모드에서는 9개의 매개변수(z좌표값 포함)가 필요합니다. -quadraticVertex__description__1 = quadraticVertex() 함수는 반드시 beginShape()//Shape">endShape() 함수 사이에 작성되어야하며, beginShape() 함수에 MODE나 POINTS 매개변수가 지정되지 않은 경우에만 사용가능 합니다. -quadraticVertex__params__cx = 숫자: 제어점의 x좌표값 -quadraticVertex__params__cy = 숫자: 제어점의 y좌표값 -quadraticVertex__params__x3 = 숫자: 고정점의 y좌표값 -quadraticVertex__params__y3 = 숫자: 제어점의 z좌표값 (WebGL 모드용) -quadraticVertex__params__cz = 숫자: 고정점의 x좌표값 -quadraticVertex__params__z3 = 숫자: 고정점의 z좌표값 (WebGL 모드용) -vertex__description__0 = 모든 도형들은 꼭짓점 연결을 통해 구축됩니다. vertex() 함수를 사용하여 점, 선, 삼각형, 사각형, 그리고 다각형의 꼭짓점 좌표를 지정할 수 있습니다.는 데에 쓰입니다. 이 때, vertex() 함수는 반드시 beginShape()//Shape">endShape() 함수 사이에 작성되어야합니다. -vertex__params__x = 숫자: 꼭짓점의 x좌표값 -vertex__params__y = 숫자: 꼭짓점의 y좌표값 -vertex__params__z = 숫자: 꼭짓점의 z좌표값 -vertex__params__u = 숫자: (선택 사항) 꼭짓점의 u좌표값 -vertex__params__v = 숫자: (선택 사항) 꼭짓점의 v좌표값 -normal__description__0 = 이후에 vertex() 함수로 그려질 꼭짓점들을 위한 3D 꼭짓점의 노멀 (normal)을 설정합니다. 도형의 면에 수직방향이 노멀 벡터이며, 이는 빛의 반사량을 지정합니다. -normal__params__vector = 벡터: 노멀을 표시하는 p5.Vector. -normal__params__x = 숫자: 꼭짓점의 x좌표값 -normal__params__y = 숫자: 꼭짓점의 y좌표값 -normal__params__z = 숫자: 꼭짓점의 z좌표값 -VERSION__description__0 = 본 p5.js 버전. -P2D__description__0 = 기본적 이차원적 렌더러 (2D Renderer). -WEBGL__description__0 = p5.js의 렌더 모드들 중 하나: P2D (기본)와 WEBGL. WEBGL은 제 3의 차원, 'Z'를 추가함으로서 3D 렌더를 가능하게 합니다. -HALF_PI__description__0 = HALF_PI는 1.57079632679489661923 값을 갖는 상수입니다. 지름에 대한 원주율의 절반에 해당하며, 삼각 함수 sin()과 cos()와 함께 쓰면 더욱 유용합니다. -PI__description__0 = PI는 3.14159265358979323846 값을 갖는 상수입니다. 지름에 대한 원주율을 의미하며, 삼각 함수 sin()과 cos()와 함께 쓰면 더욱 유용합니다. -QUARTER_PI__description__0 = QUARTER_PI는 0.7853982 값을 갖는 상수입니다. 지름에 대한 원주율의 1/4에 해당하며, 삼각 함수 sin()과 cos()와 함께 쓰면 더욱 유용합니다. -TAU__description__0 = TAU는 TWO_PI의 약어로, 이는 6.28318530717958647693 값을 갖는 상수입니다. 지름에 대한 원주율의 2배에 해당하며, 삼각 함수 sin()과 cos()와 함께 쓰면 더욱 유용합니다. -TWO_PI__description__0 = TWO_PI는6.28318530717958647693 값을 갖는 상수입니다. 지름에 대한 원주율의 2배에 해당하며, 삼각 함수 sin()과 cos()와 함께 쓰면 더욱 유용합니다. -DEGREES__description__0 = p5.js가 각도를 해석하고 계산하는 방법을 설정하기 위해, angleMode() 함수와 그 매개변수(DEGREES 또는 RADIANS)를 사용합니다. -RADIANS__description__0 = p5.js가 각도를 해석하고 계산하는 방법을 설정하기 위해, angleMode() 함수와 그 매개변수(DEGREES 또는 RADIANS)를 사용합니다. -HSB__description__0 = HSB (색도, 채도값, 발기)는 색상 모델의 일종입니다. 이 링크를 통해 더 자세히 배울 수 있습니. -AUTO__description__0 = AUTO는 특정 요소의 높이나 너비 (둘 중 하나)를 그 요소의 너비나 높이에 따라 자동적으로 정할 수 있게 합니다. 따라서 size()에 AUTO를 지정할 수 있는 매개변수는 1 개로 제한됩니다. -print__description__0 = print() 함수는 브라우저 콘솔창에 출력할 때 사용됩니다. 프로그램이 생성하는 데이터를 확인할 때 주로 도움됩니다. 함수는 매번 호출될 때마다 콘솔창에 새로운 텍스트 줄을 만듭니다. 개별 요소는 큰따옴표로 분리하고, 더하기 연산자(+)로 두 요소를 결합할 수 있습니다. -print__description__1 = - 인수없이 print()를 호출하면, window.print()와 동일하게 브라우저상 인쇄 기능을 켭니다. 콘솔창에 빈 줄을 출력하려면 print(' - ')을 작성하면 됩니다. -print__params__contents = 전부: 출력할 숫자, 문자열, 객체, 불리언, 배열의 조합 -frameCount__description__0 = 시스템 변수 frameCount는 프로그램 시작 이후 화면에 나타난 프레임의 개수를 측정합니다. setup() 함수의 기본값은 0이고, draw() 함수의 첫 번째 반복 실행이 마치면 1씩 증가하는 식입니다. -deltaTime__description__0 = deltaTime 은 전 프레임의 시작 시간과 본 프레임의 시작 시간의 차를 저장합니다. -deltaTime__description__1 = 이 변수는 시간적으로 민감한 애니매시션, 또는 프레임레이트와 관계없이 일정해야 하는 물리학적 계산에 유용합니다. -focused__description__0 = p5.js 프로그램이 등장하는 화면창의 초점이 맞는지 여부를 확인하며, 이는 곧 스케치가 마우스나 키보드 입력을 허용한다는 것을 의미합니다. 화면창의 초점이 맞으면 변수는 true이고, 그렇지 않으면 false입니다. -cursor__description__0 = 마우스 커서를 사전에 정의된 기호나 이미지로 설정하거나, 숨김 상태일 경우 이를 해제합니다. 특정 이미지를 커서로 설정할 경우, 권장 사이즈는 16x16 또는 32x32 입니다. 매개변수 x와 y의 값은 이미지의 실제 크기보다 훨씬 더 작아야 합니다. -cursor__params__type = 문자열|상수: ARROW, CROSS, HAND, MOVE, TEXT, WAIT. CSS 요소인 'grab', 'progress', 'cell' 등. 외부: 커서 이미지의 경로(허용 파일 확장자:.cur, .gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .png, url 주소. 참고:
MDN Entry 발췌 함수(function) 상세 설명 -boolean__description__0 = 불리언 (boolean)은 자바스크립트에서 지정한 7개의 기본 데이터 유형 중 하나입니다. 불리언은 참(true) 또는 거짓(false)으로 값을 나타냅니다. -boolean__description__1 = MDN Entry에서 발췌: 불리언은 논리적 개체를 나타내며 참(true) 또는 거짓(false)이라는 두 개의 값만 갖습니다. -boolean__returns = 불리언: 특정 값의 불리언형 표식 -boolean__params__n = 문자열|불리언|숫자|배열[]: 분해할 값 -string__description__0 = 문자열(string)은 자바스크립트에서 지정한 7개의 기본 데이터 유형 중 하나입니다. 문자열은 일련의 텍스트 문자들을 뜻하며, 자바스크립트에서 문자열 값은 작은 따옴표나 큰따옴표로 묶여 표현됩니다. -string__description__1 = MDN Entry에서 발췌: 문자열은 텍스트를 나타낼 때 사용하는 일련의 문자들입니다. -number__description__0 = 숫자(number)는 자바스크립트에서 지정한 7개의 기본 데이터 유형 중 하나입니다. 숫자는 정수 또는 10진수로 표현됩니다. -number__description__1 = MDN Entry 발췌 숫자(number) 상세 설명은 여기에 있습니다. -object__description__0 = MDN Entry 발췌 객체(object) 기초 설명: 객체(object)는 데이터 그리고/또는 함수의 모음을 뜻합니다. 일반적으로 여러 개의 변수와 함수로 구성됩니다. 변수와 함수가 객체 안에 포함된 경우, 각각을 속성(property)과 메소드(method)라 부릅니다. -class__description__0 = 클래스(class)를 생성하고 그 이름을 지정합니다. 클래스는 객체(object) 생성을 위한 하나의 템플릿입니다. -class__description__1 = MDN Entry에서 발췌: 클래스 선언을 통해 새로운 Class를 생성합니다. 이 때, 새로운 Class의 이름은 프로토타입 기반 상속을 통해 지정됩니다. -for__description__0 = for문을 사용하여 특정 부분의 코드에 대한 반복문(loop)을 만듭니다. -for__description__1 = 'for 반복문 (for loop)'은 괄호 속 3개의 다른 표현식들로 구성되며, 각각의 표현식은 모두 선택 사항입니다. 이 표현식들은 반복 실행(loop)의 횟수를 제어합니다. 1번째 표현식은 반복문의 초기 상태를 설정하는 명령문입니다. 2번째 표현식은 매 반복 실행에 앞서 조건 충족 여부를 확인합니다. 이 표현식이 거짓(false)를 반환하면 반복 실행이 종료됩니다. 3번째 표현식은 반복문의 가장 마지막 단계에 실행됩니다. -for__description__2 = for 반복문의 본문(중괄호 사이의 영역)에 포함된 코드는 2번째와 3번째 표현식의 연산과정 사이에 실행됩니다. -for__description__3 = 여타 반복문과 마찬가지로, for 반복문 역시 반복이 '종료'되는 시점이나, 조건을 더이상 충족하지 않아 거짓(false)으로 연산되는 시점을 명시해야 합니다. 앞서 설명된 2번째 표현식을 통해, for 반복문의 조건이 거짓으로 연산되는 시점을 정할 수 있습니다. for반복문의 조건이 언젠가 거짓으로 처리되는 시점을 지정함으로써, 해당 반복문이 무한으로 실행되지 않도록 처리하기 위함입니다. 그렇지 않으면, 브라우저가 중단될 수 있습니다. -for__description__4 = MDN Entry에서 발췌: for 반복문은 조건이 거짓(false)으로 연산될 때까지 지정된 명령문을 실행합니다. 명령문을 실행한 후에는 조건 충족 여부를 다시 평가하여, 명령문이 최소 1번 실행되도록 합니다. -while__description__0 = while문을 사용하여 특정 부분의 코드에 대한 반복문(loop)을 만듭니다. -while__description__1 = 'while 반복문(while loop)'을 사용하면, 소괄호 속 조건이 거짓(false)이 될 때까지 중괄호 속 본문의 코드가 반복적으로 실행됩니다. for 반복문과 달리, while 반복문은 그 본문 속 코드를 실행하기 앞서 조건 충족 여부를 먼저 확인합니다. 따라서, 최초 실행시 조건이 거짓일 경우, while문 속 본문과 명령문은 절대 실행되지 않습니다. -while__description__2 = 여타 반복문과 마찬가지로, while 반복문 역시 반복이 '종료'되는 시점이나, 조건을 더이상 충족하지 않아 거짓(false)으로 연산되는 시점을 명시해야 합니다. while 반복문의 조건이 언젠가 거짓으로 처리되는 시점을 지정함으로써, 해당 반복문이 무한으로 실행되지 않도록 처리하기 위함입니다. 그렇지 않을 경우, 브라우저가 중단될 수 있습니다. -while__description__3 = MDN Entry에서 발췌: while 반복문은 조건이 참(true)인 경우에 한해 지정된 명령문을 실행합니다. 명령문 실행에 앞서 조건 충족 여부가 평가됩니다. -createCanvas__description__0 = 캔버스를 생성하고 픽셀 단위로 크기를 설정합니다. createCanvas()는 setup() 함수 시작시 단 한 번만 실행되어야 합니다. createCanvas()를 한 번 이상 호출하면 스케치가 예기치 못한 반응을 보일 수 있습니다. 두 개 이상의 캔버스가 필요하다면 createGraphics()를 이용합니다. -createCanvas__description__1 = 설정된 캔버스 사이즈는 시스템 변수인 너비(width)와 높이(height)에 각각 저장됩니다. createCanvas() 함수를 생략하면, 스케치의 크기는 기본값인 100x100 픽셀로 지정됩니다. -createCanvas__description__2 = 캔버스의 위치 지정 방법은 캔버스 위치 지정하기 위키 페이지에 있습니다. -createCanvas__returns = p5.Renderer -createCanvas__params__w = 숫자: 캔버스의 너비값 -createCanvas__params__h = 숫자: 캔버스의 높이값 -createCanvas__params__renderer = 상수: (선택 사항) P2D 또는 WEBGL -resizeCanvas__description__0 = 사용자가 지정한 너비와 높이로 캔버스 크기를 재조정합니다. 이 함수를 사용하면 캔버스는 클리어되며, draw() 함수가 곧바로 호출되어 스케치를 재조정된 크기의 캔버스로 다시 렌더링되게 합니다. -resizeCanvas__params__w = 숫자: 캔버스의 너비값 -resizeCanvas__params__h = 숫자: 캔버스의 높이값 -resizeCanvas__params__noRedraw = 불리언: (선택 사항) 캔버스를 곧바로 다시 그리지 않도록 처리할지의 여부 -noCanvas__description__0 = 캔버스가 불필요한 p5 스케치를 위해 기본적으로 제공되는 캔버스를 제거합니다. -createGraphics__description__0 = 새로운 p5.Renderer 객체를 생성하고 반환합니다. 화면 밖 그래픽 버퍼(off-screen graphic buffer)에 그리려면 이 클래스를 사용합니다. 2개의 매개변수는 너비와 높이를 픽셀 단위로 지정합니다. -createGraphics__returns = p5.Graphics: 화면 밖 그래픽 버퍼 -createGraphics__params__w = 숫자: 화면 밖 그래픽 버퍼의 너비값 -createGraphics__params__h = 숫자: 화면 밖 그래픽 버퍼의 높이값 -createGraphics__params__renderer = 상수：P2D 또는 WEBGL, 기본값은 P2D -blendMode__description__0 = 사용자가 지정한 모드에 따라 디스플레이 화면상의 픽셀들을 혼합합니다. 소스 픽셀 (A)를 디스플레이 화면 (B)상에 있는 픽셀과 혼합하기 위해 다음 모드를 선택할 수 있습니다:
BLEND- 색상 선형 보간:C = (A)*계수 + (B). 기본 혼합 모드입니다.ADD- (A)와 (B)의 합DARKEST- 가장 어두운 색상만 혼합됩니다：C = min(A*계수, B).LIGHTEST- 가장 밝은 색상만 혼합됩니다.：C = max(A*계수, B).DIFFERENCE- 기본 이미지에서 색상값을 뺄셈합니다.EXCLUSION- DIFFERENCE와 유사하지만 덜 극적입니다.MULTIPLY- 색상을 곱하는 것으로, 결과값은 좀 더 어둡습니다.SCREEN- MULTIPLY와 반대로 색상의 반전된 값을 사용합니다.REPLACE- 픽셀이 다른 픽셀을 완전히 대체하며 알파값(투명도)를 사용하지 않습니다.OVERLAY- MULTIPLY와 SCREEN의 혼합으로, 어두운 값을 곱하고 밝은 값의 반전된 값을 사용합니다. (2D)HARD_LIGHT- 회색값이 50%보다 높으면 SCREEN로, 낮으면 MULTIPLY로 처리합니다. (2D)SOFT_LIGHT- DARKEST와 LIGHTEST 혼합으로, OVERLAY처럼 작동하나 덜 강합니다. (2D)DODGE- 밝은 색조를 더 밝게 처리하고 대비를 높이며, 어두운 영역은 무시합니다. (2D)BURN- 어두운 영역이 적용되어 대비가 증가하고 밝기는 무시됩니다. (2D)SUBTRACT- (A)와 (B)의 나머지(3D)
-applyMatrix__description__2 = -applyMatrix__description__3 = -applyMatrix__params__a = 숫자: 곱할 2x3 행렬 정의 -applyMatrix__params__b = 숫자: 곱할 2x3 행렬 정의 -applyMatrix__params__c = 숫자: 곱할 2x3 행렬 정의 -applyMatrix__params__d = 숫자: 곱할 2x3 행렬 정의 -applyMatrix__params__e = 숫자: 곱할 2x3 행렬 정의 -applyMatrix__params__f = 숫자: 곱할 2x3 행렬 정의 -resetMatrix__description__0 = 현재 행렬을 항등 행렬로 바꿉니다. -rotate__description__0 = 사용자가 지정한 각도 매개변수에 따라 도형을 회전합니다. 이 함수는 angleMode() 함수의 영향을 받으며, 괄호 안에 RADIANS 또는 DEGREES를 입력하여 각도가 해석되는 방식을 지정할 수 있습니다. -rotate__description__1 = 객체는 항상 원점에 대한 상대적 위치를 중심으로 회전하며, 양수를 입력할 경우 시계 방향으로 객체를 회전합니다. 이러한 변형(transformation) 함수는 그것이 호출된 뒤 후속적으로 호출된 모든 변형 함수들에 적용됩니다. 예를 들어, rotate(HALF_PI)를 호출한 뒤 rotate(HALF_PI)를 호출하면, 결과적으로 rotate(PI)와 동일한 효과를 갖습니다. 모든 변형은 draw() 함수가 다시 시작하는 시점에 리셋됩니다. -rotate__description__2 = 좀 더 기술적으로 설명하자면, rotate() 함수는 현재 변환 행렬에 회전 행렬을 곱하는 셈입니다. 이 함수는 push()와 pop() 함수를 통해 추가적으로 제어 가능합니다. -rotate__description__3 = -rotate__description__4 = -rotate__params__angle = 숫자: 현재 angleMode의 매개변수인 RADIANS(라디안) 또는 DEGREES(도)의 설정 사항에 따른 회전각 -rotate__params__axis = p5.Vector|숫자 배열[]: (선택 사항) 3D의 경우, 회전축 -rotateX__description__0 = x축을 따라 회전합니다. -rotateX__params__angle = 숫자: 현재 angleMode의 매개변수인 RADIANS(라디안) 또는 DEGREES(도)의 설정 사항에 따른 회전각 -rotateY__description__0 = y축을 따라 회전합니다. -rotateY__params__angle = 숫자: 현재 angleMode의 매개변수인 RADIANS(라디안) 또는 DEGREES(도)의 설정 사항에 따른 회전각 -rotateZ__description__0 = z축을 따라 회전합니다. (WebGL 모드 전용) -rotateZ__params__angle = 숫자: 현재 angleMode의 매개변수인 RADIANS(라디안) 또는 DEGREES(도)의 설정 사항에 따른 회전각 -scale__description__0 = 꼭짓점을 확장하거나 축소하여 도형의 크기를 키우거나 줄입니다. 객체의 크기는 언제나 좌표계에 대한 상대적 원점을 기준으로 조정됩니다. 크기값들은 10진수 백분율로 지정됩니다. 예를 들어, scale(2.0) 함수를 호출하면 도형의 크기를 200% 증가시킵니다. -scale__description__1 = 이러한 변형(transformation) 함수는 호출된 뒤 후속적으로 호출된 모든 변형 함수들에 적용됩니다. 예를 들어, scale(2.0)을 호출한 뒤 scale(1.5)를 호출하면, 결과적으로 scale(3.0)과 동일한 효과를 갖습니다. 모든 변형은 draw() 함수가 다시 시작하는 시점에 리셋됩니다. -scale__description__2 = 매개변수 z는 오직 WebGL 모드에서만 사용 가능합니다. 이 함수는 push()와 pop() 함수를 통해 추가적으로 제어 가능합니다. -scale__description__3 = -scale__description__4 = -scale__params__s = 숫자|p5.Vector|숫자 배열[]：객체 크기를 조정하는 백분율, 또는 여러 인수를 지정할 경우 x축에서의 객체 크기 배율을 조정하는 백분율 -scale__params__y = 숫자: (선택 사항) y축에서의 객체 크기를 조정하는 백분율 -scale__params__z = 숫자: (선택 사항) z축에서의 객체 크기를 조정하는 백분율 (WebGL 모드용) -scale__params__scales = p5.Vector|숫자 배열[]: 축을 기준으로 객체의 크기 조정 -shearX__description__0 = 사용자가 지정한 각도 매개변수에 따라 도형을 x축에서 전단(shear)합니다. 이 함수는 angleMode() 함수의 영향을 받습니다. 객체는 항상 원점에 대한 상대적 위치를 중심으로 전단되며, 양수를 입력할 경우 시계 방향으로 객체를 전단합니다. -shearX__description__1 = 이러한 변형(transformation) 함수는 호출된 뒤 후속적으로 호출된 모든 변형 함수들에 적용되어, 그 효과들이 누적됩니다. 예를 들어, shearX(PI/2)를 호출한 뒤 shearX(PI/2)를 또 호출하면, 결과적으로 shearX(PI)와 동일한 효과를 갖습니다. draw() 함수 내에서 shearX()를 호출하면, 반복 실행이 다시 시작되는 시점에 모든 변형 내용이 리셋됩니다. -shearX__description__2 = 보다 기술적으로 설명하자면, shearX() 함수는 현재 변환 행렬에 회전 행렬을 곱하는 셈입니다. 이 함수는 push()와 pop() 함수를 통해 추가적으로 제어 가능합니다. -shearX__description__3 = -shearX__description__4 = -shearX__params__angle = 숫자: 현재 angleMode의 매개변수인 RADIANS(라디안) 또는 DEGREES(도)의 설정 사항에 따른 전단각 -shearY__description__0 = 사용자가 지정한 각도 매개변수에 따라 도형을 y축에서 전단(shear)합니다. 이 함수는 angleMode() 함수의 영향을 받습니다. 객체는 항상 원점에 대한 상대적 위치를 중심으로 전단되며, 양수를 입력할 경우 시계 방향으로 객체를 전단합니다. -shearY__description__1 = 이러한 변형(transformation) 함수는 호출된 뒤 후속적으로 호출된 모든 변형 함수들에 적용되어, 그 효과들이 누적됩니다. 예를 들어, shearY(PI/2)를 호출한 뒤 shearY(PI/2)를 또 호출하면, 결과적으로 shearY(PI)와 동일한 효과를 갖습니다. draw() 함수 내에서 shearY()를 호출하면, 반복 실행이 다시 시작되는 시점에 모든 변형 내용이 리셋됩니다. -shearY__description__2 = 보다 기술적으로 설명하자면, shearY() 함수는 현재 변환 행렬에 회전 행렬을 곱하는 셈입니다. 이 함수는 push()와 pop() 함수를 통해 추가적으로 제어 가능합니다. -shearY__description__3 = -shearY__description__4 = -shearY__params__angle = 숫자: 현재 angleMode의 매개변수인 RADIANS(라디안) 또는 DEGREES(도)의 설정 사항에 따른 전단각 -translate__description__0 = 디스플레이 화면 내에서 객체를 이동시킬 정도를 지정합니다. 매개변수 x는 좌/우 이동을, 매개변수 y는 상/하 이동을 지정합니다. -translate__description__1 = 이러한 변형(transformation) 함수는 호출된 뒤 후속적으로 호출된 모든 변형 함수들에 적용되어, 그 효과들이 누적됩니다. 예를 들어, translate(50, 0)를 호출한 뒤 translate(20, 0)를 또 호출하면, 결과적으로 translate(70, 0)와 동일한 효과를 갖습니다. draw() 함수 내에서 translate()을 호출하면, 반복 실행이 다시 시작되는 시점에 모든 변형 내용이 리셋됩니다. -translate__description__2 = 이 함수는 push()와 pop() 함수를 통해 추가적으로 제어 가능합니다. -translate__params__x = 숫자: 좌/우 이동 -translate__params__y = 숫자: 상/하 이동 -translate__params__z = 숫자: 앞/뒤 이동 (WebGL 모드용) -translate__params__vector = p5.Vector: 이동시킬 벡터 -storeItem__description__0 = 로컬 저장소에 값을 키 이름(key name)으로 저장합니다. 로컬 저장소는 브라우저에 저장되며, 브라우징 세션과 페이지를 다시 불러오는 사이에 유지됩니다. 키(key)는 변수명과 동일하게 지정될 수 있으나, 반드시 그럴 필요는 없습니다. 저장된 항목(item)을 가져오는 방법은 getItem에 있습니다. -storeItem__description__1 = 비밀번호나 개인 정보와같이 민감한 데이터는 로컬 저장소에 저장되면 안됩니다. -storeItem__params__key = 문자열: -storeItem__params__value = 문자열|숫자|객체|불리언|p5.Color|p5.Vector: -getItem__description__0 = storeItem()로 저장한 항목(item)의 값을 로컬 저장소로부터 반환합니다. -getItem__returns = 숫자|객체|문자열|불리언|p5.Color|p5.Vector: 저장된 항목의 값 -getItem__params__key = 문자열: 로컬 저장소에 저장시 사용할 이름 -clearStorage__description__0 = 현재 영역에서 storeItem()으로 설정된 모든 로컬 저장소 항목(item)을 제거합니다. -removeItem__description__0 = storeItem()으로 저장된 항목(item)을 제거합니다. -removeItem__params__key = 문자열 -createStringDict__description__0 = 키-값(key-value) 쌍 또는 사용자가 지정한 객체를 사용하여 p5.StringDict의 새로운 인스턴스를 생성합니다. -createStringDict__returns = p5.StringDict: -createStringDict__params__key = 문자열: -createStringDict__params__value = 문자열: -createStringDict__params__object = 객체: 객체 -createNumberDict__description__0 = 키-값(key-value) 쌍 또는 사용자가 지정한 객체를 사용하여 p5.NumberDict의 새로운 인스턴스를 생성합니다. -createNumberDict__returns = p5.NumberDict: -createNumberDict__params__key = 숫자: -createNumberDict__params__value = 숫자 -createNumberDict__params__object = 객체: 객체 -select__description__0 = 지정한 ID, 클래스, 또는 태그 이름(접두어 '#'로 ID를, '.'로 클래스 지정 가능, 태그는 별도의 접두어 없음)에 해당하는 요소를 페이지 내에서 검색하고, p5.Element를 반환합니다. 클래스나 태그의 이름이 2개 이상의 요소로 지정된 경우, 1번째 요소만 반환됩니다. 문서 객체 모델 (DOM) 노드는 .elt로 검섹할 수 있습니다. 아무 것도 검색되지 않을 경우 null을 반환합니다. 검색할 컨테이너를 별도로 지정할 수 있습니다. -select__returns = 검색된 노드를 포함한 p5.Element -select__params__selectors = 문자열: 찾을 요소의 CSS 선택 문자열 (selector string) -select__params__container = 문자열|p5.Element|HTML 요소: (선택 사항) id, p5.Element, 또는 HTML 요소 내에서 검색 -selectAll__description__0 = 지정한 클래스 또는 태그 이름('.'로 클래스 지정 가능, 태그는 별도의 접두어 없음)에 해당하는 요소를 페이지 내에서 검색하고, p5.Element 배열로 반환합니다. 문서 객체 모델 (DOM) 노드는 .elt로 검색할 수 있습니다. 아무 것도 검색되지 않을 경우 빈 배열을 반환합니다. 검색할 컨테이너를 별도로 지정할 수 있습니다. -selectAll__returns = 검색된 노드를 포함한 p5.Element 배열 -selectAll__params__selectors = 문자열: 찾을 요소의 CSS 선택 문자열 (selector string) -selectAll__params__container = 문자열: (선택 사항) id, p5.Element, 또는 HTML 요소 내에서 검색 -removeElements__description__0 = createCanvase() 또는 createGraphics()로 생성된 캔버스와 그래픽을 제외하고, p5로 생성된 모든 요소를 제거합니다. 이벤트 핸들러 역시 제거되며, 요소가 문서 객체 모델 (DOM)에서 제거됩니다. -changed__description__0 = .changed() 함수는 요소값이 변경될 때 호출됩니다. 특정 요소의 이벤트 리스너와 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다. -changed__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 요소값이 변경될 때 발생하는 함수. 거짓(false)이 전달되면 이전 실행 함수는 더이상 실행 불가 -input__description__0 = .input() 함수는 요소가 사용자 입력을 감지할 때 호출됩니다. 입력 이벤트는 키 또는 슬라이더 요소의 변경을 감지합니다. 특정 요소의 이벤트 리스너와 연결하는 데에 사용됩니다. -input__params__fxn = 함수|불리언: 요소가 사용자 입력을 감지할 때 발생하는 함수. 거짓(false)이 전달되면 이전 실행 함수는 더이상 실행 불가 -createDiv__description__0 = 주어진 내부 HTML을 사용하여 문서 객체 모델 (DOM)에 요소를 생성합니다. -createDiv__returns = p5.Element: 생성된 노드를 담고있는 p5.Element에 대한 포인터 -createDiv__params__html = 문자열: (선택 사항) 요소를 생성한 내부 HTML -createP__description__0 = 주어진 내부 HTML을 사용하여 문서 객체 모델 (DOM)에 요소를 생성합니다. 문단형 텍스트 작성시 사용됩니다. -createP__returns = p5.Element: 생성된 노드를 담고있는 p5.Element에 대한 포인터 -createP__params__html = 문자열: (선택 사항) 요소를 생성한 내부 HTML -createSpan__description__0 = 주어진 내부 HTML을 사용하여 문서 객체 모델 (DOM)에 요소를 생성합니다. -createSpan__returns = p5.Element: 생성된 노드를 담고있는 p5.Element에 대한 포인터 -createSpan__params__html = 문자열: (선택 사항) 요소를 생성한 내부 HTML -createImg__description__0 = 주어진 src와 대체 텍스트(alt text)를 사용하여 문서 객체 모델 (DOM)에